Pfl 2331 

1856 
Copy 1 



L 




A SYSTEM 

OP 

LATIN PROSODY AND METRE, 



THE BEST AUTHORITIES, 



ANCIENT AND MODERN. 



CHARLES ANTHON, L L.D., 
if 

PROFESSOR OF THE GREEK AND LATIN LANGUAGES IN COLUMBIA COLLEGE 
NEW- YORK, AND RECTOR GF THE GR AMM A.R-SCHOOL. 



NEW YORK: 

HARPER & BROTHERS, PUBLISHERS, 
3 29 & 331 PEARL STREET, 

FRANKLIN SQUARE.) 

1856. 



Entered, according to Act of Congress, in the year A 841, by 

Charles Anthon, 
in the Clerk's Office of the Southern District of New- York 



TO THE 



REV. MATTHEW SIMPSON, D. D., 

President of the Asbury University in the State of Indiana, 
THIS WORK 
IS RESPECTFULLY DEDICATED, 
AS A 

TRIBUTE OF ESTEEM FOR PROFESSIONAL TALENT, AND FOR THE 
DEEP INTEREST WHICH HE HAS EVER EVINCED IN 
THE CAUSE OF TRUE LEARNING. 



PREFACE. 



The author of the present work prepared several years 
ago a Treatise on Latin Prosody and Metre, which met with 
no unfavourable reception, and proved, as he has reason to 
believe, a somewhat useful guide to the young prosodian. 
This volume having been for some time completely out of 
print, the author has been induced to write a new work on 
the subject : one that may not only be more worthy of his 
increased experience as an instructer, but may furnish also 
more detailed information on various points that were neces- 
sarily omitted in the previous treatise. In collecting ma- 
terials for this purpose, the author has derived'important aid 
from the Latin Prosodies of Dr. Carey and Professor Ram- 
say, especially the latter, and he has introduced into the pres- 
ent work whatever appeared of value in these and other 
publications of a similar nature. He does not entertain a 
doubt, therefore, but that the young scholar will find in the 
present volume everything that may be needed by him, not 
only at the commencement, but also throughout the several 
stages, of his academic career. 

Very few rules are given, it will be perceived, for the struc- 
ture of Latin verse. This forms a distinct department of 
study, for which, at some future day, a separate work will be 
prepared ; and this intended work will also contain the Essay 
o f i Leonine and Macaronic Versification, which was to have 
fi rmed part of the present volume, but which has been omit- 
ted through fear of making the work too large a one. 

The Latin metrical rules of Alvarez were given in the pre- 
vious work, but are omitted in this. The practice of giving 
Latin rules in matters of prosody is fast going out of use, 
and deservedly so ; and, besides this, the rules of Alvarez 
are in numerous instances decidedly erroneous. 

Columbia College, Aug. 2, 1841. 



PROSODY. 



SECTION I. 

I. Prosody treats of the Quantity of Syllables, and of the 
different Species of Verse. 1 

II. A Syllable is composed of one or more Letters ; as, 
/, in, in-tus. 

III. Letters are divided into Vowels and Consonants. 

IV. Vowels, or open, free-coming sounds, are six in 
number : A, E, I, O, U, Y. 

V. From the vowels are formed eight Diphthongs : iE, 
AI, AU, EI, EU, (E, 01, UI. 

VI. Consonants, or sounds produced by the compression 
of the organs of speech, are divided into Mutes and Semi- 
vowels. 

VII. The Mutes are eight : B, C, D, G, K, P, Q, T. 

VIII. The Semivowels, which have a sound more open 
than that of the mutes, are likewise eight : F, L, M, N, R, 
S, X, z. 

IX. Of the semivowels four are Liquids, L, M, N, R, 
and they are so called because they flow, as it were, from 
the lips with less exertion than is required in articulating 
the other consonants. 

X. Two other of the semivowels are Double Letters, X 
and Z ; the letter X being equivalent to CS, GS, or KS ; 
and the letter Z to DS or SD. 

1. The Doctrine of Accent will be found under a separate head, im- 
mediately after that part of the present work which treats of Versifica- 
tion. 

B 



14 



QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES. 



XI. The letter H is to be regarded, not as a true conso 
t ant, but as a mere breathing. 

XII. The letter J was altogether unknown to the an- 
cients. It appears that, among the Romans, the letter I 
exercised a double function, being sometimes purely a 
vowel and sometimes a consonant, answering very nearly 
to our y. The character j was introduced, in later times, 
into those words where i had the power of a consonant, 
and therefore of itself, when not followed by another conso- 
nant, could not have lengthened a short vowel. The letter J, 
accordingly, is not, as some maintain, a double consonant. 1 

XIII. The letter V, in like manner, represented among 
the Romans, on some occasions, a consonant, on others a 
vowel sound. And the character U, to indicate it when a 
vowel, is, like the letter J, a modern invention. 

XIV. The letter Q was precisely equivalent in sound to 
C or K, all three being pronounced hard. 

SECTION II. 

QUANTITY OF SYLLABLES. 

I. By the Quantity of a syllable is meant the duration or 
continuance of the voice in pronouncing it. 

II. A syllable is either Short, Long, or Common. 

III. A short syllable is sounded rapidly, and consists of 
what is technically termed one time, like the a in the Eng- 
lish word orator, or the e in the Latin word legere ; and is 
thus marked, legere. 

IV. A long syllable is slowly pronounced, and occupies 
twice the time employed in sounding a short one ; as in the 
a of the English word mediator, or of the Latin word sedare ; 
and is thus marked, sedare. 

V. A common or doubtful syllable may be made long or 



1. Consult remarks on page 27, with regard to such forms as 'ejus, 

cujr.s, &c 



ORIGIN OF PROSODIAL RULES. 



15 



short, at the option of the poet ; as, papyrus or papyrus ; 
fuerimus or fuerimus) 

VI. The quantity of a syllable is either natural, that is, 
dependant on the intrinsic nature of the vowel itself, as the 
re of resisto, in which the e is short by nature ; or accident- 
al, as the re in restiti, which becomes long because it hap- 
pens to be followed by two consonants. 

VII. The quantity of syllables is determined by certain 
established rules, or, when these fail, by the authority of 
the poets. 

VIII. In polysyllables, or long words, the last syllable 
except one is called the penultima, or, more briefly, the 
penult ; and the last syllable except two, the antepenultima, 
or antepenult. 

SECTION III. 

OF THE ORIGIN OF PROSODIAL RULES. 

I. Rules in Prosody originate from a careful examination 
of the works of the best Latin poets. 2 

II. In making such examination, we perceive that, with 
a very few exceptions, the quantity of the same syllable in 
the same words is always the same ; and, by classifying 
those which are analogous, we arrive by induction at cer- 
tain fixed principles, which are imbodied in rules. 

III. In a great many other cases, however, we are una- 
ble to detect any fixed principle, and must rest satisfied 
with saying that we have the authority of the poets for 
making such syllables long or short. 3 

1. Consult remarks on page 29, Observation 1, with regard to a 
short vowel before a mute followed by a liquid. 

2. For some remarks on the relative value of the Latin poets as met- 
rical authorities, consult Appendix. 

3. All prosodial rules, in fact, are based upon the authority of the po- 
ets ; but, according to the usage of prosodians, those syllables only are 
said to be long or short by authority which cannot be reduced to rules. 



L6 



VOWEL BEFORE ANOTHER VOWEL. 



SECTION IV. 
RULES. 

1. A VOWEL BEFORE ANOTHER VOWEL. 

f. A vowel before another vowel, or a diphthong, 19 
short ; &s,fuit, deus, tinea, eximice. 

Tibull. Quis fait, horrendos primus qui protulit enses ? 

Virg. Ipse ctiam eximice laudis succensus amore. 

The letter H being merely a note of aspiration or breath- 
ing, is not regarded in such cases as the present ; and there- 
fore, when h stands between two vowels, the preceding 
vowel is short ; as, nihil, mihi, 

Pers. De nihilo nihil, in nihilum nil posse reverti. 

Virg. Musa, mihi causas memora ; quo numine Iceso 

EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc. 1. Fio has the i long in all its tenses, except m 
those where it is followed by er ; as, fio, fiebam, fiam, 
but fier em, fieri} 

1. It has been conjectured that the old form of fio was few, and that 
the first syllable was long in all the tenses without distinction. Some 
of the parts, however, of these tenses in which er occurs, could not have 
been used at all in Dactylic verse, if the first syllable had been always 
long : thus, f teres, fierent, cannot stand in any place of a Dactylic 
verse, and not even fierem, fieri, without an elision. Hence, when 
the e of the diphthong was dropped, the writers of heroic verse intro- 
duced this change into the quantity of those tenses where it was most 
necessary, preserving the proper and original quantity in the rest. This 
opinion receives much support from the fact, that the Comic writers, who 
lived before the prosody of the language was very accurately defined, and 
whose verse required no such modification of these words, constantly 
used fieret, &c, with the first syllable long ; as, " Injurium 'st nam si 
esset unde id fieret." (Terent., Ad., 1, 2, 2G.) On the other hand, in 
the works of the Christian poets, such as Prudentius, Arator, Tertul- 
lian, &c, not only the first syllable in fierem, &c, but in fio, &c, also, 
is made short. Thus, we have the following Archilochian heptameter 
in Prudentius : M Iamque tuus fieri maiidas, fio Cyprianus alter." 
(Pcrist., 13, 59.) A less accurate mode of explanation is given by 
Vossius (Aristarch., 2, 13), founded upon a passage in Priscian. 
{Ramsay's Latin Prosody, p. 23.) — Of the use of ei in earlier Latinity, 
where, at a later day, the long i was employed, we have numerous ex- 
amples. Thus, on the Duilian column we find castreis, socieis, classeis, 



VOWEL BEFORE ANOTHER VOWEL. 



17 



Ovid. Omnia jam f tent, fieri qua posse negabam. 
Virg. Anchiscs, fierct vento mora ne qua ferenti. 

Exc. 2. The genitives and datives singular of the fifth de- 
clension make e long before i; as, diei, speciei. But it 
is found short in spei, and common in Jidei or Jidei, 
and in rei or rei} 
Virg. Nunc adeo, melior quoniam pars acta diei, 
Senec. Credi periisse. — Vix spei quidquam est super 
(lamb, trim.) 

Lucret. Nec jacere indu manus via qua munita Jidei. 
Statius. Quis morum fideique ? modus nunquamne virili. 
Lucret. Prater ea rei qua corpora mittere possit. 
Horat. Cur tee nescio quid semper abest rei. (Choriamb.) 

naveis, numei ; and in the S. C. de Bacch. we have quei, virei, sibei, 
eeis, vobeis, &c. Consult also Orell., Inscript. hat. Select., n. 626, 
3308, 3673, 4848, &c. 

1. x^ccording to some, the old nominative form of the fifth declension 
was diets, specieis, fidel,s, making in the genitive d,iei-is, speciei-is, 
fidei-is, which case afterward dropped the s, and became dieii, specieii, 
Jideii, and eventually diei, speciei, fidei, the i of the diphthong being 
dropped. (Ramsay's Latin Prosody, p. 22.) The explanation given 
by Bopp, however, is in every way preferable. This eminent philologist 
makes the original form of the nominative to have been die-is, specie-is, 
fide-is, and the genitive to have dropped its characteristic ending s, and 
to have terminated like the old locative in?; thus making die-i, specie-i, 
&c. If we write die-is in Greek characters, Sltj-lc, and call to mind, at 
the same time, the close relation that subsists between the Ionic rj and 
the Doric a, we will perceive at once a remarkable analogy between the 
first and fifth declensions in Latin, and why so many words are found 
belonging, as it were, to each ; as, planitia and planitie-s, canitia and 
canities, &c. In this way, too, we can explain the old form of the 
genitive singular in the first declension, by supposing the nominative to 
have been, for example terra-is, musd is, whence came the genitive 
terrd-i, musd-i, by dropping the s and retaining the locative ending, 
while the Doric a in the nominative terra was displaced by the JBolic d. 
(Bopp, Vergleichende Grammatik, p. 141, seqq. — Id ib., p. 217, seqq.) — 
It remains now to account for such forms as Jidei, rei, &c. In all prob- 
ability we have here merely an attempt to reduce the old forms with the 
long penult to the operation of the general rule. It is worthy of re- 
mark, too, that the examples of jidei all occur in writers of the lower 
age, with. whom it is very common. The subject of the identity of all 
the Latin declensions, which has been merely glanced at in this note, 
may be seen more fully discussed in Bopp's work just referred to, and in 
iStruve's treatise, "Ueber die Lateinische Declination" &c, p. 38, seqq. 

B 2 



18 



VOWEL BEFORE ANOTHER VOWEL. 



Exc. 3. Genitives in ius have the i long in prose, but 
common in poetry. Alterius, however, lias the i al- 
ways short, alius always long. 1 

Virg. Posthabita coluisse Samo ; hie illius arma. 

Id. Tu facie m illius noctem non amplius unam. 

Id. Ipsius Anchiso? longavi hoc munus habebis. 

Id. Nunc ultra ad cineres ipsius et ossa parentis 

Horat. NulUus addictus jurare in verba magistri. 

Virg. Non te nullius exercent numinis irm. 

Id. Uriius ob noxam et furias Ajacis O'ilei. 

Id. Navibus infandum amissis unxus ob iram. 

Exc. 4. Such proper names as Caius, Pompe'ius, Vul- 
te'ius, as also Veius, and the like, have the a or e long 
before i. 2 



1. The authority for the remark that genitives in ius have the penult 
long in prose, is furnished by Quintilian : " Praterca qua jiunt spaiio, 

give cum syllaba longa corripitur, ut unius ob noxam et 

furias; extra carmen non deprehendas" {Inst. Or., 1, 5, 18.) — Bopp 
considers the Latin genitive-ending ius analogous to the Sanscrit termi- 
nation sya, the a being changed to u before the final s by a very usual 
process in early Latin. (Compare the Sanscrit vrka-s with the Latin 
lupu-s, and yung'mas with jungimus.) In accordance with this view of 
the subject, the old genitive forms of illius, ipsius, nullius, &c, will 
have been illi-ius, ipsi-ius, nulli-ius, &c, which, when changed to illius, 
&c, preserved their proper quantity in prose, .although the poets took 
advantage of the circumstance of the i being followed by a vowel, to 
bring them, when it suited their purpose, under the general rule. 
(Bopp, Vergleich. Gramm., p. 220.) — With regard to alterius, it may 
be remarked, that although no instance can be found in any poet of its 
occurring with the long penult, yet there can be no doubt of its having 
been once employed. Indeed, Terentianus Maurus, the grammarian, 
actually uses alterius on one occasion ; in the following Trochaic 
tetrameter catalectic (cap. 3, de Fed., v. 1352): 

" Sescuplo vel una vincet alterius singulum." 
Priscian ascribes the short penult in alterius to the circumstance of the 
genitive's exceeding the nominative by two syllables: "quod duabus 
syllahis vincit genitivus nominativum" (lib. 6, c. 7, p. 695. ed. Putsch.). 
.A most singular explanation, certainly, and yet advocated by Vossius 
(de Art. Gram., 2, 13, p. 150, cd. Foertsch.). — The reason assigned by 
Scaliaer for the long penult of genitives in ius, namely, that they were 
originally written eius, is adopted by Ramsay, but is far inferior to 
Bopp's explanation given above. (Seal., de Caus. L. L., c. 43.) 

2. According to Priscian (7, 5, p. 739), such words as Caius, Pom- 



VOWEL BEFORE ANOTHER VOWEL. 



19 



CatulL Cinna est Caius, is sibi paravit. (Phahccian.) 
Mart. Quod peto da, Cai, non peto consilium. (Pentam.) 
Ovid. Accipe, Pompei, deductum carmen ab Mo. 
Propert. Forte super porta dux Vt'ius adstitit arcem. 



Exc. 5. The a is long in the penult of the old genitive and 
dative of the first declension ; as, auldi, terrain Sic. 1 
Virg. Aulai in medio libabant pocula Bacchi'. 
Lucret. Terraique solum subigentes, cimus ad ortus. 

Exc. 6. The verb aio is, in some of its parts, pronounced 
with the first syllable forming a diphthong, and, conse- 
quently, long ; while in other parts the a and i form 
two short syllables. Thus, we have aio, aiunt, aiebam, 
aiebas, aiebat, &c. ; and, on the other hand, als, alt, &c. 2 

Horat. Servus ; habes pretium, loris non ureris, aio. 

Id. Plebs eris ; at pueri ludentes, Rex eris, aiunt. 

Id. Felicem ! aiebam tacitus. Quum quidlibet ille. 

Id. Non sum moechus als. Neque ego, hercule, fur, ubi 
vasa. 

Id. Nil alt esse prius, melius nil c&libe vita. 



Exc. 7. In ohe 3 and Diana* the first syllable is common; 

pe'ius, Vulie'ius, &c, were originally written Caiius, Pompeiius, Vul- 
teiius. On this supposition we may easily account for the long quantity 
of the first syllable; and hence the vocatives Cai, Pompei, &c, are in 
reality Cai-i, Pompei-i, which last undergoes another contraction, in 
Horace, into Pompei. (Horat., Od., 2, 7, 5.) In like manner, VultU-i 
becomes, in the same poet, Vultel. (Epist., 1, 7, 91.) 

1. The principle on which this exception is based has already been 
stated, in note 1, page 17. 

2. The verb aio was originally written aiio, and in all probability pro- 
nounced al-yo. One of the ^'s being dropped, the a and remaining i 
sometimes formed a diphthong, as in the original form, and sometimes 
two short syllables. (Ramsay's Latin Prosody, p. 24.) Quintilian 
informs us that Cicero actually wrote aiio. (Inst. Or., 1, 4, 11. — 
Consult Spalding, ad loc.) 

3. Ohe, the interjection, follows its primitive O, which, since it can- 
not be elided, because words of this nature require a strong emphasis, 
is made either long or short when it falls before a vowel. (Ramsay's 
Lat. Pros., p. 25.) 

4. Diana was originally Deiva Iana s the lunar goddess, contracted 



20 



VOWEL BEFORE ANOTHER VOWEL. 



in eheu 1 and Io 2 (the daughter of Tnachus) it is lone 
The interjection io follows the general rule. 

Mart. Ohe jam satis est, ohe, libclle. (Phalaecian.) 

Virg. Exercet Diana choros* quam mille secuta. 

Id. Constiterunt, sylva alta Jovis lucusve Diana. 

Tibull. Ferreus est, eheu, quisquis in urbe manet. (Pentam.J 

Virg. Ad levem clypeum sublatis cornibus lo. 

Ovid. Ante oculos lo, quamvis aversus, habebat. 

Virg. Clamat to matres, audite, ubi quceque Latina. 



Exc. 8. In many words of Greek origin a vowel is long, 
though immediately followed by another ; as, aer, 
Acheldus, Enyo, Troas, Troius, &c, the Latin quan 
tity being controlled by that of the Greek words 
whence they are derived. Others, however, would 
appear to differ in quantity from their archetypes ; thus, 
in Latin we have chorea and chorea, while in Greek we 

subsequently into Deiana, and at last becoming Diana. The e of the 
diphthong being dropped* gave rise to the double quantity of Diana, 
since it could be brought under the general principle of one vowel be- 
fore another (Voss., de Art. Gram., 2, 13.— Varro, R. R , 1, 37, 3. — 
Gratv., Thes., vol. 8, p. 31 1 —Nigtd. ap. Macrob., Sat., 1, 9. — Creuzcr, 
Symbolik, par Guigniaut, vol. 2, pt. 1, p. 433.) 

1. The interjection eheu is generally thought to have been abbreviated 
by the transcribers from heu heu. {Heyne, ad Virg., Eclog., 2, 58.— 
Wagner, ad eund.) 

2. As regards Io the proper name, and io the interjection, a differ- 
ence of opinion exists. The ordinary doctrine is, that the first syllable 
of both is doubtful, and so the rule is given in most works on Latin 
prosody. A more correct view of the subject, however, teaches us that 
the first syllable is always short in the interjection, and always long in 
the proper name. In Silius Italicus (14, 517), the old reading was 
" Quaque fercbatur duct.or Sidonius, io," where the interjection occurs 
with a long penult; but the true lection is now given as * l Quaque ve- 
hebatur Grantor Sidonius, 7o," where Io is the name of a ship. — With 
regard to Io, the daughter of Inachus, two lines are found which give 
the word a short penult {Ovid, Her., 14, 103. — Id., Ibis, 024). But in 
the first of these the MSS. vary, and some commentators even regard 
the term as an interjection ; while the other is drawn from a poem of 
doubtful authenticitv, and the text of which is notoriously corrupt. In- 
deed, in this latter line, most editors now adopt the emendation of Hein- 
sius, and read Ion for Io. In Greek, also, this word is always lw. 
LRamsay^s hat. Pros., p. 26.) 



VOWEL BEFORE ANOTHER VOWEL. 



21 



find x°9 eia a l° ne ? an d so also platea, which is no- 
thing more than the feminine adjective -xXarEia} 

Virg. Consurgunt venti, atque in nubem cogitur aer. 
Ovid. Opperiuntur aqua vultus Acheloiis agrestes. 
Claud. Erubuit Mavors, aversaque risit Enyo. 
Virg. Desidice cordi, juvat indulgere choreis. 
Id. Pars pedibus plaudunt choreas et carmina dicunt. 
Horat. Purcp sunt platece, nihil ut meditantibus ohstet. 
Catull. Istos qui in platea modo hue modo illuc. (Phalae- 
cian.) 

Exc. 9. Those words which are written in Greek with 
the diphthong ei (ec), and in Latin with a single e or ?, 
have that e or i long ; as, JEiieas, Alexandria, Anti- 
octiia, Ccesarea, &c. 2 

Virg. Atpius jEneas, per noctem plurima volvens. 

Propert. Noxia Alexandria, dolis aptissima tellus. 



Exc. 10. On the same principle as stated in the prece- 
ding exception, most adjectives in eiis, formed from 
Greek proper names, have the e long ; and it continues 
long when resolved into e'i ; as, Cylhereus and Cythe-> 
reius ; Pagaseus and Pagaseius ; Pelopeus and Pclo* 
pelus. 3 

Virg. Parce metu Cytherea ; manent immota tuorum. 
Ovid. Invocat Hippomenes, Cythereia, comprecor ausis. 
Lucan. Eumenidum vidit vultus Pelopeus Orestes. 
Ovid. Quid quod avus nobis idem Pelopelus Atreus 1 

1. Ramsay endeavours to explain these anomalies by supposing that 
the Romans were in possession of authorities unknown to us. {hat. 
Pros., p. 27.) Prudentius uniformly makes it platea, but his authority 
is of no value. 

2. Many words of this class, such as names of towns, temples, or 
monuments, are in reality only adjectives, with a noun understood ; as, 
'AXeZavfipeta (7roAic), u Alexandria ," or the city of Alexander; Movcei* 
ov (iepov), " Museum" or temple of the Muses ; MavcoyXecov {uvriful 
ov), " Mausoleum" or sepulchre of Mausolus, &c. 

3. Consult remarks on 44 Dicer esis" p. 121. 



22 



VOWEL BEFORE ANOTHER VOWEL. 



Exc. 11. Greek genitives in ens, and accusatives in ea f 
from nominatives in eus, have the penult short accord- 
ing to the common dialect, but long according to the 
Ionic ; as, Orpheos, Orphea ; Antheos, Ant/tea (in 
Greek, 'Op^eoc, 'Op(pea ; 'AvOeog, 'AvOea, by the com- 
mon dialect) ; but Idomeneos, Idomenea; Ilioneos, II- 
ionea (in Greek 'Idofjievrjog, 'Idofievrja ; 'Ikiovrjog, 'IA- 
Lovrja, by the Ionic). 1 

Ovid. At non Chionides JEumolpus in Orphea talis. 

Virg. Prospectum late pelago petit, Anthea si quern. 

Id. Idomenea ducem, desertaque litora Creta. 

Id. Ilionea petit dextra l&vaque Serestum. 



Exc. 12. Academia ought to be regarded as having a long 
penult. 2 In the proper name Orion the second sylla- 



1. We frequently find the quantity vary in words taken from the 
Greek, because they appear in the original language under a double form, 
which often depends on the dialect used by the poet. Thus, we have 
Conopium and Conopeum, because we find in Greek Kovukiov and Kw- 
vcjttelov. So also 'Eous and "Eous, in Greek ij&oc and twoc ; Malea' 
and Malta, from MaTieia and MaAea ; Nereides and Nereides, from N77- 
prjtdeQ and Nypeidec ; Rhea and Rhea, from 'Peta and ( ~Perj ; Dcedaleus, 
Dadaleus, Dadalus, from the triple AacdaTiEtoc, Aac6d?ieoc, AaidaXog, 
&c. (Ramsay's Latin Prosody, p. 27.) 

2. It is always long in the Greek authors, as the following examples 
will prove. 

'A&X elg ' ' kna6rjfuav Kariuv vtto ralg jnopcaic anodpe^EL. (Ana- 
past . Tetram. Cat. — Aristoph., Nub., 1001.) 

*kvf 'AKadrj/LiZae BopSopov ev npoxoalc. (Pentam. — Theocr., Ch. 
ap. Brunch, Anal., vol. 1, p. 184.) 

'Afcadr/filae fjnovaa Tioyov. (Anapaest. Dim. — Epicrat. ap. Athen., 
2, p. 59, D.) 

Avkelov 'kKadrjiJlav Q.16elov Tcvhac. (Iamb. Trim. — Alex. ap. 
Athen., 8, p. 336, E.) 

The two Latin lines quoted in the text give the received quantity of 
Academia in Cicero's time, the first being taken from the treatise " De 
Divinationc" (1, 13), and the second from Laurea Tullius, one of "Cice- 
ro's freedmen, in an epigram preserved by Pliny (31, 2). This decides 
the question as far as the practice of the golden age of Roman literature 
is concerned. In opposition to all this array of authorities in G*eek and 
Latin writers, we have merely one from Claudian, and another from a 
still later poet, Sidonius, who both use Academia with a short penult. 
(Claud., de Cons. M., 1, 94. — Sidon., Ap., 15, 120.) Hermann thinks 
that the penult of 'Afcadnfita was short' by nature, but lengthened by the 



ble is always long in every good Latin writer, although 
it is common in Greek. On the other hand, the first 
syllable is common in Latin, but always long in Greek ; 
, and the third syllable in the oblique case? is also com- 
mon in Latin and long in Greek. 1 
Cic. Inque Academia umbrifera nitidoque Lycceo* 

Laur. Tull. Atque Academics celebratam nomine villam.. 

SECTION V. 
CONTRACTION. 
Rule. Every syllable formed by contraction is long ; as, 
m cogo, contracted for coago or conago ; tibicen, contracted for 
tibiacen or tibucen, &e.' 

Virg. Bis gravidos cogunt foztus, duo tempora messis, 
Ovid. Cur vagus incedit tota tibicen in urbe. 



Obs. 1. Among the contractions of most frequent occur- 
rence, the following may be here enumerated : 
J. Two vowels uniting into one. 
ambages, contracted for ambeages, 2 
indago, " " induago, 3 

alius, " " aViius, 

dis, " " diis, 

audis, " " audiis* 

fill, " " filie, 

force of the accent, as the term was one in frequent and common use. 
(Hcrm. ad Aristoph., Nub., 1001. — Id. de Metris, c. 23. — Class. Journ., 
vol. 6, p. 123.) 

1. It is erroneous to say, as some do, that Orion has the second syl- 
lable common. The true rule is given in the text. In Greek, however, 
the c in 'Oplov, gen. 'Opiuvog, is of variable measure in Homer and the 
epic poets, but short in the tragedians. (Spitzner's Gr. Pros., p. 112.) 

2. Ambe was an old form of amb or am. Compare the Greek 
dfi(j)i. (Varro, L. L., 7, 3.) 

3. Indu or endo was an early form for in. Compare the Greek 
kvdol. 

4. The third conjugation is regarded now as the oldest, and the 1st, 
2d, and 4ih as merely contracted conjugations derived from it. (Con- 
sult Struve, " Ueber die Lateinische .Declination und Conjugation" 
Kbnigsbergy 1823.) 



24 



CONTRACTION. 



proles, contracted for prooles, 
cbpiq, 44 " vodpio, 

fructus, 44 44 fructms, 

anus, " 44 anuis, 

luxu, (dat.) W " luxui, 
chely, " " cAe/ye. 

2. The letter A dropped between two vowek. 

mi, contracted for mihi, 
nil, 44 44 nihil, 

vemens, 44 44 vehemens, 
nemo, " 44 nehbmo. 

3. The letter u dropped between two vowels. 
bubus, from boibus, and that from bovibus. 



bucula, 


u 


bdicula, 


tt 


bbvicula. 




jitnior, 


tt 


juenior, 


<« 


juvenior, 


from juvents. 


jutum, 


it 


juatum, 


u 


juvatum, 


" juvo. 


jumentum, 


<< 


juamentum, 


a 


juvamentum, 


41 juvo. 


mbbilis, 


a 


mblbilis, 


tt 


mbvtbilis, 


" mbveo. 


momentum, 


M 


mblmentum, 


tt 


mbvimentum, 


44 mbveo. 


mdlo, 


« 


maolo, 


tt 


mavblo, 


44 magis-volo. 


ndnus, 


U 


nbenus, 


tt 


novenus, 


44 novem. 


obit, 


(( 


obut, 


tt 


obivit. 




•prudens, 


(( 


prmdens, 


tt 


prbvidens. 





4. Other letters similarly dropped. 
denus, deenus, decenus, from decern, 
bigce, bug(B, biiuga. 
quadriga, quadrnga, quadrTiuga. 



Obs. 2. It sometimes happens, however, that when two 
vowels meet in a compound word, one of them is elided or 
struck out altogether, in which case the quantity of the re- 
maining one suffers no change ; thus, in magnbpe.re, com- 
pounded of magno opere, the o of magno is struck out alto- 
gether, and the o in opere retains its natural quantity. So 
in semanimis, gravolens, suavblens, &c. 

Obs. 3. In a few words, the ancients seem either to have 
blended the two vowels into one, or to have struck out one 



DIPHTHONGS. 25 

of them at pleasure, and hence the quantity of such syllables 
is variable. Thus the participle ambitus, from ambio, has 
the penult long, because it is regarded as a contraction for 
ambeitus ; while ambitus, the substantive, has the same syl- 
lable short, because, in this case, the e was supposed to be 
elided before the u 

SECTION VL 

DIPHTHONGS. 

Rule. A diphthong is long, whether in a Greek or Latin 
word ; but pr& preceding a vowel in a compound term is 
usually short. 1 

Virg. Ultima Cummi venit jam carminis &tas. 
Ovid. Exit et in Maias sacrum Florale Calendas. 
Virg. Fertur equis auriga neque audit currus habenas. 
Id. Caucasiasque refert volucres, furtumque Promethel. 

Ovid. Quas ubi viderunt praacutcB cuspidis hastas. 
Virg. Nec tota tamen ille prior prmeunte carina. 
Id. Stipitibus duris agitur, sudibusve prmustis. 

1. The syllable pres. being originally prat or pra'e, the latter of the 
two vowels is tacitly elided. Thus prccustus, prccacutus, pr&eo, be- 
come prbVustus, pra'acutus, prWeo, and the a is necessarily short by its 
position before the succeeding vowel. There is one example, however, 
in Statius, where pra is lengthened in pr&irct, namely, " Pramia, cum 
vacuus domino praiiret Arion" (Theb., 6, 519) ; but, besides this, other 
instances of such lengthening are found only in the latest poets, as, for 
example, yfazesse in Sidonius Apollinaris (Carm., 23), and yraoptare in 
Martianus Capella (lib. 1, pag. 9, ed. Grot.); but such instances are of 
no value. (Consult Schneider, L. G., vol. 1, p. 103.) — In some of the 
cases where pra occurs short in composition, we may obviate this by 
having recourse to synaeresis ; this, however, will not answer on all occa- 
sions. (Compare Max. Vict., p. 1965, ed. Putsch, and, on the other 
side, Vossius, de Art. Gram., 2, 15, p. 161, ed. Foertsch.) — Ovid, on 
one occasion, shortens the diphthong in Maotis (Trist., 3, 12, 2), in 
which he is imitated by Seneca (Oed., 474), but it is made long by him 
.elsewhere, as well as by other poets. The same poet has also Aeeta 
(Heroid., 6, 103). In this and in Mctotis he appears to have followed 
the Greek license. (Consult Buttmann, Ausf. Gr. *&r., § 7, anm. 25.) 
— The old reading Bionaus in Catullus (29, 7) has long since been 
changed. (Doering, ad Catull., I, c. — Vossius, de Art. Gram., 2, 33, 
txtr.) 

c 



26 



DIPHTHONGS. 



Obs. L Greek proper names in eus (genitive eos) ah* ays 
have the eu a diphthong, in both Greek and Latin ; as, 
Orpheus, gen. Orpheos, Pantheus, gen. Pantheos, &c. 

Obs. 2. Frequently, however, a proper name in eus is 
declined according to the forms of the second declension in 
Latin, and then the diphthong disappears ; as, Orpheus, 
gen. Orphei ; dat. Orpheo, &c. 

Obs. 3. The combination yi also forms a diphthong in 
some Greek words, since, it answers to vi ; as, Orithyia 
^QpeiOvla) ; Harpyia ("Aprrvia) ; Agyieus ('Ayvievg), &e. 
Ovid. Orithyian amans fulvis complectitur alis. 
Virg. Et patrio insontes Harpyias pellere regno, 
Horat. Levis Agyieu. (Dactylic dimeter.) 

Obs. 4. It is, strictly speaking, erroneous to rank such 
combinations as ua, ue, ui, uo, uu, among diphthongs ; on 
the contrary, the letter u seems to have been pronounced 
in such cases like our w; as, lingua (equivalent to ling-wa), 
sanguis (sang-wis), equus (ek~wus) ; and so also in mono- 
syllables ; as, quis (equivalent to kwis), quod (kwod), que 
(kwe), &C. 1 

Obs. 5. In some cases, it is true, such combinations are 
long : this, however, is not because they then form a diph- 
thong, but because the vowel with which u happens to be 
united is in itself long ; as, suadet (swadet), suetus (swctus), 
&c. So also in the monosyllables : qui (kwi), huic (hwich), 
quo (kwo), &c. 

Obs. 6. In several words, again, u and the vowel by 
which it is followed always form distinct syllables ; as, 
sua, sues, suis, suds, suits, &c. 

i. Tire whole question is ably discussed by Schneider, L. G., vol. 1, 
p. 324, seqq. 



POSITION. 



27 



SECTION VII. 
POSITION. 

Rule A vowel before two consonants either in the 
same word, or in different words, or before a double conso- 
nant, is long by position ; as, terra, respexit, gaza, &C. 1 
Virg. Terra tremit : fugere ferce, et mortalia cor da. 
Id. Libertas qua sera tamen respexit inermem. 

Obs.,1. The letter h is not regarded in prosody as a 
consonant, but a mere breathing ; hence, in such words as 
abhinC) adhuc, &c, the first syllable is short. So also if a 
word end in a consonant, and the succeeding word begin 
with the letter h, there is no length by position. 2 

Virg. Oro, siquis adhuc precibus locus, exue mentem. 

Id. Tempora quce messor, qua curvus arator haberet. 

Obs. 2. A vowel is often found long before the consonant 
j. This, however, is not because j is a double consonant ; 
but the truth is, that the words in question were originally 
all written with a double i ; as, for example, cuiius, huiius, 
eiius, peiius, maiius, &c, and would seem to have been 

1. The time occupied in pronouncing the two consonants, or the 
double one, produces the length by position. A vowel thus situated is 
in fact shorter than one which is long by nature ; but still in verse they 
are regarded as both of equal length. (Krugcr, Grundriss der Metrik, 
p. 18.) 

2. That the h never produces length by position when joined with a 
consonant either preceding or following it, is expressly asserted by 
Terentianus Maurus, v. 789, seqq. 

" Sola nec vocalis usum, nec tuetur conson<z, 
Tempus aut ministrat ullum hr embus usquam syllabis." 
To the same effect are the remarks of Vossius (de Art. Gram. t 2, 15, 
extr.). The opposite doctrine is incorrectly maintained by Velius 
Longus (p. 2217, ed. Putsch), and also by some modern scholars ; as, 
for example, by Barth (Advers., 21, 17). Some of the lines adduced in 
support of this latter opinion have the syllable lengthened by the arsis ; 
m others the reading is erroneous. Equally unfounded is the remark, 
that the h is sometimes employed to prevent the hiatus in a line. 
(Schneider, L. (r., vol. 1, p. 180, not.) 



OF THE INITIAL X AND Z. 



proncrtiiiced cui-yus, hui-yus, ei-yus, pei-yus, mai-yus, <fcc. , 
so that the first syllable was long in each, a quantity that 
was retained after one of the two e's was dropped. 1 

Of the initial' SC, SM, SP, SQ, ST, $c. 
Rule. A short vowel at the end of a word, when followed 
by a word beginning with sc, sm, sp, sq, st, &c, is rarely, if 
ever, allowed to remain short, in serious compositions, by the 
poets who flourished after the time of Lucretius ; but they 
generally avoid with care such a collocation. 2 

Of the initial X and Z. 

Rule. A short vowel at the end of a word, before a word 
beginning with x or z, remains short. At least, there is no 
evidence at all that it was ever lengthened. 3 

Ennius. Pontibus instratis conjunxit litora Xerxes. 

Virg. Jam medio apparet fluctu nemorosa Zacynthus. 

1. Consult note 1, page 18. 

2. The whole, question is discussed with great ability by Schneider 
(L. G., vol. 2, p. 694) and Ramsay {hat. Pros., p. 260, seqq.). The 
canon of Dawes on the subject is particularly examined by the latter. 
— Proper names, in the use of which the poets have always very natu- 
rally allowed themselves considerable license, and the names of stones, 
trees, &c, when such cannot be used in the metre without transgressing 
the rule in the text, are exceptions, of course. This applies to such 
words as Smaragdus, Scamander, neither of which could be employed 
in hexameter verse at all without a license of this kind. And it is 
worthy of notice, that these words are frequently found in good MSS., 
both Latin and Greek, without the £ at all: as, Mdpaydoc, Maragdus; 
Ka/iavdpog, Kamander (Dawes, Misc. Crit., p. 6-148, ed. Kidd.) ; 
which would seem to indicate that it was, in certain cases, softened 
down in pronouncing them. (Ramsay's hat. Pros., p. 261, not. — 
Compare Knight, Proleg. in Horn., 79. — Spitzner, Gr. Pros., § 7, 6. — 
Thiersch, Gr. Gr., § 146, 8.) 

3. The line from Ennius is merely conjectured by Columna to have 
been written by that poet ; a conjecture, however, without any founda- 
tion. (Ennii Fragm., ed. Column., p. 129.) Terentianus Maurus (v. 
1160) quotes it without naming the author, and subjoins another imme- 
diately after as follows : u Sanguine turhatus miscebat litora Xerxes." 
It is more than probable that both lines are his own composition. An- 
other instance is sometimes cited from Lucan (2, 672) : 41 Talis Jama 
canit tumidum super cequord Xcrxen ;" but the text is now altered so 

as to read 44 super cequora Persen." (Consult Cort., ad 

loc.) The Greek poets do not appear to have ever indulged in this li- 



MUTE AND LIQUID. 



29 



SECTION VIII. 

MUTE AND LIQUID. 
Rule. A short vowel before a mute followed by a liquid, 
both of which are in the following syllable, is common in 
poetry, but always short in prose ; as, volucris and volucris ; 
'pattern and patrem ; pharetra and pharetra ; cochleare and 
cochleare ; Cyclops and Cyclops ; cycnus and cycnus, &C. 1 
Ovid. Et primo similis volucri, mox vera volucris* 
Virg. Natum ante ora pdtris, patrem qui obtruncat ad aras 
Id. Virginibus Tyriis mos est gestare pharetram. 
Id. Succinctam pharetra et maculosa tegmine lyncis. 
Horat. Multa Dircceum levat aura cycnum. (Sapphic.) 
Id. Donatura cycni si libeat sonum. (Choriambic.) 

Obs. 1 . This rule depends on three conditions, viz. : 

1. The liquid must follow the mute. If it stand before 
the mute, the preceding vowel, though naturally short, 
becomes always long; as, fert, fertis. 

2. The mute and liquid must belong to the same syllable. 
If they belong to different syllables, the preceding 
short vowel becomes long ; as, ab-luo, ad-nitor, quam- 
db-rem. 

cense. — With regard to z, numerous examples are found of a vowel re- 
maining short before it. (Ovid, Her., 1, 87. — Sil. Ital., 1, 275. — Id., 
2, 603.— Martial, 2, 58, l.—Auson., Prof., 22, 11.— Id. ib., 13, 3.— 
Senec., Here. Fur., 916. — Id., Agam., 433, &c.) In many of these 
instances, however, the words commencing with z could not otherwise 
appear in the verse, unless a short vowel were allowed to precede. This 
same principle regulates the admissibility of such words into Greek 
verse. (Horn., II, 2, 634.— Jd., Odyss., 1, 246.— Id. ib., 9, 24.— 
Theocrit., 4, 32. — Oppian, Hal, 1, 367, &c.) The dramatic poets, 
however, never allowed themselves this license. 

I. This rule applies more frequently to the liquids I and r than to m and 
n. The latter are found for the most part in words derived from the 
*Greek. — The position which a mute and liquid make is termed by 
grammarians " debilis positio," or weak position. The license in po- 
etry, therefore, consists, not in having the vowel short, but in making it 
long. The natural quantity, on the other hand, prevails in prose 
(Vossius, de Art. Gram., 2, 16. — Schneider, L. G., vol. 2, p. 676, 
seqq.)* 

C 2 



30 



MUTE AND LIQUID. 



3. The vowel must be short by nature. A vowel 
. naturally long is never rendered short by a mute 
and liquid following ; as, matris, salubris, atri. 1 

Obs. 2. The lengthening of a vowel before a mute and 
liquid takes place most frequently in the arsis of a foot. 
Examples of a similar lengthening in the thesis are com- 
paratively rare. 2 

Obs. 3. Even in the arsis, however, the poets do not 
seem to have lengthened at pleasure any syllable that was 
followed by a mute and liquid. A particular usage appears 
to have prevailed on this head, which forbade them, for ex- 
ample, to lengthen the vowel in arbilror, genetrix, locuples, 
&c, while in other words, containing, in like manner, a 
vowel before a mute and liquid, the long quantity was 
more customary than the snort. 3 

Obs. 4. The mute and liquid are sometimes found in 
the beginning of the next word ; as, 

Virg. Excursusque breves tentant, et scepe lapillos. 
Auson. Jane nove, primo qui das tua nomina mensL 

1. To determine whether a vowel which we find long before two con- 
sonants be naturally long, or only rendered so by that position, we must 
look to the word in a different state, where the position does not occur. 
In some few instances it is quite impossible to determine with any cer- 
tainty the natural quantity of the vowel ; as, for example, in Venafrum, 
hybrida, &c. {Schneider, L. G., vol. 2, p. 677, not.) 

2. Schneider, L. G., vol. 2, p. 676. 

3. Thus we find colubris only in Valerius Flaccus (6, 175), but fre- 
quently colubras and colubris. So in Lucretius (4, 406) we have rubrum f 
but everywhere else rubri, rubro, &c. Again, we have Ubri, libro, &c, 
in only a very few places ; "as, for example, Horat., Serm., 1, 10, 63. — 
Id., Epist., 2, 1, 217.— Auson., Idyll., 11, 77.— Id., EpisL, 4, 98 ; but 
very frequently Ubri, &c. In like manner, we find the oblique cases of 
niger, with the short i, in Catullus (43, 2), Horace (Od., 1, 32, 11 ; 3, 6, 
4 ; 4, 12, 11), Virgil (jEn., 8, 353), &c, while those with the long i 
occur far more frequently. — With regard to migro, it is to be observed, 
that it is found, together with its compounds, having the short penult in 
many passages of Plautus, and once also in Terence, Lucretius, and* 
Manilius {Heusing., Obs. Antibarb., p. 375); but Virgil, Horace, Mar- 
tial, Juvenal, and other poets uniformly have migro. Hence it has been 
supposed that migro at first had the short i, and retained this down to 
the time of Catullus, but afterward changed it to the long quantity; 
while, on the other hand, latro (another word which has given rise 



REDUPLICATING PRETERITES. 



31 



SECTION IX. 

REDUPLICATING PRETERITES. 

Rule. Reduplicating preterites, or such as double the 
first syllable, have both the first and second syllables short ; 
as, cecidi (from cado), cecini, didici, tetigi, &C. 1 
Virg. Inter cunctantes cecidit moribunda ministros. 
Id. Tityre, te palula cecini sub tegmine fagu 
Ovid. Mox didici curvo nulla subesse tholo. (Pentameter.) 
Virg. Nec victoris heri tetigit captiva cubile. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

But cecidi, from cado, and pepedi, from pedo, have the 
second syllable long. 

Juv. Ebrius ac petulans, qui nullum forte cecidit. 
Horat. Nam, displosa sonat quantum vesica^ pepedi. 

Obs. The rule does not, of course, apply to the second 
syllable when it is long by position ; as in momdrdi, cucurri, 
peperci, and the like ; still, however, the first or prefixed 
syllable is short. 

Mart. Docti lima momdrderit Secundi. (Phalaecian.) 
Propert. Cum vicina novis turba cucurrit agris. (Pentam.) 

to remark) substituted, in process of time, the long a for the short. 
{Schneider, L. <?., vol. 2, p. 679, seq.) 

1. The first syllable is short as a matter of course, since it consists 
of a short prefix. The second syllable follows the quantity of the ver- 
bal root. Hence arise the two exceptions mentioned immediately after, 
namely, ccedo and pedo, where the first syllable of the verbal root is 
long ; and so also the forms momdrdi, cucurri, &c. The early form of 
the perfect of cado must have been ceccedi. (Consult Priscian, 10, 4, 
p. 489, ed. Putsch. — Pott, Etymol. Forsch., vol. 1, p. 19, seqq. — 
Kuhner, Gr. Gr., ol. 1, p. 84, seqq. — Bopp, Vergleich. Gramm., p. 
697, seqq.) 



32 



PRETERITES OF TWO SYLLABLES. 



SECTION X. 
PRETERITES OF TWO SYLLABLES. 
Rule. Preterites of two syllables, their compounds, and 
trie tenses formed from them, have the first syllable long ; 
as, vidi, veni, fbvi, fugi ; while, in the present tense, video, 
venio, foveo, fugio, have the first short. 1 
Virg. Ut vidi, ut perii, ut me malus abstulit. .error. 
Id. Respexit tamen, et longo post tempore venit. 
Id. Fdvit humum ; cape saxa manu, cape robora pastor 
Id. Viper a delituit, calumque exterrita fugit. 

EXCEPTION. 

Seven dissyllabic preterites, however, have the first syl- 
lable short, namely, bibi, dedi,fidi (from findo), scidi 
(from scindo), steti, stiti, and tuli. 2 

1. According to the theory of Grimm {Deutsche Grammatik, vol. 1, 
p. 1056), those verbs which change a short vowel in the root, or present 
tense, into a long e in the perfect, had originally a reduplication. 
Pango, or, rather, pago, makes pepigi, but compingo makes compegi. 
This proves the analogy of the two forms ; and on the model of pago, 
pepegi, contracted pegi, we havo 



venio, 


veveni, 


veeni, 


vim, 


video, 


vi.vidis 


vndi, 


vidi, 


foveo, 


fdvdvi, 


foovi, 
fuugi, 


fdvi, 
fugi, 


fugio, 


fufugi, 
&c, 


&c, 


&c, 


&c. 



It is observed, in confirmation of this remark, that such verbs have in 
manv instances a reduplication, or, what is allied to it, an internal in- 
flection, in the cognate languages ; thus fugi resembles ntyvya ; and 
venio, veni, the Maeso-Gothic verb, which is analogous to "come" and 
"came," &c. (Pnlchard, Origin of the Celtic Nations, p. 151.) It 
must be borne in mind, however, that the remarks here made about the 
mode of forming veni, vidi, &c, do not apply to such preterites as lusi, 
rlsi, fhisi, &c, from ludo, rideo, mitto, &c, the preterite in these 
verbs having been formed by the insertion of s; as, ludsi, ridsi, mittsi, 
and the consonant or consonants before the 5 having been subsequently 
dropped for the sake of euphony. (Pritchard, I. c. — Ramsay, Lat. 
Pros., p. 100. — Struve, Ucler die Latcinische Declination und Conju- 
gation, p. 155.) 

2. These seven are in reality no exceptions at all, but belong to the 
preceding rule, since they are all reduplicating preterites, some of which 
have dropped the first syllable, instead of contracting the first two into 
one. Thus tuli and scidi were anciently tetuli and scisculi. The form 



SUPINES OF TWO SYLLABLES. 



33 



Horat. Lusisti satis, edisti satis, atque bibisti. 

Virg. Hie mihi responsum primus dedit ille petenti. 

Horat. Demersa exitio ; diffidit urbium. (Choriambic.) 

Statius. Gaudia, florentesque manu scidit Atropos annos. 

Virg*. Explicuit legio, et campo stetit agmen aperto. 

Id. Constitit atque oculis Phrygia agmina circumspexit. 

Id. Cui mater media sese tulit obvia sylva. 



Obs. Abscidi, from ccedo, has the middle syllable long ; 
but abscidi, from scindo, has it short. 

Lucari. Abscidit nostra multum sors invida nostra. 
Id. Abscidit impulsu ventorum adjuta vetustas. 

SECTION XL 
SUPINES OF TWO SYLLABLES. 

Rule. Supines of two syllables, and the parts of the 
verb supposed to be derived from them, have the first syl- 
lable long ; as, visum, lusum, motum ; visus, visurus, &c 1 

Virg. Terribiles visu forma ; Letumque Laborque. 

Id Lenaos, ea visa salus morientibus una. 

Id. Nascitur et casus abies visura marinos. 

Horat. Lusum it Macenas, dormitum ego Virgiliusque. 

Virg. Quos ego — sed motos prcestat componere fiucius. 

tetuli occurs in Plautus (Amphitr., 2, 2, 84, 168. — Menachm., 4, 2, 25, 
66. — PcEnul, 3, 1, 58. — Rud. prol., 68); in Accius and Caecilius (an. 
Non, 3, 839); in Catullus. (Carm., 63, 47, 52; 66, 35); in Terence 
{Antr.i 4, 5, 13 ; 5, 1, 13); and in the grammarians Diomedes (lib. 2, 
p. 435) and Priscian (10, 6, p. 497, seq.). — Of the form sciscidi Priscian 
gives examples from Afranius, Attius, Naevius, and Ennius (lib. 10, p. 
890.— Compare Aul. Gell., 7, 9). On the same principle,/?^' would 
be originally fifidi, from fido. The form hibi is an actual reduplication 
from btOy the same as the Greek tzlg). Bibo in the present arose from 
the digammatized form TIIF12. As for steti and stiti, they are merely 
different forms of the reduplication of sto, just as dedi and dldi from do. 
(Ramsay 1 s hat. Pros., p. 100. — Struve, Ueber die Lat. Decl, &c, p. 
160. — Pott, Etymol. Forschungen, vol. 1, p. 188.) 

I. The Sanscrit infinitive is preserved in the Latin first supine ; as, 
paUlum-, alitum ; samtum, cinctum. (Kennedy, Researches, p. 256.— 
Wilkins's Sanscrit Grammar, p. 123.) — The old form of visum ap- 
pears to have been vidsum ; of lusum, ludsum ; of motum, movitum 
(moitum) ; of fletum, flevitum ( fieltum) ; of minutum, minwitum ; of 



34 



SUPINES OF TWO SYLLABLES. 



EXCEPTIONS. 

In the following dissyllabic supines the first syllable i« 
short ; namely, citum, from cieo ; datum, from do ; 
itum, from eo ; Vitum, from Vino ; quitum, from queo ; 
ratum, from reor ; rutum, from ruo ; satum, from sero ; 
situm, from sino ; and futum, from fuo, whence fu- 
turus. 

Horat. Puppes sinistrorsum cita. (Iambic.) 
Virg. Intraro, gentique mea data mania cernam. 
Lucret. Nec repentis itum quojus vis cumque animantis. 
Ovid. In te jingebam violentos Troas ituros. 
Virg. Ardentes auro et paribus Vita corpora guttis. 
Id. Nos abiisse rati, et vento petiisse Mycenas. 
Virg. Impulerat torrens, arbustaque diruta ripis. 
Id. Deinde satis jluvium inducit rivosque sequentes, 
Horat. Aurum irrepertum et sic melius situm. (Alcaic.) 
Id. Quid sit futurum eras fuge quarere. (Alcaic.) 

Obs. 1. There is some doubt with regard to the quantity 
of statum. In Lucan, Martial, Statius, and Claudian, we 
find statura, constatura, obstatura, prcestatura, with the a 
long; while the derivatives, statim, status both substan- 
tive and adjective, statio, stator, are used by Catullus, 
Ovid, and others, with the first short. It seems best, how- 
ever, to follow the authority of Priscian, and make the first 
syllable of the supine long. 1 

Obs. 2. Citum, from cieo of the second conjugation, has 
the first syllable short ; whence citus, " quick ;" concitus 
and excitus, " aroused but citum, from do of the fourth 

acktum, acuitum, &c. Contraction rendered the syllable long. But 
futum, rutum, &c, are formed by syncope, and therefore continue 
short. 

I. " Steti vero statum supinum penultima producta debet facere." 
{Priscian, 9, p. 863, ed. Putsch.) — The variation in quantity, noticed 
in the text, seems to have arisen from the prosodial difference in statum 
and sfitum, as we see exemplified in prcestitum and prasldtum, which 
are both attached to prasto as its supines. (Ramsay* s Latin Pros., p. 
193 —Vossius, de Art. Gramm., 2, 22.) 



POLYSYLLABIC SUPINES. 



35 



conjugation, has the first syllable long ; whence cltus 
" excited ;" accitus, concitus, excitus, and incitus. 1 

Virg. Altior insurgens et cursu concitus heros. 

Ovid. Nec fruitur somno vigilantibus excita curis. 

Lucan. Unde ruunt toto concita pericula mundo. 

Id. Rupta quies populis, stratisque exctta juventus. 

Obs. 3. Ruo has ruitum and rutum in the supine. Its 
compounds form the supine in utum having the penult 
short, whence dirutus, erutus, obrutus. 2 

Ovid. Diruta sunt aliis, uni mihi Pergama rest ant. 

Virg. Nec mihi cum Teucris ullum post eruta helium. 

Obs. 4. It must be borne in mind, as regards the deriva- 
tives of itum, that the participle is ambitus, but that the 
substantive is ambitus. 

Ovid. Jus sit et amblta circumdare littora terra. 

Horat. Et properantis aqua per amoenos ambitus agros. 

SECTION XII. 

POLYSYLLABIC SUPINES. 

Rule i. Supines in utum, of more than two syllables, 
and the parts of the verb formed from them, have the pe- 
nult long; as, solutum, volutum, minutum, argutum? 

1. But scltum is always long, whether it comes from scio or scisco. 
Scitus, from scio, signifies " skilful" " graceful" &c. ; but scitus, 
from scisco, "ordained" "decreed;" whence we have plebis-scitum, 
" a decree of the commons" 

2. It has been supposed, and with great appearance of probability, 
that ui, in the supine of ruo, was pronounced as one short syllable, 
rwitum; whence dirwitum, erwitum, &c, which afterward became 
dirutum, erutum, on the dropping of the i. {Ramsay 's Lat. Pros., 
p. 103.) 

3. Solutum and volutum do not come from solvo and volvo, where v 
is a consonant, but from the earlier forms soluo and voluo. The supines 
in question will, according to this view, have been originally soluitum, 
volmtum, changed afterward by contraction to solutum, volutum. The 
same principle of contraction operates, as already remarked, in the case 
of other supines in utum. Thus minutum is contracted from minmtum , 
argutum from argmtum ; tributum from trihmtum, &c. 



36 



POLYSYLLABIC SUPINES. 



Virg. Lumina rara mica?it, somno vinoque soluti. 
Id. Ecce autem jiammis inter tabulata volatus, 
Lucret. Conveniebat enim fruges quoque scepe minutas. 

Rule 2. Supines in itum, from preterites in tut, and the 
parts of the verb formed from them, likewise have the penul 
long ; as, cupivi, cupitum ; petivi, peiitum ; condivi, conditum, 
(fee. 1 

Ovid. Mens videt hoc, visumque cupit, potituj-que cupito. 
Virg. Telaque trunca viri et bis sex thoraca peiitum. 
Horat. Ne male conditum jus apponatur ; ut omnes. 

Rule 3. But supines in itum, from preterites not in ivi, 
have the i short ; as, monui, momtum ; tacui, taciturn, &c. 2 
Virg. Discite justitiam moniti, et non temnere divos. 
Id. Quis te, magne Cato, taciturn, aut te, Cosse, relinquat 
Id. Conditus in nubem, medioque refugerit orbe. 

Obs. The rule last given, however, does not extend to 
polysyllabic compounds from supines of two syllables. 

1. Here also, as in the previous rule, contraction operates to lengthen 
the penult. Thus we have, oldest form petivitum (pelivntum), by throw- 
ing out the v (or rather w), petntum, and, by still farther contraction, 
p( tttum. So, also, cupivitum (cupiwitum), cupntum, cupitum; condwi- 
tum (condhvitum), condntum, conditum, &c. 

2. In the case of supines in utum and Itum, the contraction is effect- 
ed by a blending of the two vowels into one long ; but in supines in 
itum, a syncope operates, or, in other words, one of the vowels is drop- 
ped, and the remaining one is left with its short quantity. Thus, 
monuitum, morCitum ; tacwitum, taciturn, &c. — Reccnsitum is often 
adduced as an exception to the rule given in the text. It is only, how- 
ever, a deviation in appearance, being formed, not from recensui, but 
from the old perfect recensivi. The simple verb censeo made censui 
and ccnslvi in the perfect, censum and censltum in the supine. Hence 
we find, in an old inscription, ccnsita sunt for censa sunt ; and, in some 
of *be writers on the civil law, censiti for censi ; so, also, the noun 
censor is a contraction from censitor, and occurs in this latter form in 
other inscriptions which have come down to us, as well as in the wri- 
tings of the ancient lawyers. (Ulpian, Dig., lib. 50, tit. 15, leg. 4. — 
Inscript. ap. Grut., p. 417, n. 5. — lb., p. 439, n. 5. — Orell., Inscript. 
hat., n. 208, 3044, 3652.) Analogous to this is the verb pono, which 
made in the perfect posivi as well as posui. Plautus uses posivimus 
(Vidul. ap. Prise, 10, 7, p. 499, cd. Putsch); Apuleius apposiverunt 
(ap. eund.); Lucilius opposivit, (Fragm., p. 211, cd. Bip.) ; Catullus 
devosirit (34, 8), &c. (Compare Burmann, ad Anthol. hat., 2, 130, 16.) 



I 



DERIVATIVES. 



37 



These follow the quantity of the simple supines from 
which they are formed; as, xtum, obitum; datum, abditum; 
condition, redditum ; sdtum, insitum, &c, except cognitum 
and agnitum, from rib turn} 

SECTION XIII. 
DERIVATIVES. 2 
Rule. Derivatives follow the quantity of the words from 
which they are formed. 

Obs. 1. This rule applies strictly to the modifications 
which words undergo in declension, comparison, and con- 
jugation, in so far as those syllables are concerned which 
are not affected by the inflections. 

Thus, since the first syllable in dries is short in the nomi- 
native, it remains short in drietis, drieti, &c, since its form 
does not change with the inflections ; but the same cannot 
be said of the last syllable, which is long in the nominative, 
although in the oblique cases the corresponding syllable is 
short : arietis, arieti, &c. So also from mitis comes mttia ; 
durus, durior, durissimus, &c. 

In like manner, the first syllable in lego being short, it 
remains short in all the tenses which are formed from the 
present ; as, legebam, legam, legerem, &c. ; and, on the 
other hand, the first syllable in the preterite legi being 
long, it will be long in legeram, legerim, legissem, &c, and 
all other parts of the verb formed from the preterite. 

Obs. 2. The rule applies to all words which are clearly 
and distinctly formed from other words, by the addition of 
certain terminations or suffixes, according to well-estab- 
lished analogy. 3 

1. Many of the Latin supines are simple contractions, made long by 
the rule of position ; thus, legitum, leg'tum, ledum ; rumpilum, rum'p'* 
turn, ruptum ; nubitum, nub'tum, nuptum ; scribitum, scribHum, scrip* 
turn ; docitum (dokitum), doc'tum, doctum, &c. 

2. Ramsay's Latin Prosody, p. 9, seqq. 

3. Still, however, there are some exceptions to this. Thus, from 

D 



38 



DERIVATIVES. 



Thus, from animus we have animosus, 

natura 44 " naturalis, 

rosa " " rosetum, 

viola 44 44 violarium, 

sanguinis 44 44 sanguineus, 

pulveris 44 14 pulverulentus, 

labor 44 44 labor iosus. 

Obs. 3. But when two words are merely connected to- 
gether by derivation from a common root, we cannot, even 
when they resemble each other in structure, with any cer- 
tainty infer that the quantity of the corresponding syllables 
will be the same ; for, although this happens much oftener 
than otherwise, yet the exceptions are too numerous to ad- 
mit of the principle being broadly stated. 

Obs. 4. Among the exceptions alluded to in the prece- 
ding remarks, the following are most deserving of attention. 

t. Several kindred verbs which have two forms, one 
active and the other neuter, or which differ otherwise 
in meaning, differ also in quantity. 1 Thus, 

placare, placere, 

sedare, sedere, sidere, sedes, 

legare, legere, 

dicare, dicere, 

labare, labi. 



2. Words which differ in meaning, but which are spelt 
in the same way, often differ in quantity. This arose, 
probably, from the pronunciation being purposely va- 
ried, to prevent confusion. Thus, 

moles we have molestus ; from rego, regula ; from luceo, lucerna, &c. 
With regard to these and others of the kind, we may use the language 
of Varro : " Cum in vestitu, adificiis, sic in supellectile, cibo, catereis 
omnibus, qua ust, Jid vitam sunt adsumpta, dominetur inaqualitas ; in 
sermone quoque, qui est usus causa constitutes, ea non repudianda." 

1. Exceptions, however, to this remark not unfrequently occur. 
Thus, we have cldrare and cldrere ; rigare and rigere ; fugare and 
fugere ; jacl'e and jacere, &c. 



COMPOUND WORDS. 



39 



ducis, from duco, but ducis, from dux. 

regis, " rex, " regis, " re^-o. 

Zeg?£, " Ze#, " legis, a lego* 

voces, " vox, " voces, " voco. 

Obs. 5. The entire class of verbs in urio, called desid* 
eratives, have the u short, though derived from the future 
participle in urus, of which the penult is invariably long ; 
as, parturit, esurit, ccenaturit, nupturit, &c. 

Obs. 6. The following deviations in quantity, on the 
part of other derivatives, are also worthy of notice. 
homo, but humanus. 

humus, humilis, humare, but humor, humidus, humeus^ &c. 
persono, but persona, 
tego, but tegula. 

macer, maceo, macies, but rhacero. 
lateo, but laterna, 

sopor, spporus, soporifer, soporo, but sopio, sopitus. 
quater, but quatuor, 
dlcere, but dicax. 
vado, but vadum. 

SECTION XIV. 

COMPOUND WORDS. 

Rule. Compound words retain, in general, the quantity 
of the simple words from which they are formed. 

Thus, in perlego, relego, the middle syllable is short, be- 
cause it is short in the simple lego. But in the perfects 
perlegi, relegi, it is long, because lengthened in the simple 
legi. 

Again, attigi, concidi, diffidi, ebibi, rescidi, have the pe- 
nult short, because the corresponding vowel is short in 
their primitives, tetigi, cecidi, fidi, bibi, and scidi. 

Obtitum, from obVino, has the short penult, because the 
vowel is short in the simple lltum. But oblibus is from 
obliviscor 



40 



rilEPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION. 



Obs. The quantity of the simple words is preserved in 
the compounds though the vowel be changed. Thus, 
concido, cxcido, incido, occido, recido, from cado, shorten the 
penult ; and, in like manner, eltgo, seligo, &c, from lego. 
On the other hand, concido, cxcido, incido, rccido, occido, 
from cado, have the penult, long. So also allido, from 
Icedo ; exquiro and requiro, from qu&ro, &c. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

The following shorten the penult, though the corre- 
sponding vowels in the simple words are long ; as, 



dejero, pejero, 


from 


juro, 


pronuba, innuba, 


<< 


nubo, 


maledicus, causidicus, &c, 


it 


dico, 


semisopitus, 


66 


sopio, 


cognitum and agnitum, 


66 


notum. 



Obs. 1. The participle ambitus, as has already been re 
marked, has the penult long ; but the noun ambitus has it 
short. 1 

Obs. 2. The second syllable in connubium is naturally 
short, but it is occasionally lengthened by the poets in the 
arsis of the foot. 

Virg. Connubio jungam stabili, propriamque dicabo. 

Id Hectoris Andromache, Pyrrhiri* connubia servas ? 

SECTION XV. 
PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION. 
Rule 1. The prepositions a, e, de, di, and se, in compo- 
sition are long, except di in dirimo and diiseYtus} 

1. Besides ambio, ambitum, a simple derivative from ambe, there 
probably was also amb-eo, amb-ttum, a compound from eo. 

2. The old form of dirimo was disimo, and hence the inseparable 
preposition in dirimo and disertus is in fact dis, not di. In disertus 
the original form appears to have been dissertus (the participle of 
dissero), and one of the two *'s was subsequently dropped. 



PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION. 41 

Amissos longo socios sermone requirunt. 
Conjagis Evadne miser os elata per ignes. 
Deducunt socii naves, et littora complent. 
Tergora dlripiunt costis et viscera nudant. 
Dissidio potis est sejungi seque gregari. 

Cede deo dixitque et proelia voce diremit. 
Mart. Causas inquit a gam Cicerone disertius ipso. 

Rule 2. Re is short ; as, relinquo, refero ; but trie im- 
personal verb refert ("it concerns," &c), from the noun 
res, has the first syllable long. 1 

Ovid. Propellit Boreas, cBstus et unda refert. (Pentam.) 

Virg. Prater ea nec jam mutari pabula refert. 

Rule 3. The prepositions ab, ad, in, ob, per, and sub, 
are short in composition before vowels, since they are 
short in their simple state ; as, abeo, adoro, ineo, obeo, 
perambulo, subigo. 

' 1. The impersonal refert is only mentioned here in order to guard 
against the possibility of a mistake in pronunciation, since it is not a 
compound of the inseparable preposition re, but comes, according to 
some, from rei, the dative, according to others from re, the ablative, oJ 
the noun res, and the verb fero. Verrius Flaccus, the ancient gramma 
rian, as cited by Festus, was in favour of the dative : " Refert cum 
dicimus, err are nos ait Verrius, esse enim rectum rei fert, dativo scilicet, 
non ablativo casu ; sed esse jam usu possessum." (Festus, p. ccvii., ed. 
Seal.) Reisig, on the contrary, maintains that refert comes from the 
ablative re and the verb fert, and makes refert mea, for example, equiv- 
alent to re fert mea, " it brings something to bear in my case." In 
the same way some modern scholars imagine that interest mea is to be 
explained, and they advance the opinion that inter and prater in early 
Latin governed the ablative. Hence they account for the quantity of the 
final syllable in intered, prceterea. (Reisig, Vorlesungen, p. 640, ed. 
Haase. — Benary, Romische Lautlehre, vol. 1, p. 37. — Hartung, uber 
die Casus, p. 84. — Bopp, Vergleich. Gramm., p. 215. — Schmid, de 
Pronom., p. 79.) An opposite doctrine, however, with regard to the 
etymology of refert, is maintained by Perizonius (ad Sanct. Min., 3, 5. 
— vol. 1, p. 581, ed. Bauer), and after him by Scheller (hat. 
Deutsch. Worterb., vol. 4, col. 9188, seqq.), both of whom deduce it 
from refero, and regard the change of quantity merely as an expedient 
for distinguishing between refert and refert, with their different signifi- 
cations. . 

D 2 



Virg. 
Prop. 
Virg. 
Id. 

Lucret. 



42 



PREPOSITIONS IN COMPOSITION. 



Virg. Tityrus hinc aberat ; ipsa te Tityre pinus. 

Id. Bella gero : et quisquam numen Junonis adoret ? 

Id. Et lituo pugnas insignis obibat et hasta. 

Id. Prima leves ineunt si quando proelia Parthi. 

Horat Recte necne crocum jloresque perambulet Atta. 

Virg. Arvina pingui, subiguntque in cote secures. 

Obs. 1. Ob in composition sometimes drops the b before 
a consonant, in which case the o remains short ; as, 
omitto. 

Horat. Pleraque differat, et pr&sens in tempus omittat. 

Obs. 2. Trans frequently drops the* last two letters in 
composition, but preserves its proper quantity ; as, trano 
(from transno) ; traduco (from transduco) ; trado (from 
trans do). 

Virg. Illafretus agit ventos, et turbida tranat. 

Id. Atque satas alio vidi traducere messes. 

Id. Trddit equum comiti, paribusque resistit in armis. 

Rule 4. Pro is short in Greek words ; as, Propontis, 
Prometheus ; but in Latin words it is usually long ; as, 
prodo, procudo, procurvus, &c. ! 

Ovid. Fas quoque ab ore freti long&que Propontidos undis. 
Virg. Caucasiasque refert volucres, furtumque Promethei. 
Id. Proderc voce sua quemquam aut opponere morti. 
Id. Maturare datur ; durum procudit arator. 
Id. Exoritur procurva ingens per littora fietus. 

Obs. 1. There are, however, some Latin words in which 

1. " It is impossible," observes Ramsay, " to agree with Dr. Carey 
in supposing that pro was in reality always doubtful, and lengthened or 
shortened as might suit the convenience of the poets. Since we find 
so many words in which it is uniformly long, a few in which it is always 
short, and not above two or three at most in which it is doubtful, such 
an hypothesis must be pronounced extravagant." (Ramsay' s Latin 
Prosody, p. 89.) 



a, e, t, u 9 and in composition. 43 



pro is uniformly short, viz., the compounds of cello, fanum, 
fari, fateri, festus, fugio, fundo, fundus, nepos, neptis 
torvus ; as, procello, procella, profari, profano, prof anus, 
profiteri, profestus, prbfugio, prbfugus, prof undo, profundus, 
' pronepos, proneptis, protervus, protervitas, to which add 
proficiscor, profectus, prbfecto. 1 

Obs. 2. The following have the pro doubtful, namely, 
propago (both noun and verb) and propino. To which 
some, without sufficient grounds, add procumbo, procuro, 
propello, which have the first syllable always long in the best 
writers ; and profari, prbfundo, in which it is always short. 2 
Virg. Sylvarumque ali& pressos propaginis arcus. 
Id. Sed truncis olea melius, propagine vites. 
Id. Sit Romana potens Itala virtute propago. 
Lucret. Propagare genus possit vitamque tueri. 
Id. Ecficis ut cupide generatim sacla propagent. 
Mart. Crystallinisque murrhinisque propinat. (Scazon.) 
Id. Prastare jussi, nutibus propinamus. (Scazon.) 

SECTION XVI. 
A, E, I, U, AND Y, IN COMPOSITION. 

Rule 1. If the first part of a Latin compound end in a, 
that vowel is long ; as, trdno, traduco, trado f but if it end 
in e, the e is in general short ; as, trecenti, nefas* 

Virg. Expertes belli juvenes ; ast Ilva trecentos. 

Juv. Credebant hoc grande nefas et morte piandum. 

1. Ramsay 1 s Latin Prosody, p. 84. 

2. In the two lines from Virgil, quoted immediately after, in which 
propago is used in its primitive sense, of the sucker or layer of a tree 
or shrub, the pro is long ; in all other places it is employed in the figu- 
rative sense of progeny, race, stock, and has the first syllable uniformly 
short. (Ramsay 1 s hat. Pros., p. 88.) 

3. These, as has already been remarked, were originally written 
transno, transduco, trans do ; and hence the quantity of the a in the 
initial syllables. 

4. The quantity of the a in Greek compounds is to be learned from the 
rules of Greek prosody. Thus a is sometimes shor ; as, ddipsos 9 
sometimes long ; as, Nedpolis, genedlogus. 



44 a, c, £, u, and y, in composition. 



Obs. 1. Verbs compounded of facto or fio have the e 
almost uniformly short, and not common, as is generally 
maintained. In the following the e is always short : CaZe- 
facio, calefio, calefacto ; labcfacio, labefio, labefacto ; made- 
facio, madefio ; pavefacio, pavefio ; rubefacio, rubefio ; stu- 
pe/ado, stupefio ; tremefacio, tremejio ; tumefacio, tumejio. 1 

Obs. 2. The only verbs in which any doubt exists re- 
specting the quantity of the e, are patefacio, putrefacio, 
tepefacio, and liquefacio ; and yet even in these the vowel 
is much more frequently short than long. 2 

Obs. 3. The exceptions to the rule of e short in compo- 
sition are, for the most part, based upon peculiarities of 
derivation. Thus the following have the e long, namely, 
nequis, 3 nequa, nequod, &c, nequitia, nequam, nequaquam, 
nequidquam, nequando ; videlicet, 41 venefica, 5 semodius, 6 se- 
mestris, 1 sedecim* &c. Martial, however, makes the first 
syllable of selibra short in several instances, and never 
long. . 

Rule 2. If the first syllable of a compound terminate in 



1. Ramsay's Latin Pros., p. 94. 

2. Patefacio has the e long only in two instances, both of which oc- 
cur in Lucretius (4, 346, and 6, 1000) ; to which some add a line quo- 
ted from Ennius by Isidorus : " Inde patefecit radiis rota Candida 
cozlum." — The verb putrefacio is found with the long vowel in one 
passage of Lucretius (2, 898) ; and so likewise one solitary instance of 
the long e is found in tepefacio. (Catullus, 64, 361.) Two instances of 
long e occur in liquefacio. (Catull., 90, 6. — Ov., Met., 7, 161.) 

3. The difference in quantity between necesse, nefas, nefandus, ne- 
fastus, riefarius, nequeo, and nequis, nequam, nequitia, &c, is proba- 
bly owing to the following circumstance, that in the former class of 
words the ne was formed by apocope from the conjunction nec, and so 
retains its original quantity ; whereas in the latter it is either the adverb 
ne, which is always long, or else the c of nec was in these cases retain- 
ed in pronunciation, though omitted in writing. 

4. From videre and licet, just as scilicet comes from scire licet, and 
ilicet from Ire licet. 

5. From venenum and facio. 

6. By contraction from semimodius. 

7. Semestris, " half monthly," is by contraction from semis and 
mensis ; and semestris, " half yearly," from sex and mensis. In either 
case, therefore, the e is long. 

8. From scxdecim. 



a, e, i, u, and y, in composition. 45 

% or u, the vowel is generally shortened ; as, ommpolens, 
causidicus, biceps, ducenti, quadrupes. 

Virg. Turn pater omnipotens, rerum cut summa potestas. 

Mart. Et te patronum causidicumque putas. (Pentam.) 

Virg. Tollit se arrectum quadrupes, et saucius auras. 



Rule 3. When y terminates the first member of a Greek 
compound, that vowel is short ; as, Thrasybulus, Eurypy- 
lus, Polydamas, polypus ; unless rendered common by a 
mute and liquid, or long by position ; as, Polycletus, which 
has the y common, and Polyxena, in which it is long. 
Auson. Arma superveheris quod, Thrasybule, tua. (Pentam.) 
Ovid. Vel, cum Deiphobo, Polydamanta roga. (Pentam.) 

EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc. 1. But in ludimagister, lucrifacio, lucrijio, and com- 
pendifacio (which are properly not compounds, but 
each a combination of two distinct and complete 
words), the i is long ; and the same may be said of 
agricultura, though the i is short in the compound 
agricola. 1 

Exc. 2. The masculine idem, 2 as also bigce, quadrigm? 
siquis, siqua, siquod, 4 scilicet, 5 bimus, 6 trimus, quadri- 

1. Tubicen, according to the general rule, has the i short, whereas in 
tibicen the middle syllable isjong, because, as has already been remark- 
ed, it is a crasis of two short vowels into one long, from the original 
tibneen or tibiacen. In liticen (by syncope from litmcen) the penult h 
short. 

2. The old form for the masculine idem was isdem (is-dem), where the 
i was lor^g by position, a quantity retained after the 5 was dropped. 
The neuter, on the other hand, has the short vowel (i-dem), with which 
we may compare the Sanscrit i-dam. (Bopp, Vergleich. Gramm., 
p. 500.) 

3. Biga. and quadriga have already been explained, being mere con- 
tractions from btjitgcB, quadrijug<z. (Vid. page 24.) 

4. In siquis, siqua, slquod, the long i follows the analogy of si. 

5. Scilicet is from scire licet, just as llicet is from ire licet. 

6. Bimus, trimus, quadrimus, &c, are, according to Scaliger and 
Vossius, contractions from biennis, triennis, quadriennis. (Voss., Ety- 
mol. Lai.) 3. v.) 



46 a, e, i, u, and y, in composition. 



mus, quivis, quidam, quilibet, 1 tantidem, 2 bidudm, tridu* 
urn? quottdie, 4 and the other compounds of dies, have 
the i long. 

Virg. Omnibus idem animus, scelerata excedere terra. 
Mart. Si totus tibi triduo legatur. (Phalaecian.) 
Phaedr. Nam vita morti propior est quotidie* (Iambic.) 
Terent. Quotidiana vita consuetudinem. (Iambic.) 
Phaedr. Idem facturum melius se postridie. (Iambic.) 
Enn. Tantidem, quasi f eta canis, sine dentibu' latrat. 

Exc. 3. In ubicunque and ubivis, the i, as in the primi- 
tive ubi, is common ; while in ubique and ibidem the 
middle syllable is generally long; though, strictly 
speaking, it should also be regarded as common. 5 

1. In quivis, quidam, and quilibet, the i follows the quantity of the 
simple qui. The termination dam, in quidam, is compared by Bopp 
with the similar termination in the Sanscrit i-dam. (Vergleich. Gramm., 
p. 500.) 

2. Tantidem has the short penult in Varro (ap. Non., c. 7, n. 105). 

" Hospes quid miras nummo curare Serapim? 
Quid ? quasi non cures tantidem Aristoteles." 
Supposing the reading to be correct, we may conjecture that tantidem 
was formed by crasis from tantndem, but tanfidem, on the other hand, 
by syncope. The word indidem (from indeidem) affords an argument in 
favour of this supposition. {Carey, hat. Pros., y 10, p. 49.) 

3. Originally, perhaps, bisduum, trisduum. 

4. Quotidie has the i everywhere long, except in Catullus (68, 139), 
where we have qudticfiana. This, however, is either a corrupt reading, 
as some maintain {Doering, ad Catull., I. c. — var. lect.), or else, in scan- 
ning, we must read quottidiana, and pronounce it quottid-ydna, making 
the line a Spondaic one. 

5. The middle syllable in ubique should be considered common, for 
the reason that the corresponding syllable in ubicunque and ubivis is re- 
garded as such, they being all derived from ubi. The authorities, how 
ever, to prove that the middle syllable of ubique was short as well as 
long, are very rare. Wasse cites two lines from Plautus (Bacch., 5, 1, 
I. — Cos., 2, 3, 38), in which he maintains that ubique is found with the 
short penult ; and he then goes on to remark : " Totum discrimen in 
hoc verti videtur, quod ubi, cum dcsinat in ancipitem, quoties adjicitur 
particula copulativa, ultimam corripiat ; quoties expletiva, producat : 
apud reccntiores quidem, discretionis causa ; non item apud vetustis- 
simos." The difference in quantity here alluded to, though it may not 
have any very strong arguments in its favour, may yet be recommended 
" discretionis causa" and will be found not inconvenient. Foi exam- 
ple, in reading Sallust, where uhique, in the sense of et ubi, frequently 



IN COMPOSITION. 



47 



SECTION XVIL 
O IN COMPOSITION. 
Rule 1. In words of Greek origin, where the first part 
of the compound ends in o»micron (or short o), that vowel 
is short ; as, schoenobates, biblidpola, areopagus, Cleopatra ; 
unless rendered common or long by position ; as, chiro~ 
graphics, Hippocrene, Phildxenus, Nicdstratus. 
Juv. Augur, schoenobates, medicus, magus, omnia novit. 
Mart. Non habeo, sed habet biblidpola Tryphon. (Pentam.) 
Lucan. Hesperios auxit tantum Cleopatra furores* 

Rule 2. But if the first part of the compound word end 
in an o-mega (or long o), the o is long in Latin ; as, Mind" 
taurus, gedmetres, geographus, lagdpus. 

Virg. Mindtaurus inest, Veneris monumenta nefandm. 

Mart. Si mens aurita gaudet lagdpode Flaccus. 

Obs. In compound Latin words, the o is sometimes long, 
as, alidquin, quanddque, nolo ; and sometimes short ; as 
quandoquidem, hodie, duodeni. 1 

Horat. Mendosa est natura, alidquin recta, velut si. 
Id. Indignor quanddque bonus dormitat Homerus, 

Propert. Hanc utinam faciem ndlit mutare senectus. 

occurs, we may pronounce the word with the penult shortened, ubique 7 
reserving the long penult for ubique, when it signifies "everywhere " "in 
every place." — With regard to ibidem, though found long in the best 
writers, it nevertheless occurs with the penultima short in Juvencus and 
Mamercus, whose authority, though by no means equal to that of Hor- 
ace and Virgil, is still not to be overlooked in a case of this kind. Plau- 
tus also shortens the penult of the same word in several instances. 
(Merc, 2, 3, 99.— Most., 2, 2, 51.— Trm., 1, 2, 166.— Captiv., 4, 2, 
94=.—Bacch., 2, 3, 79.— Stick, 2, 3, 12.) 

1. Since quando has the last syllable common, it is more than proba- 
ble that the o was likewise common in both quandoque and quandoqui- 
dem, although no instances can be adduced of a short penult in the case 
^f the former, or a long antepenult in that of the latter. — In like man- 
ner, as duo has the o common, the same vowel may have been common 
likewise in duodeni. 



48 



INCREMENTS OF NOUNS. 



Virg. Dicite, juanddquide?n molli consedimus herba. 
Horat. Non dices hodie, quorsum hac tarn pulida tandem* 
Virg. P?r duodena regit mundum sol aureus astra. 



SECTION XVIII. 

INCREMENTS OF NOUNS. 

I. By the increments of nouns is meant the syllable or 
syllables by which an oblique case exceeds the nomina- 
tive. 

II. When a word of one or more syllables increases, the 
penult is regarded as the increment. Thus, the re in re- 
gis, from rex, is the increment, the last syllable never be- 
ing considered such in any word. 

III. When there are more increments than one, which 
seldom happens but in the plural, they are to be reckoned 
in the retrograde order, beginning with the penult. 

IV. If a noun has one syllable, in an oblifue case, more 
than in the nominative, it is said to have one increment or 
increase ; as, 

i 

rex, re-gis, 
sermo, ser-mo-nis. 

V. The quantity of the increment of all the other oblique 
cases is regulated by that of the genitive ; as, sermoni, 
sermdnem, sermdnibus, &c, in which the o is long, because 
the o of sermdnis is long. There is but one exception to 
this remark, namely, bobus, from bos, bovis ; but this is, in 
reality, a contraction from bovibus. 1 

VI. Nouns in general have but one increase in the sin- 
gular ; but iter, jecur (when its genitive is jecinoris), supel- 
lex, and the compounds of caput ending in ps, have two 
increments. Thus, 



1. Bovibus is the same as bowibus, which by contraction becomes 
bowbus, or, when written with the long o, bobus. 



INCREMENTS OF THE FIRST DECLENSION. 49 



1 2 

iter, i— ti —ne-ris. 

jecur, je- ci -no-ris. 

supellex, supel-lec-ti-lis. 
anceps, an- ci -pi-tis. 

VII. The dative and ablative plural of the third declen- 
sion, in ibus, have generally two increments ; as, 

1 2 

ser-mo-ni-bus. 
But the words mentioned in the previous paragraph have 
three increments in these two plural cases. 1 Thus, 

1 2 3 

i- ti—ne-ri-bus. 
je— ci -no—ri—bus. 
supel-lec- ti - li-bus. 
an— ci —pi—ti-bus. 

SECTION XIX. 

INCREMENTS OF THE FIRST AND SECOND DECLEN- 
SIONS. 

FIRST DECLENSION. 

Rule. The vowel a, in the old increment of the first 

I. The uncommon increase of these words is owing to their having 
come originally from nominatives, now obsolete, which consisted of a 
greater number of syllables than the nominatives to which they are at pres- 
ent assigned. Iter has for its regular formation in the genitive ileris ; and 
Charisius (p. 108) adduces examples of this form of the genitive from Pa- 
cuvius and Hyginus. Priscian (p. 695) finds this same form in Naevius. 
The ablative itere occurs in Lucretius (5, 652). Besides iter, however, 
there was another form for the nominative, namely, itiner, from which 
comes the ordinary genitive itineris, and the other cases similar to it. 
(Compare Charts., p. 16, 34, 63, \W .—Priscian, p. 646, 659.) This 
nominative itiner is found in Lucretius (6, 338). — The remarks just 
made respecting iter apply equally to jecur, supellex, and anceps 
Thus, besides jecur, there was another form for the nominative, jecinur 
or jecinor, whence came jecinuris or jecinoris. (Ckaris., p. 34. — 
Priscian, p. 707.) So also supellex borrows its oblique cases from an 
adjective, supellectilis, supellectile (Charis., p. 34, 67. — Priscian, p. 
724) ; while anceps obtains them from an old nominative ancipes, which 
made ancipitis in the genitive, just as miles makes militis. This 
nominative ancipes occurs in Plautus (Rud., 4, 4, 114). In like man- 
ner, praceps borrows its genitive prcecipitis, and other oblique cases, 
from the old form precipes. 



50 INCREMENTS OF THE SECOND DECLENSION. 



declension, is always long ; as, aulai, aurai, longai, jnc- 
taV 

Virg. Aulai in medio libabant pocula Bacchi. 

Id. .jJHthereum sensum, atque aurai simplicis ignem. 

SECOND DECLENSION. 

Rule. The increments of the second declension are 
short ; as, miser, miseri ; vir, viri ; satur, saturi ; pue< 
pueri. 2 

Virg. Non ignara mali, miseris succurrere disco. 

Id. Arma viri I ferte arma I vocat lux ultima victos 

Tibull. Turbaque vernarum, saturi bona signa coloni. 

EXCEPTION. 

Iber and its compound Celtiber have the penult of the 

genitive long ; as, Iberi, Celtiber i. 3 
Lucan. Quique feros movit Sertorius exsul Iberos. 
Mart. Vir Celtiberis non tacende gentibus. (Iambic.) 

Obs. The increment in ius has already been noticed in 
section IV. 

SECTION XX. 
INCREMENTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 

INCREMENT IN a. 

Rule. The increment in a of nouns of the third declen- 



1. The principle on which this long penult depends has already been 
explained. Consult page 17, note 1. 

2. In strictness these are no increments at all, since miser, vir, satur, 
puer, &c, are merely contractions from forms in us ; as, mis erus, virus, 
saturus, puerus, &c. The vocative puere in Plautus (Asin., 2, 3, 2) 
can only come from a nominative puerus. Other examples of puerus 
and puere are given by Priscian (p. 697 and 738). So, again, the form 
vir a, of which Festus speaks, could only come from virus. (Fest., p. 
411, ed Amstel., s. v. Querquetulance. — Serv. ad Mn., 12, 468.) 

3. These forms, again, like those mentioned in the previous note, are 
not actual increments ; on the contrary, the nominatives Iber and Celti- 
ber are merely contractions from Iberus and Celtiberus, in Greek 
'Itypoe and Kehri&Jipoi. 



INCREMENTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 51 



sion is chiefly long ; as, vectigal, vectigalis ; pax, pads * 

calcar, calcar is, &c. 

Horat. Jurgatur verbis, ego vectigalia magna. 
Ovid. Jane fac cetemos pacem p'acisque ministros. 
Mart. Accipe belligera crudum thoraca Minerva. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc. 1. Masculine proper names in al and ar (except 
Car and Nar) increase short ; as, Hannibal, Hanni- 
balis ; Hamilcar, Hamilcaris ; l Ccesar, CcBsaris. 

Sil. Hannibalem Fabio ducam spectante per urbem. 

Id. Cui scevum arridens narrabis Hamilcaris umbris. 

Propert. Galium per medios ereptum Ccesaris enses. 

Exc. 2. The adjective par and its compounds ; the sub- 
stantive par ; the noun sal, whether neuter or mascu- 
line ; and also hcpar, nectar, baccar, vas (vadis), mas f 
anas, lar, andjubar, have the increase short. 

Virg. Ardentes auro et paribus lita corpora guttis. * 

Horat. Damnati populo paria, atque epulum arbitrio Arri et. 

Virg. Vela dabant Iceti, et spumas salis cere ruebant. 

Mart. Ipsa merum secum portat, et ipsa sdlem. (Pentam.) 

Horat. Quinta parte sui nectaris imbuit. (Choriambic.) 



1. Ennius and other early authors wrote Hannibalis, Hamilcaris, 
Hasdrubdlis, with the long penult. Aulus Gellius informs us, that the 
grammarian Valerius Probus followed this same pronunciation, and as- 
serted that Plautus, Ennius, and many other writers of that period, as 
we have already remarked, gave the penult long. He adds, however, 
that Probus cited merely one verse from the " Scipio" of Ennius, be- 
longing to the trochaic class : " Quique propter Hannibalis copias con- 
sider ant. V (Aul. GelL, 4, 7.) It cannot be denied that this is the more 
accurate pronunciation, since Ennius and the others lived nearer to the 
Carthaginian times ; still, however, the authority of their successors, who 
shortened the penult, is the rule to be followed in modern days. It may 
be remarked in favour of the long penult, that this harmonizes with the 
etymology of the names in question ; since both Hannibal and Hasdru- 
bal obtain the latter part of their form from the Oriental Baal, where the 
two vowels coalesce into one long ; while Hamilcar is to be adduced 
in part likewise, from Milcar, where the final syllable is also long. 
(Consult Gesenius, Phcen. Mon. } p. 407. — Gronov. ad GelL, I c.) 



52 



INCREMENTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 



Virg. Errantes hederas passim cum baccdre tellus. 
Ovid. Sacra Bona, mdribus non adeunda, Dea. (Pentam.) 
Avien. Latipedemque anatem cernas excedere ponlo. 
Tibull. Sed patrii servate Lares, aluistis et idem. 
Virg. It portis, jubare exorto, delecta juventus. 

Exc. 3. Greek nouns in a and as increase short ; as 

po'cma, poematis ; lampas, lampddis. 
Horat. Non quivis videt immodulata poemata judex, 
Ovid. Undique collucent prcecinctce lampddes auro. 

Exc. 4. Nouns ending in s, preceded by a consonant, 
and many nouns in ax, increase short in the genitive ; 
as, trabs, trabis ; Arabs, Arabis ; fax, fdcis ; arcto- 
phylax, arctophylacis (and many other compounds of 
(pvXa^) ; climax, climacis ; dropax, dropacis, &C. 1 

Virg. Auratasque trabes, veterum decora alta parentum. 

Horat. Otia divitiis Ardbum Uberrima muto. 

Virg. # Jamque faces et saxa volant, furor arma ministrat. 

Mart. Psilothro faciem lavas, et dropdce calvam. 

Obs. The proper name Syphax is commonly supposed 
to have in the genitive Syphacis and Syphdcis. This, 
however, is incorrect, as the short quantity turns merely 
on an erroneous reading in Claudian, and the true form of 
the genitive is consequently Syphacis. 2 

INCREMENT IN e. 

Rule. The increment in e, of the third declension, is 

1. These nouns in x are in fact nothing more than nouns ending 
in s preceded by a consonant, the letter x being equivalent to cs, gs, 
or ks. 

2. The line of Claudian occurs in the poem " De Bello Gildonico" 
(v. 91), and is as follows : " Compulimus dirum Syphacem, fractumque 
Mcttllo." The passage, however, of which this line forms part, in- 
volves a palpable historical error, if the reading Syphacem be retained; 
and Hannibalem has therefore been substituted by Barth; an emenda- 
tion approved of by Broukhusius (ad Propcrt., 3, 9, 61) and other schol- 
ars, although the common reading is retained by Artaud in Lemaire'i 
Collection. 



INCREMENTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 53 



mostly short ; as, grex, gregis ; pes, pedis ; teres, teretis ; 
mulier, mulieris. 

Ovid. Nobiliumque greges custos servabat equarum. 
Fur. Pressatur pede pes, mucro mucrone, viro vir. 
Virg. Incumbens tereti Damon sic cozpit olives. 
Afran. Hcec sunt venena formosarum mulierum. (Iambic.) 

EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc. 1. Iber, Iberis, and genitives in enis, have the pe- 
nult long ; as, ren, renis ; Siren, Sirenis ; except that 
of hymen, which increases short. 

Prise. Quern juxta, terras habitant Orientis Iberes. 

Horat. Si latus aut renes morbo tentantur acuto. 

Ovid. Monstra maris Sirenes erant, qua voce canora. 

Exc. 2. Ver, mansues, locuples, hares, merces, quies, leoc, 
rex, plebs, vervex, seps, and halec, increase long ; as, 
veris, mansuetis, locupletis, haredis, mercedis, quietis, 
legis, regis, plebis, vervecis, sepis, halecis. 

Virg. Vere novo gelidus canis cum montibus humor 

Horat. Tu me fecisti locupletem. Vescere, sodes. 

Mart. Edent haredes, inquis, mea carmina quando. 

Id. Turba gravis paci, placid&que inimica quieti. 

Propert. Illorum antiquis onerentur legibus aures. 

Horat. Fortunam et mores antique plebis et idem. 

Mart. Capparin, et putri cepas halece natantes. 

Exc. 3. Hebrew and other foreign names in el increase 
long ; as, Daniel, Danielis ; Michael, Michaelis. 1 
Alcim. Magnum ilium Dominum atque deum Danielis ado* 
rans. 



Exc. 4. Greek nouns in es and er increase long ; as, 

1. Hebrew names in el follow the analogy of the long vowel in that 
language. 

E 2 



54 INCREMENTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 



tapes, tapetis; trapes, trapetis; lehes, lehetis; soter, 
soteris ; crater, crateris ; except (Ether and aer, which 
increase short. 1 

Sid. Ap. Ipse per attonitos bacca pendente trapetas. 

Ovid. Viginti fulvos operoso ex are lebetas. 

Virg. Crateras magnos statuunt, et vina coronant. 

Id. Quacumque ilia levem fugiens secat cethera pennis, 

Td. Si nigrum obscuro comprenderit dera cornu. 

INCREMENT IN i AND 1J. 

Rule. The increment in i or y, of the third declension, 

is for the most part short ; as, stips, stipis ; nemo, neminis ; 
pollex, pollicis ; chlamys, chlamydis ; chalybs, chalybis. 
Ovid. Die, inquam, parva cur stipe queer at opes. (Pentam.) 
Virg. Qualem virgineo demessum pollice florem. 
Ovid. Anchisce sceptrum, chlamydem pharetramque nepoti. 
Virg. Insula inexhaustis chalybum generosa metallis. 

• EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc. 1. Genitives in inis or ynis, from nouns of Greek 
origin, have the penult long ; as, delphin, delphmis ; 
Phorcyn, Phorcynis ; Salamis, Salaminis. 

Virg. Orpheus in silvis, inter delphtnas Arion. 

Id. Laomedontiaden Priamum Salamina petentem. 

Exc. 2. The following also have the long penult in the 
genitive: Dis, Ditis ; glis\ gliris ; vibex, vibicis ; 
gryps, gryphis ; Samnis, Samnitis ; Quiris, Quirltis ; 
Nesis, Nesidis. 

Virg. Nodes atque dies pat et atrijanua Ditis. 

Mart. Somniculosos ille porrigit glires. (Scazon.) 

Pers. Si puteal multa cautus vibice flagellas. 

Virg. Huic horret thorax Samnitis pellibus urscB. 

1. Greek nouns in es ancT cr which increase long in the genitive, 
have 7) in the penult of that case in Greek. On the contrary, cether and 
aer have e in the genitive ; as, aidepo^ dspog. 



INCREMENTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 55 



Luc. Tradite nostra viris, ignavi, signa, Quirites. 
Stat. Silvaque qua jixam pelago Nesida coronat. 



INCREMENT FROM ix AND 7/X. 

Rule. Nouns in ix or yx have, for the most part, the pe» 
nult of the genitive long ; as, bombyx, bombycis ; perdix, 
perdicis ; pernix, pernicis ; coturnix, coturnicis ; lodix, lo- 
dicis. 

Propert. Nec si qua Arabico lucet bombyce puella. 
Seren. Seu fel perdicis parili cum ponder e mellis. 
Virg. Progenuit pedibus celerem et pernicibus alis. 
Ovid. Ecce coturntces inter sua prcelia vivunt. 
Mart. Lodices mittet docti tibi terra Catulli. 



EXCEPTIONS. 

Nix, Cilix, strix, fornix, histrix, choenix, varix, salix, 
jilix, larix, coxendix, pix, calix, calyx, Eryx, Styx, 
lapyx, Phryx, onyx, and some others, havre their in- 
crease short, as have likewise some proper and gen- 
tile names ; such as Ambiorix, Vercingetorix ; Bitu- 
rix, Caturix. 

Virg. Perque nines alium perque horrida castra secuta est. 
Luc. Armenios Cilice sque feros, Taurosque subegi. 
Propert. Et strigis inventce per busta jacentia plum<B. 
Calph. Venit ; et hirsuta spinosior histrice barba. 
Seren. Scepius occultus victa coxendice morbus, 

Obs. 1. Mastix, mastichis, "a gum," increases short; 
but mastix, mastigis, " a whip," or " scourge," has the in- 
crement long. 

Seren. Pulegium, abrotonum, nitida cum mastiche coctum. 
Horn. A ftc apa ^vr\aaq Ifiaaev fidarlyt (paeivy. 
Prudent. Nunc mastigophoris, oleoque et gymnadis arte. 



Obs. 2. Appendix is generally considered as increasing 



56 INCREMENTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 



short in the genitive ; l and perpendiculum, a noun of kin- 
dred origin, has the penult short in Ausonius (Parental., 
5, 8). 

Obs. 3. Bebryx and sandix have the increment common. 

Val. Flacc. Bebrycis et Scythici procul inclementia sacri. 
Sil ltal. Possessus Baccho sceva Bebrycis in aula. 
Propert. Illaque plebeio, vel sit sandlcis amictu. 
Gratius. Interdum Libyco fucantur sandice pinnce. 

INCREMENT IN 0. 

Rule. O, in the increment of the third declension, in 
words of Latin origin, is for the most part long ; as, sol, 
solis ; vox, vocis ; victor, victdris ; and all other verbal 
nouns in or ; ros, roris ; dos, dotis ; statio, statidnis ; and 
all other feminine verbals in io ; Cato, Catdnis, and other 
Latin proper names in o. 

Ovid. Regia solis erat sublimibus alta columnis, 
Tibull. I lie liquor docuit voces infiectere cantu. 
Virg. Nec victdris heri tetigit captiva cubile, 
Lucan. Ire vetat, cursusque vagos statione moratur. 
Id. JEt mala vel duri lacrymas motura Catdnis. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc. 1. Nouns in o or on, taken from the Greek ov, 
preserve in Latin the same quantity of the increment 
which they have in the Greek. If that increment be 
an omicron, it is short ; if an omega, it is long. 
Thus, sindon, aedon, Agamemnon, Jason, Philemon, 
Slc, increase short ; whereas Laco, Plato, Solorf, 
Sicyon, &c, increase long. 

Mart. Cultus sindone non quotidiana. (Phalaecian.) 

Paulin. Si confers fulicas cycnis, et aeddna parrcB. 

Horat. Pythagoran, Anytique reum, doctumque Platdna. 

Mart. Et gratum nautis sidus fulgere Lacdnum. 

1. It is so given, for instance, by Scheller (Lai. Deutsch. Worterb.,8. 
v.) and Freund (Worterb. der hat. Sprache, s. v.] 



INCREMENTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 57 



Obs. Sidon, Orion, jEgceon, have the increment common, 
and so likewise has Britto, " a native of Britain." Saxo, 
Seno, and some other gentile nouns, increase short. 
Sil. Ital. Stat, fucare colos nec Sidone vilior, Ancon. 
Virg. Atque equidem Teucrum memini Siddna venire. 
Ovid. Quorum si mediis Bceoton Oridna quceras. 
Lucan. Ensiferi nimium fulget latus Orionis. 
Claud. Hcbc centumgemini strictos JEg&dnis enses. 
Ovid. JEgceona suis immunia terga lacertis. 
Juv. Qua nec terribiles Cimbri, nec Brittdnes unquam. 
Mart. Quam veteres braccce, Brittdnis pauperis, et quam. 

E rc. 2. Genitives in oris, from Latin nouns of the neu- 
er gender, have the penult short ; as, marmor, mar- 
mot is ; corpus, corporis ; ebur, eboris. 
Ador, however, wlfich is of the masculine gender, 
makes addris and addris ; it. being formd short in 
Ausonius, and both long and short in Gaimius, ao 
old poet quoted by Priscian. 1 

Auson. Mox ador, atque addris de polline pultificum far. 
Gann. Illam sponte satos addris stravisse maniplos. 
Id. Emicat in nubes nidoribus ador addris. 



Exc. 3. Greek proper names in or, and appellatives, as 

rhetor, increase short. 

Val. Plac. Ingemit et dulci f rater cum Castor e Pollux. 

Osrid. Et multos illic Hectoras esse puta. (Pentam.) 

1. Hence we have addreus in Virgil, and addrea in Horace and Clau- 
dian. — It is possible that the variation of quantity in addris and addrif 
may be connected with a difference of gender. Priscian considers adoi 
an irregular noun, which, though ending in or, still shortens the penulf 
of the genitive, and which terminates in or, though of the neuter gender. 
For this he is censured by Scaliger, who maintains that ador properly 
makes only addris in the genitive, and that addris comes from the obso- 
lete nominative adus, of the neuter gender. (Seal, ad Fcst., vi. — Pris- 
cian, 6, 9, 49 — vol. 1, p. 251, ed. Krehl.) Scaliger, however, is himself 
in error when he derives ador from the Greek advp. It is to be traced 
to the Sanscrit ad, " to eat." (Lindemann ad Fest., p. 302.) 



58 INCREMENTS OF THE THIRD DECLENSION. 



Mart. Peleos et Priami transit vel Nestdris atas. 

Id. Dum modo causidicum, dum te modo rhetor a fingis 

Exc. 4. Os, oris ; and adjectives of the comparative de- 
gree, have their increment long ; as, majoris, pejoris, 
melioris. 

Virg. Componens manibusque manus, atque oribus dra. 
Id. Nate dea, nam te majoribus ire per altum. 
Horat. Mutius, indignum quod sit pejoribus ortus, 

Exc. 5. The compounds of novg, as, tripus, polypus, 
CEdipus ; and also memor, arbor, lepus, bos, compos, 
and impos, increase short. 
Juv. Stantibus oznophorum, tripodas, armaria, cistas. 
Mart. Phineas invites, Afer, et CEdipodas. (Pentam.) 
Virg. Strata jacent passim sua qiyique sub arbore poma. 
Mart. Mavis, Rufe, coquum scindere quam lepdrem. (Pen- 
tam.) 

Exc. 6. Cappadox, Allobrox, prcecox, and other nouns 
which have a consonant immediately before s in the 
nominative ; as, scobs, scrobs, ops, inops, JEthiops, Ce- 
crops, Dolops, increase short ; except Cyclops, Cercops, 
and hydrops. 

Horat. Mancipiis locuples, eget ceris Cappadocum rex. 
Senec. Materna, letum prcecocis mali tulit. (Iambic.) 
Juv. A scrobe vel sulco redeuntibus altera cozna. 
Virg. Non hcec humanis opibus, non arte magistra. 
Ovid. Virginibusque tribus gemino de Cecrope natis. • 
Manil. Et portentosos Cercopum ludit in ortus. 
Ovid. Tela reponuntur manibus fabricata Cyclopum. 

INCREMENT IN U. 

Rule. The increment in u of the third declension is for 
the most part short ; as, murmur, murmuris ; furfur, fur* 
furis ; dux, ducis ; prcBSul, prcesulis ; turtur, turturis. 



PLURAL INCREMENT OF NOUNS. 



59 



Virg. Aspice, ventosi ceciderunt murmuris aura. 
Seren. Furfuribusque novis durum miscebis acetum. 
Pedo. Consuls nos, duce nos, duce jam victore caremus. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc. 1. Genitives in udis, uris, and utis, from nomina- 
tives in us, have the penult long; as, palus, paludis ; 
incus, incudis ; tellus, telluris ; virtus, virtutis. 

Virg. Quum primum sulcos (Equant sata ? quique paludis. 

Mart. Turn grave percussis incudibus (Bra resultant. 

Virg. Vive e conspectu Siculce telluris in altum. 

Id. Mittatur Pallas, quern non virtutis egentem. 

Exc. 2. The following also increase long : fur, furis ; 
lux, lucis ; Pollux, Pollucis ; and frugis, from the old 
nominative frux. But intercus, pecus, and Ligus, in- 
crease short. 

Virg. Quid domini faciant, audent cum talia fures ? 
Tibull. Luce sacra requiescit humus, requiescit arator. 
Ovid. Pollucem pugiles, Castora placet eques. (Pentam.) 

SECTION XXI. 
PLURAL INCREMENT OF NOUNS. 
The penult of the genitive or dative plural is called the 
plural increment of a noun when either of these cases con- 
tains more syllables than the nominative plural ; as, musce, 
musarum ; ambo, ambdrum, ambobus ; res, rerum, rebus ; in 
•the first of which -the syllable sa, in the second bo, in the 
third re, are the respective plural increments. So also bi 
in nullum, nubibus ; quo in quorum ; qui in quibus. 

PLURAL INCREMENTS IN a, e, 0, i, U. 

Rule. In the increase of the plural, a, e, and o are long, 
% and u short ; as, quarum, harum, Musarum; rerum, rebus; 
horum, quorum ; quibus, tril us, montibus, lacubus. 



60 



INCREMENT OF VERBS. 



Virg. Quarum qua forma pulcherrima, De'iopeam. 
Ovid. Cum tamen a turba rerum requieverit harum. 
Virg. Jupiter, et rebus nox abstulit atra color em. 
Id. At Capys, et quorum melior sententia menti. 
Id. Montibus in nostris solus tibi certet Amyntas. 
Ovid. Pramia de lacubus proxima musta tuts. (Pentam.) 

Obs. Bubus has already been explained under section V 

SECTION XXII. 
INCREMENT OF VERBS. 

I. The second person singular of the present tense, in- 
dicative active, is the measure by which to estimate the in- 
crement of verbs. If any tense or person of a verb do not 
contain a greater number of syllables than the above stand- 
ard, the verb is said, in that tense or person, to have no in- 
crement. Thus, in amat, amant, ama, amem, amans, the 
verb amo has no increment, because they all contain only 
two syllables, like amas. 

II. If, however, a tense or person exceed the given 
standard, then, if that excess be by one syllable, the verb 
is said to have in that part a single increment ; if by two 
syllables, a double ; if by three, a triple ; if by four, a four- 
fold increment. Thus, in aMAmus there is a single incre- 
ment, which is the penult, for the final syllable is never 
called an increment ; in aMABAmus there is a double in- 
crement ; in aMAVFiRlmus a triple increment ; and in au~ 
DIEBAMItm a fourfold increment. 

III. In determining the increments of deponent verbs, 
we may imagine an active voice, 1 and obtain from this the 
requisite standard for the regulation of the increments ; or 
we may be guided by analogy, and estimate them by means 

1. Most deponent verbs had, in fact, in earlier Latin, an active voice, 
which was dropped daring the more cultivated period of the language. 
Consult Struve, iiber die Lat. Decl. und Conj., p. 80. — Reisig, Vorle- 
sungen, p. 243, $ 150. 



INCREMENT OF VERBS. 



61 



of other verbs of the same conjugation which have ah active 
voice. Thus, for the verb largior, we may either form an 
imaginary active, largio, largis, of the fourth conjugation, 
or be guided by the tenses of audior, which has a real ac- 
tive. 

IV. The final syllable, as has just been observed, is 
never regarded as an increment. The first syllable, how- 
ever, becomes one when the standard tense is a monosyl- 
lable. Thus, in the case of do zn&Jleo, the tenses by which 
we are to estimate their respective increments are das and 
jies, and consequently in damuz, dabam, dare ; jlemus, fle- 
bam, Jlere, the initial syllables are the increments of the 
verbs. 



VERBAL INCREMENT IN a. 

Rule. The vowel a is long in the increments of verbs 
of every conjugation ; as, stdbam, stares, properamus, doce- 
bdmus, audiebdmini, &c. 

Virg. Trojaque nunc stares, Priamique arx alta maneres. 

Ovid. Serins aut citius sedem properamus ad unam. 

Horat. Pugnabant armis, qua post fabricaverat usus. 

Mart. Festinavit Arabs, festinav ere Sabcei. 

Ovid. Ipse guberndbit residens in puppe Cupido. 

Id. Clam tamen intrdto, ne te mea carmina Icedant* 

Virg. Et cantdre pares, et respondere pardti. 

Mart. Esse videbdris, fateor, Lucretia nobis. 



EXCEPTION. 

The first increase of the verb do is short ; as, damus, da* 
bunt, dare ; and hence the pronunciation of circumda* 
mus, circumdabunt, circnmddre ; venumdabo, venumdare, 
&c, with the penult short. 1 

1. This violation of analogy on the part of do, to which Priscian al- 
ludes (9, 6 — vol. 1, p. 453, ed. Krehl.), may be accounted for by suppo- 
sing that the verb was originally conjugated, do, dere, didi, dttum, as we 
have it in the compound dedo (de-do). It would thus have belonged at 

F 



62 



INCREMENT OF VERBS. 



Virg. His lacrymis vitam ddmus, et miserescimus ultro* 

Mart. Mille dab am numos ; noluit accipere. (Pentara.) 

Tibull. Quamvis magna daret, quamvis majora ddturus. 

Virg. Taurine* quantum possent circumdare tergo. 

Ovid. Multa rogant utenda dart, data reddere nolunt. 

Obs. The second increase of do, not being excepted, fol- 
lows the general rule, and is long ; as, ddbdmus, dabdtis, 
ddbdmur, dabdtur, dabdmini. 
Virg. Nam quod consilium, aut qua jam for tuna dabdtur. 

VERBAL INCREMENT IN C 

Rule. The vowel e is long in the increase of verbs ; as, 

Jlebam, rebar, lacereris, docerem, legerunt. 

Ovid. Flebat Aristceus, quod apes cum stirpe necatas. 
Virg. Sic equidem ducebam animo, rebarque futurum. 
Mart. Dcedale Lucano cum sic lacereris ab urso. 



EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc. 1. But e before r in the first increase of every pres- 
ent and imperfect of the third conjugation, and also in 
the terminations beris and bere, is short ; as, cognos- 
cere, legere, legerem, legeremus, legeris, celebraberis, 
celebrabere. 

Virg. Jam legere, et qua sit poteris cognoscere virtus. 
Id. Semper honore meo, semper celebrabere donis. 

Obs. 1. But in the second increment, where the word 
terminates in reris or rere, the e is long ; as, diripereris, 
loquereris, loquerere, prosequerere. 

Ovid. Cum consternatis diripereris equis. (Pentam.) 
Mart. Hoc tibi Roma caput, cum loquereris, erat. (Pentam.) 
Claud. Jungebam Phrygios, cum tu raperere leones. 

first to the third conjugation, and afterward have been transferred to 
the first, with a change of I to a. Such forms, therefore, as circumdare, 
venumdare, &c, were originally circumdere, venumdere. 



INCREMENT OF VERBS 



63 



Obs. 2. The forms velim, velis, velit, &c., have the e 
short. 

Horat. Musa, velim memores : et quo patre natus uterque. 
Mart. Esse velis, oro, serus conviva Tonantis. 

Exc. 2. The vowel e before ram, rim, ro, of every con- 
jugation, is short ; as, amaveram, amaverim, amavero ; 
feceram, fecerim, fecero ; and the quantity remains the 
same in the other persons ; as, amaveris, amaverit, 
amaverimus, amaveritis ; fecerimus, feceritis. 
Ovid. Fecerat exiguas jam sol altissimus umbras, 
Catull. Dein cum millia multa fecerimus. (Phalaecian.) 

Obs. This rule does not apply to those syncopated tenses 
which have lost the syllable ve ; as, fleram, fierim, fiero ; 
the e in these contracted forms retaining the same quantity 
which it possessed previously to the syncope ; viz.,^e(ve)- 
ram, Jle(ve)rim^ Jle(Ye)ro. 

Virg. Implerunt monies, jlerunt Rhodopeice arces. 

Ovid. Nerunt fat ales fortia fiia dece. (Pentam.) 

Exc. 3. The poets sometimes shorten e before runt, in 
the third person plural' of the perfect indicative active. 1 
Virg. Obstupui, steteruntque comes, et vox faucibus hessit. 
Id. Matri longa decern tulerunt fastidia menses. 
Horat. Di tibi divitias dederunt artemque fruendi. 
Tibull. Nec cithara, intonsm profueruntve coma. (Pentam.) 
Mart. Nec tua defuerunt verba Thalasse mihi. (Pentam.) 
Sil. It. Terruerunt pavidos accensa Ceraunia nautas. 

VERBAL INCREMENT IN U 

Rule. The vowel i in any of the increments of verbs is 
short, whether such increment be the first, second, third, or 
fourth ; as, linquimus, amabimus, docebimtni, audiebamini, 



1. Consult remarks under the article Systole, page 127. 



64 



INCREMENT OF VERBS. 



<fec, and venimus, comperimus, reperlmus, &c, of the per 
feet tense. 

Virg. Linquimus Qrtygiaz portus, pelagoque volamus. 

Horat. Infra se positas ; extinctus amabitur idem. 

Manil. Victuros agimus semper, nec vivimus unquam. 

Claud. Vicimus, expuUmus ; facilis jam copia regni. 

Plaut. Quapropter id vos factum suspicamini? (Iamb.) 

EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc. 1. But the i is long in nolito, nolite, nolimus, nolitis , 
oelimus, velitis ; malimus, malitis ; simus, sitis ; and 
cheir compounds, possimus, adsimus, prosimus, &c. 

Mart. Nolito fronti credere, nupsit heri. (Pentam.) 

Calp. Credere, pastores, levibus nolite puellis. 

Mart. Ne nimium simus, stultorum more, molesti. 

Calp. Possitis, ter quisque manus jactate micantes. 

Exc. 2. The penult of the preterite in ivi, of any conju- 
gation, is long ; as, petivi, audivi. 
Virg. Cessi, et sublato montem genitore petivi. 
Id. Adventumque pedum, fiatusque audivit equorum. 

Exc. 3. In the first increase of the fourth conjugation 
whenever a consonant immediately follows, the i i* 
long ; as, audimus* auditis, audite, audirem, audire, au 
dimur, auditur, audirer, auditor, audiri ; to which add 
the contracted form of the imperfect, audibam, and the 
old form of the future, audibo, which we uniformly 
find in ibam and ibo, from eo, as well as in quibam and 
quibo, from queo. 

Senec. Audimur, en, en, sonitus Herculei gradus. (Iamb.) 

Virg. Montibus audiri fragor, et resonantia longe. 

Horat. Alterius sermone meros audiret honores. 

Virg Ferre rotam, et stabulo frcnos audite sonantes. 

Id. Tu ne cede malis sed contra audentior ito. 



INCREMENT OF VERBS. 



65 



/irg. Jungimus hospitio dextras, et tecta subimus. 
Id. Nutribat, teneris irnmulgens ubera labris. 

Propjit. Lenibunt tacito vulnera nostra sinu. (Pentam.) 

Obs. 1. Venimus, comperimus, reperimus, &c, of the pres- 
ent tense, fall under the previous exception, and are long ; 
whereas venimus, comperimus, reperimus, &c, of the perfect 
tense, have the penult short, as has been mentioned, ac- 
cording to the general rule. 

Obs. 2. When a vowel, and not a consonant, immediately 
follows the i in the first increase of the fourth conjugation, 
the i becomes necessarily short by position ; as, audiunt t 
audiebam, audiam, audiar, audiens, &c. 

Obs. 3. The i in the penult of the first and second per 

sons plural of the indicative future perfect, or second future, 

and the perfect of the subjunctive is doubtful. 1 

Lucret. Quas ob res ubi viderimus nil posse creari. 

Catull. Dein cum millia multa fecerimus. (Phalsecian.) 

Ovid. Videritis Stellas illic ubi circulus axem. 

Id. Hcbc ubi dixeritis, servet sua dona, rogate. 

Id. Accepisse simul vitam dederitis in unda. 

Id. Et maris Ionii transierltis aquas, (Pentam.) 

Id. Consulis ut limen contigeritis, erit. (Pentam.) 

Virg. Egenmus, nosti; et nimium meminisse necesse est. 

1. We have given the rule as equally applicable to both the indica- 
tive future perfect and the perfect subjunctive. It holds good, however, 
more certainly of the former than the latter tense. With regard to the 
perfect subjunctive, it is frequently impossible to distinguish it from the 
future perfect, since in very many cases where the one is employed, a 
very slight modification of the sense would render the use of the other 
equally appropriate. The only example discovered by prosodians where 
this tense undoubtedly occurs in such a position as to determine its 
quantity, is in the line from Virgil cited above, and which is found in Mn., 
6, 514. — The old grammarians are at variance on this subject. Diorne- 
des (p. 331) and Agrcetius (p. 2267) assert that the penult of rimus and 
ritis in the future perfect is long, and in the perfect subjunctive is 
short. Probus, on the other hand (p. 1412 — p. 1434), affirms that the 
syllable is long in both tenses ; and both Probus and Servius {ad Virg,, 

1. c.) expressly declare, that the penult of egerimus, in the passage quoted, 
was shortened by Virgil " metri necessitate: " {Voss., de Art. Gram^ 

2, 31.) 

F 2 



66 



FINAL SYLLABLES. 



VERBAL INCREMENT IN AND U. 

Rule. In the increase of verbs o is always long, but u 
is generally short ; as,facitdte, habetote ; sumus, possumus, 
mlumus. 

Ovid. Cumque loqui poterit, matrem facitote salutet. 
Id. Mine quoque presidium lessee petitote figures. 
Horat. Nos numerus sumus, ct fruges consumer e nati. 
Virg. Dicite, Pierides : non omnia possumus omnes. 
Horat. Si patrics volumus, si nobis, vivere cari. 

EXCEPTION. 

But u in the penult of the future participle in rus is al- 
ways long; as, periturus, facturus, amaturus. 
Virg. Si periturus abis, et nos rape in omnia tecum. 
Id. Tarda venit, seris factura nepotibus umbram. 

SECTION XXIII. 
FINAL SYLLABLES. 
The quantity of final syllables is ascertained, in some 
cases, by position ; as, prudens, prcscox ; in others by their 
containing a diphthongal sound ; as, muses, pennce ; but in 
most by special rules, which follow. 

final a. ' 

Rule 1. A in the end of words not declined by cases is 
long ; as, circa, citra, contra, extra, frustra, intra, &c. ; to 
which add the imperative of the first conjugation ; as, mem- 
or a, am a. 1 

1. In imperatives of the first conjugation the final a is long, because 
formed by contraction from ae. Thus, memorae, memord ; amae, ama y 
&c. (Struve, iiber die Lat. Declin. und Conj., p. 135.) — With regard 
to circa, citra, contra, &c, various opinions exist. Scheller views them 
as old ablatives singular feminine of the first declension, with an ellipsis 
of parte, or opera, or some other equivalent term. (Scheller, Lat.- 
Deutsch. Worterb., s. v.) Ramsay, on the ©ther hand, regards most 
of them as old imperatives of verbs of the first conjugation, of which 
frustro, intro, supero (or supro), are still in use ; while, as respects such 
forms as an ed, posted, inter ed, prater ed, &c, he agrees with the author 



FINAL SYLLABLES. 



67 



Circa mite solum Tiburis et moznia Catili. (Chori- 
ambic.) 

Dextera diriguit, nec citra motet, nec ultra. 
Contra non ulla est oleis cultura, neque illcs. 
Laudet ametque domi, premat extra, limen iniquus. 
Frustra, nam scopulis surdior Icari. (Clioriambic.) 
Musa, mihi causas memora ; quo numine 1<rso. 
Si auctoritatem posted defugeris. (Iambic.) 1 



EXCEPTIONS. 

But eia, it a, put a 2 (the adverb), and quia, 3 have the final 
vowel short ; and also the names of letters ; as, alpha, 
beta, &c, which latter follow the quantity of the Greek. 

VaL Flac. Ferret ad aurigerm caput arboris : Fia per ipsum. 

Virg. Incolimus ; sed vos, si fert itd corde voluntas. 



of a paper in the "Journal of Education" (vol. 1, p. 106), who supposes 
them to be formed from ante earn, post earn, &c, the correlatives ante- 
quam, postquam, still retaining the final letter. (Ramsay' 's hat. Pros., 
p. 38.) 

1. Posted occurs with the final vowel short in Ovid (Fast., 1, 165) ; 
but the difficulty may be obviated either by writing post ed, or by pro- 
nouncing the word as a dissyllable, postya, making it, in this latter case, 
have the long final vowel. 

2. Putd is short only when taken adverbially. When it stands as an 
imperative the a is long. Some doubt, however, has been attempted to 
be thrown upon the quantity of the final letter in puta when an adverb. 
It is found short in Persius (4, 9), and also in Martial (3, 26, 5 ; 9, 96, 
5 ; 11,95, 2), in accordance with the exception in the text, and it has been 
allowed to stand by several editors, where others have given puto. Ca- 
saubon and Konig, for example, retain putd in the text of Persius, and 
Priscian, the ancient grammarian, as cited by the former, observes, "Ita 
solum a correptum habet, quamvis quidam puta adverbium esse accipiunt, 
ideoque Persium id corripuisse, ut, hoc, puta, non justum," etc. (Prise., 
lib. 15 — vol. 1, p. 617, ed. Krehl.) Servius likewise, in his commentary 
on Virgil (Mn., 2, 651 — vol. 1, p. 167, ed. Lion), after observing that 
adverbs in a are long, expressly excepts putd and itd. Still, in all the 
instances cited above, many MSS. give puto, which leaves the matter 
involved in some degree of uncertainty. 

3. Dr. Carey, on the authority of a single line in Phaedrus, pronounces 
the final vowel in quia doubtful. The line is as follows : " Ego primam 
tollo nominor quid leo.^ (Phcedr., 1, 7.) But almost all editors agree 
in considering the line corrupt, and most of them read " Ego primam 
tollo quoniam nomine* leo." 



Hoiat. 

Ovid. 

Virg. 

Horat. 

Id. 

Virg. 

Plaut. 



68 



FINAL SYLLABLES. 



Virg. Sed quia non aliter vires dabit omnibus aquas. 
Juv. Hoc discunt omnes ante Alpha ct Beta puellcB. 

Rule 2. A in the end of words declined by cases is 
short, except the ablative singular of the first declension, 
and Greek vocatives from nominatives in as ; as, ancho^a 
de prora, JEnea, Palla. 1 

Virg. Anchor a de prora jacitur ; stant littore puppes. 
Id. Quid miserum, ^Ened, laceras ? jam parce sepulto. 

Obs. 1. Greek names in es and e are frequently changed 
by the Latins into a ; as, Atrida for Atrides ; Oresta for 
Orestes ; Circa for Circe. In nouns of this class, the final 
a in the vocative is short. 2 

Obs. 2. Some prosodians make the final a in numerals 
either long or short. The true quantity, however, is the 
long one ; as, triginta, quadraginta, sexaginta. 3 

FINAL e. 

Rule. E final is for the most part short; as, nate,fuge t 

eripe, Me, sine, pane, &c. 

1. The final a in the ablative singular of the first declension is long, 
because contracted from at. The old dative and ablative singular of the 
first declension had this latter ending ; as, terra'i for terra ; terra'i for terra. 
{Plank ad Enn., Med., p. 80.— Gruter, Inscr., 2, 12.— M, Ind., p. 84.) 

2. The short a in these forms is obtained from the -^Eolic a. (Com- 
pare the Greek forms ve(pe?i7jyepird, LTriTOTa, evpyona, and the Latin 
poeta, from TzoirjTTjg.) In Virgil (JEn., 3, 475) we have Anchisd in the 
vocative, which some deduce from a Doric nominative Anchisas. It is 
better, however, to ascribe the length of the final vowel, in this instance, 
to the force of the caesura or arsis. 

3. To support the position that the final a in numerals is common, the 
following line from Manilius has been adduced : " Ter trigintd quadrum 
partes per sidera reddant." (Manil., 2, 322.) Bentley, however, in- 
sists that the reading here is erroneous, especially since triginta occturs 
six lines lower down, in the same poet, with the final vowel long. In 
all the oldest MSS. of the classics, numbers were expressed by marks, 
not by words ; herice, when the transcriber found LXXXX in his copy, 
he ignorantly, according to the English critic, rendered it by ter triginta 
instead of nongentce, which latter reading Bentley of course restores. 
Some other examples of numerals with the short final vowel are adduced 
from Martial and Ausonius, but the MSS. here give different readings, 
The rule, therefore, laid down above is undoubtedly the true one. 



FINAL SYLLABLES. 



69 



Virg. Heufuge, nate Dea, teque his ait eripe flanftnis. 
Id. Ille mihi ante alios fortunatusque laborum. 
Id. Queis sine nec potuere seri nec surgere messes* 
Id. Pane simul tecum solatia rapta Menalca* 



EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc. 1. E final is long in all cases of the first and fifth 
declensions ; as, JEgle, Thisbe, Melpomene, die, fide, 
fame, re ; and in adverbs derived from the latter ; as, 
hodie, pridie, quare, Sic. 1 

Virg. JEgle Na'iadum pulcherrima, jamque videnti. 

Ovid. Sape ut constiterant, hinc Thisbe, Py ramus illinc. 

Horat. Quern tu Melpomene semel. (Choriambic.) 

Virg. Forte die solemnem illo rex Areas honorem. 

Id. Libra die somnique pares ubifecerit horas. 

Horat. Effare; jussas cum fide poznas luam. (Iambic.) 

Virg. Amissis, utfama, apibus morboque fameque. 

Id. Pro re pauca loquor ; nec ego hanc absconder e furto 

Horat. Muneribus servos corrumpam ; non hodie si. 

Id. Quare per divos oratus uterque penates. 

1. The final e is long in all cases of nouns of the first declension, be- 
cause answering to the Greek 77. It is long in all cases of the fifth de- 
clension, because it is a contracted syllable. {Schneider, L. G., vol. 3, 
p. 355, seqq.) — Under this same exception falls the ablative fame {Virg., 
Mn., 6, 421), the noun fames having been, according to Aulus Gellius 
(9, 14), originally of the fifth declension, fames, famei; like plehes, ple- 
lei. — The vocatives Ulysse and Achille have also the final e long. These 
are Greek forms. The ^Eolo-Doric tribes changed the termination evg 
into ye, and said "Optyrjc for 'Opfysvc, 'OdvoGrje for 'Odvcaevc, 'A^Xta/c 
for'A^^c, &c. {Maittaire, Gr. D., p. 183.) The Latins, in imi- 
tation of these, used Ulysses and Achilles, with some others, as nouns 
of the third declension, making in the vocative Ulysse, Achille, &c, 
with the final e long, because answering to the Greek n. Another Latin 
form v and one of more frequent recurrence in poetry, is that in eus, of 
the second declension ; as, Ufysseus, Achilleus, making in the genitive 
Ulysse'i, Achille'i, contracted into Ulyssi, Achilli. The vocative of such 
a form will be Ulyssee, Achillee. We may suppose Achille, in Proper- 
tius (4, 11, 40), to be formed from it by apocope, if we retain the com- 
mon reading, " Quique tuas proavus, fregit, Achille, domos." But 
Hevne has given the true lection: ".Qui tumidas proavo fregit Achille 
domos," which makes Achille the ablative, with the final vowel short, as 
a matter of course. {Heyne ad Mn., 6, 840.) 



70 



FINAL SYLLABLES. 



Exc. 2. E final is long in the contracted nominative and 
accusative plural of the third declension, in words 
transplanted from the Greek; as, ccte, mele, pelage, 
tempe, &c, the plural vowel in such words answering 
to the Greek eta, or long e. 1 

Sil. Ital. Dum cete ponto innabunt, dum sidera ccelo. 

Lucret. At Muscsa mele per chordas organici qua. 

Id. At pelage multa, et late substrata videmus. 

Catull. Tempe qua silvce cingunt super impendentes. 

Exc. 3. Verbs of the second conjugation have e final 
long in the second person singular of the imperative 
active ; as, gaude, salve, vale, &c. But cave has the 
last syllable either long or short. 2 

Propert. Gaude, quod nulla est ceque formosa, doleres. 

Virg. Salve magna parens frugum, Saturnia tellus. 

Id. Cat. Vale, Sabine, jam valete formosi. (Scazon.) 

Horat. Cave, cave ! namque in malos asperrimus. (Iambic.) 
Id. Tu cave ne minuas, tu ne majus facias id. 

Ovid. Neu cave defendas, quamvis mordebere dictis. 

Exc. 4. Adverbs in e, formed from adjectives in us, have 
the final e long; as, placide, probe, late, longe, . &c, ex- 
cept bene, male, inferne, and superne. 

1. Thus, KrjTea, contracted Krjrrj ; fiiXea, fie%rj ; TteXayea, irtkayn , 
Tefijrea, rifLTrrj, &c. 

2. The second person singular of the present imperative active, in 
Terbs of the second conjugation, is, like the corresponding tense in verbs 
of the first, a contracted form. Thus, gaudee, gaude ; salvee^ salve ; 
valee, vale, &c. — The double quantity in cave or cave arises from the 
following circumstance, that anciently two forms of the verb were in use, 
one belonging to the second, and the other to the third conjugation ; just 
as we find both ferveo and fervo ; fulgeo and fulgo ; oleo and olo, &c. 
(Struve, uber die hat. Deci, &c, p. 189. — Voss., de Art. Gramm., 2, 
25.) — Besides cave or cave, we find it frequently asserted that vale, vide, 
responde, and salve have the last syllable common ; but it will be dis- 
covered, on examination, that there is little, if any, evidence to prove 
this. The question will be found discussed in Ramsay's Latin Pros- 
ody, p. 44, seqq. 



FINAL SYLLABLES. 



71 



Mart. Excipe sollicitos placide, mea donj, libellos. 

Catull. Suffenus iste, Vare, quern probe nosti, (Scazon.) 

Virg. Directceqtw acies, et late jiuctuat omnis. 

Juv. JEquora transiliet, sed longe Calpe relicta. 

Virg. Si bene quid de te merui,fuit aut tibi quidquam. 
Id. Insequitur, cumulosque ruit male pinguis arena. 
Lucret. Ne tibi sit fraudi quod nos inferne videmus. 
Id. Remorum recta est, et recta superne gubema. 

But adjectives neuter of the third declension, used as ad- 
verbs, retain the final e short ; as, sublime, suave, dirice, 
facile, Sic. 

Virg. Cantantes sublime ferent ad sidera cycni. 
Id. Ipse sed in pratis aries,jarn suave rubenti. 

Exc. 5. The adverbs ferme, fere, and one have the final 
vowel long. Fere, however, has the last short in the 
later writers. 

Juv. Rarus enim ferme sensus communis in ilia. 

Hoi at. Vina fere dulces oluerunt mane Camoznce. 

Id. Importunus amat laudari donee one jam. 

Auson. Nam tecum fere totus ero quocumque recedam, 

Exc. 6. Monosyllables in e are also long ; as, de, me, te, 
se, and ne (lest or not) ; except the enclitics que, ve, 
ne, and the syllabic additions pte, ce, te, de ; as, in su* 
apte, nostrapte, hosce, tute, quamde. 1 

Virg. De cozlo tactas memini prcedicere quercus. 

Id. Me me, adsum qui feci ; in me convertite ferrum. 

1. The lengthening of monosyllables which consist of, or terminate in 
a vowel, depends upon an established principle of metrical harmony, since 
they would be nearly lost in the reading if the voice did not dwell upon 
them, and make them necessarily long. In the case of enclitics and syl- 
labic additions, however, the principle does not apply. These are con- 
nected so closely with the preceding word, that they form but one word 
with it in the rapidity of pronunciation, and are no longer considered as 
separate monosyllables. 



72 



FINAL SYLLABLES. 



Virg. Te veniente die, te decedente canebat. 

Id. Ne pueri, ne tanta animis adsuescite bella* 

Id. Arrna virumque cano, Trojce qui primus ab oris* 

Id. Si quis in adversurn rapiat, casusve Deusve. 

Id. Tantane vos generis tenuit fiducia vestri 1 

Enn. O Tite tute Tati tibi tanta tyranne tulisti. 



final i and y. 
Rule. I final is for the most part long ; as, frume?. Ji, 
scribendi, nulli, par tiri, fieri, &c. 

Virg. Paullatim et sulcis frumenti qucBreret herbam. 
Horat. Garrulus, atque piger scribendi f err e labor em. 
Propert. Nulli curafuit externos qu^rere divos. 
Virg. Ne signare quidem aut partiri limite campum. 
Id. Pastor es, mandat fieri sibi talva Daphnis. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc. 1. I final is short in nisi and quasi} 

Virg. Nec veni, nisi fata locum sedemque dedissent. 
Ovid. Quid quasi natali cum poscit munera libo. 



Exc. 2. The final i and y are short in Greek neuters ; 
as, gummi, sinapi, moly ; in the dative singular of Greek 
nouns ; as, Palladi, Thetidi, Phyllidi ; in Greek voca- 
tives ; as, Adoni, Alexi, Tiphy, Tethy, chely (but no* 
in Tethy, the contracted dative for Tethyi) ; and in 
datives and ablatives plural in si ; as, heroisi, Dryasi, 
Troasi. 2 



1. Quasi occurs with the i long in Lucretius (2, 291, and 5, 728), 
and in Avienus (Phccn., 554, 1465, 1567, 1654); but the final vowel 
in all these instances may be considered as made long by the arsis, es- 
pecially since we find quasi twice in Lucretius (4, 10 i 1 , and 6, 972). — 
Nisi also has the final vowel long in the following Phalaecian line from 
Statius (Sylv., 4, 3, 59) : " His parvus, Lcchia nisi vetarent but the 
MSS. here are hopelessly corrupt, and scarcely two editors read the pas- 
sage in the same way. The Bipont edition has " His parvus, Lecheo 
nihil vetante" which is retained in that of Lemaire. 

2. It often happens that in such Greek datives as Thetidi, Paridt, 
Tyndaridi, &c, the final vowel is lengthened by the arsis, since other- 



FINAL SYLLABLES. 



73 



Ovid. Moly vocant superi ; nigra radice tenetur. 

Stat. Palladi litorem celebrabat Scyros honwem. 

Ovid. Semper Ado?ii, mei, repetitaque mortis imago. 

Id. Quid tibi cum patria, navita Tiphy, mea. (Pentam.) 

Id. Troastn invideo, qu<B si lacrymosa suorum. 1 

Exc. 3. In mihi, tibi, sibi, ibi, and ubi, the final i is com- 
mon. 2 

Virg. Non mini si Ungues centum sint, oraque centum. 

Id. Tros Tyriusque mihi nullo discrimine agetur. 

Id. Haud obscura cadens mittet tibi signa Bootes. 

Id. Cuncta tibi Cererem pubes agrestis adoret. 

Id. Jam sibi turn curvis male temperat unda carinis* 

Horat. Quanto quisque sibi plura negaverit. (Choriambic.) 

Virg. Aut ibiflava, seres mutato sidere farra. 

Id. Ter conatus ibi collo dare brachia circum. 

Id. Nosque ubi primus equis oriens afflavit anhelis. 

Horat. Instar veris enim vultus ubi tuus. (Choriambic.) 

Obs. 1. The quantity of the final vowel in uti is involved 
in some uncertainty. Most prosodians make it long, a 
quantity which it is always found to possess ; and so, too, 
it is always long in veluti. If, however, any stress is to be 

wise forms like these could not find a place (on account of their containing 
three short syllables in succession) in dactylic verse. Instances of such 
lengthening occur in Catullus (64, 21), Propertius (3, 8, 29, seq.), Va- 
lerius Flaccus (1, 190), Ovid (Heroid., 20, 60), Id. (R. A., 711), &c. 

1. In this example, the n added to Troasi is placed there merely to 
prevent the hiatus at the meeting of the two vowels, and makes no dif- 
ference whatever in the quantity. It is like the v ktyekKvaruiov of the 
Greeks. 

2. These words originally ended in the diphthong ei, as mihei, tibei, 
sibei, ibei, ubei, and under this shape they are frequently found in inscrip- 
tions (compare note 1, page 16) and MSS. ^especially those of Lucre- 
tius. One of the vowels of the diphthong being subsequently dropped, 
they would sometimes appear as mike, tibe, sibe, &c, and sometimes as 
mihi, tibi, sibi, &c. In the former case, the final e being short in Latin 
wards, except under particular circumstances, the last syllable would be 
made short by the poets ; in the latter case, the final i being long in 
Latin words, the syllable would retain its original quantity, as it probably 
always did in prose. (Ramsay's hat. Pros., p. 50.) 

Q 



74 



FINAL SYLLABLES. 



laid upon the fact that the i is always short in sicuti, utu 
nam, and ultque, the final vowel in uti ought rather to be 
regarded as common. 

Obs. 2. In nccubi, sicubi, ubinam, and ubivis, the i of ubi 
is always short ; but if we are to be guided by the quantity 
of the final letter of ubi out of composition, as also by the 
circumstance of the t being long in ubique (" everywhere"), 1 
but common in ubicunque, Ave shall, in ail probability, be 
more correct in making the i of ubi common also in the 
compounds first mentioned. 

Exc. 4. Cui, when a dissyllable, generally has the i 
short. 

Sen. Mittat et donet cwicumque terra. (Sapphic.) 
Mart. Sed norunt cui serviunt leones. (Phalaecian.) 
Id. Drusorum cui contigere barbce. (Ditto.) 
Id. Et credit cm Postumilla dives. (Ditto.) 



Obs. Cui is commonly considered as forming a mono- 
syllable in poetry. Instances, however, occur, in which 
it may be regarded as a dissyllable, even in hexameter 
verse, without any injury to the metre, but with advantage, 
rather, to the smoothness and harmony of the line ; a? in 
the following, among others : 

Juv. Cantabat patriis in montibus : et cui non tunc. 
Virg. At puer Ascanius cui nunc cognomen Iulo. 
Id. Munera vestra cano. Tuque O cui prima ferentem 
Id. Incipe parve puer : cui non riser e par entes. 

FINAL 0. 

Rule. O final is common, though more generally long 
than short. 

Horat. Quando pauperiem, missis ambagibus, korres. 
Mart. Quando morce dulccs, longusquc a Casare pulvis. 
Virg. Praterea dud nec tuta mild valle reperti. 

I. Consult note 5, page 46. 



FINAL SYLLABLES. 



75 



Auson. Europam Asiamque dud vel maxima terrce. 

Mart. Capto tuam, pudet lieu ! sed capto Pontice ccenam. 

Gall. Obruta virgo jacet : servat quoque nomina turris, 

Ovid. Victa jacet pietas ; et virgo ccede madentes. 

Mart. Miscuit, Elysium possidet ambo nemus. (Pentam.) 

Virg. Ambo florentes aetatibus, Arcades ambo. 

Obs. 1. O final in nominatives of the third declension is, 
with very few exceptions, long in the writers of the Augus- 
tan age and their predecessors. In proper names, how- 
ever, o final is common even in the best writers ; as, Car-' 
tliago, Pollio, Scipio, Curio, Vinio. 1 

Obs. 2. O final in verbs is very rarely shortened by wri- 
ters of the Augustan age and their predecessors, except in 
scio, nescio, puto, volo, which are for the most part used 
parenthetically. 2 

EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc. 1. All cases in o of Greek nouns, written in the 
original with an o-mega, or long o, have the final vow- 
el long; as, nominative, Id, Ino, Clio ; genitive, An- 
drogeo ; accusative, Atho, Clothd, &c. 

Propert. Id versa caput primos mugiverat annos. 

Auson. Clio gesta canens transactis tempora reddit. 

Virg. In foribus letum Androgeo : turn pendere poznas 

Pedo. Quondam ego tentavi Clothoque duasque sorores. 

1. It was not until the age of Lucan that the practice of shortening o 
final in nouns of the third declension became general. In the writings 
of this poet we find car do, pulmo, tiro, turbo, &c. ; and in Martial and 
his contemporaries it is perhaps oftener short than long. (Ramsay's 
Lat. Pros., p. 55.) 

2. No example occurs in Lucretius, Virgil, or in the Odes of Horace, 
of the final o in a verb being left short, except in scio and nescio, which, 
as well as puto, volo, rogo, credo, do not form real exceptions, for theso 
words were either used parenthetically, or in colloquial formulas enun- 
ciated rapidly. — The shortening of the final o in verbs is very rare in 
Catullus, in Tibullus, in Propertius, and in Ovid ; it gradually becomes 
more common in the writers who follow them, and when we come dowii 
to the age of Statius and Martial it is to be found on every page. (Ram* 
say's Lat. Pros., p. 56. — Lennep ad Ov., Ep., 15, 32.) 



76 



FINAL SYLLABLES. 



Exc. 2. Monosyllables in o are long ; as, O, do, std,pro 9 

&C. 1 

Virg. O decus, o famce merito pars maxima nostra. 
Id. Do quod vis ; et me victusque volcnsque rcmitto. 
Id. Pro rnolli viola, pro purpureo narcisso. 

Exc. 3. O final is long in the dative and ablative singu- 
lar of the second declension ; as, vird, vento, aurd, sic- 
co, <fec. 2 

Yirg. Cui se pulchra vird dignetur jungere Dido, 
Ovid. Nutritur vento, vento restinguitur ignis. 
Propert. Aurd pulsa fides, ouro venalia jura. 
Virg. In sicco ludunt fulicce ; notasque paludes. 

Exc. 4. O final in the gerund is perhaps never found 
short, except in writers subsequent to the Augustan 
age. 3 

Virg. Frigidus in pratis cantando rumpitur anguis. 
Ovid. Et voluisse mori, et moriendo ponere sensus. 
Juv. Plurimus hie ceger moritur vigilandd, sed ilium. 
Auson. Qua nosti meditandd velis inolescere menti. 



Exc. 5. Adverbs formed from adjectives have the final o 
for the most part long ; as, multd, raro, crebrd, consul- 
to, &c. 4 

1. Compare note 1, page 71. 

2. The final vowel in the dative and ablative singular of the second 
declension is the result of contraction, and therefore long. The primi- 
tive termination was ox. (Struve, uber Declin., &c, p. 14.) 

3. Two passages oppose this doctrine, which, however, is generally 
recognised by scholars. One is from Tibullus (3, 6, 3) : " Aufer et 
ipse meum pariter medicando dolorem" where Heyne reads medicande, 
from Broukhusius. Dissen also gives this same lection. On the whole 
question respecting the shortening of the final syllable in gerunds, consujt 
Heyne ad Ttbull., t. c. — Broukkus. ad TibulL, I. c. — Heins.ad Ov , Ep. } 
9, 125. — Burmann ad Anthol. Lat., vol.1, p. 298. — Perizon. ad Sanct. 
Mm., vol. 1, p. 148, ed. Bauer. — Ramsay's Lat. Pros., p. 57. 

4. These, in fact, retain the quantity of the dative singular, from which 
they are formed. 



FINAL SYLLABLES. 



77 



Juv. Pozna autem vehemens, et multc savior Mis. 
Ovid. Adde quod iste tuus, tarn rard pralia passus. 
Horat. Est mihi purgatam crebro qui personet aurem. 
Id. Extenuantis eas consultd ; ridiculum acri. 



Exc. 6. O final is never, perhaps, found short in ergo, 
ideo, immo, porro, postremo, sero, vera, except in writers 
subsequent to the Augustan age. 1 
Virg. Ergo non hiemes Mam, non jlabra neque imbres. 
Horat. Ergo Quintilium perpetuus sopor. (Choriambic.) 
Propert. Ergo velocem potuit domuisse puellam. 
Ovid. Ergo dum Stygio sub terris gurgite labor. 
Lucan. Ergo pari voto gessisti bella juventus. 
Juv. Impune ergo mihi recitaverit Me togatas. 
Mart. Sed tamen esse tuus dicitur, ergo potest. (Pentam.) 
Horat. Ac ne me foliis ided brevioribus ornes. 
Mart. An ided tantum veneras ut exires ? (Scazon.) 
Catull. Frustra 1 immo magno cumpretio atque malo. (Pent.) 
Mart. Adeo bene emit 1 inquis : immo non solvit. (Scazon.) 
Id. Vendere, nil debet, foznerat immo magis. (Pent.) 

Catull. Sed dicam vobis, vos porro dicite multis. 

1. Some of the ancient grammarians, and almost all the modern ones, 
make ergo, when it signifies " on account of" have the final syllable 
long, and short when it means " therefore." The distinction does not 
appear to be a correct one, for the two meanings are in fact the same, 
and the word in either case is merely spyu, the dative of epyov. The 
line quoted by Dr. Carey, from the Ciris, to prove that ergo, " therefore," 
occurs in good writers with the final syllable short, cannot be received 
as authority, since the Ciris, which few suppose to have been the work 
of Virgil, is notorious for its corrupt text. The line is as follows : " Ergo 
metu capiti Scylla est inimica paterno" (v. 386). Barth reads " Ergo 
turn capiti" and Heinsius " Ergo iterum capiti" which latter emenda- 
tion is adopted by Heyne. The passage sometimes cited from Proper- 
tius (3. 7, 1), " Ergdne sollicitce tu causa, pecunia, vitce es" is given in 
the best MSS. and editions as follows: " Etgo sollicitce, tu causa, pecu- 
nia, vitce es." One instance, however, occurs in Ovid (Her., 5, 59), 
where ergo has the o short, according to the received reading. It is as 
follows: " Votis ergo meis alii rediture redisti." It is very probable, 
however, tha*. some error lurks here in the text, since Ovid everywhere 
else makes tne final syllable of ergo long. (Heins. ad Ov., Trist., 1, 1, 
87. — Ramsay's hat. Pros., p. 58.) 

G 2 



78 



FINAL SYLLABLES. 



Multos porrd vidcs, quos scepe elusus, ad ipsnm. 
Et Scauros et Fabricios postremd severos. 
Heu serd revocatur amor serdque juventus. 
H(bc animo ante tubas. Galealum serd duelli. 
Serd dedit pcenas. Discerpi noxia mater. 
Hie verd victus genitor se tollit ad auras. 
Tu potior, Thebanc, queri, nos vero vohntes* 

Exc. 7. O final is always short in the following words 
in good writers : citd, ego, 1 modd the adverb, and its 
compounds dummodo, postmodd, quomodd, tantummodd, 
together with the numeral octo. 

Horat. Quicquid prcecipies esto brevis, ut cito dicta. 

Ovid. Nec citd credideris, quantum citd credere Icedat. 

Virg. ScBpe ego, quum flavis messorem inducer et arvis. 

Lucret. Non modo non omnem possit durare per cevom. 

Virg. Hie inter densas corulos modd namque gemellos. 

1. Ego is said to have the final o common. " The fact, however, is," 
observes Ramsay, " that there are many hundred instances, in writers of all 
ages, in which ego is found with the last short, and three or four at most, 
in decent metrical authorities, where it is found long ; but even here, in ev- 
ery case, if I mistake not, under suspicious circumstances. — It may serve 
to set at rest the question with regard to the final o in ego and modo (the 
adverb), if I state that I have marked 532 examples of ego with the o 
short in Ovid alone, 91 in Propertius, 90 in Horace, 64 or 65 in Virgil, 
53 in Tibullus, 27 in Catullus, and five in Lucretius, in all 862 ; while 
in the same authors I have been unable to find more than two with the 
long o ; one of these (Catull., 19, 1) is from a poem which, though often 
placed among the works of Catullus, is found in no MS. of that author, 
and is now left out by the best editors ; the other from Ovid (Her., 13, 
135), in a line where the MSS. afford half a dozen different readings. I 
am aware that other examples are to be found in old editions, but these 
have all disappeared upon a careful examination of the MSS. ; as, for 
example, Property 1, 8, 31 ; 4, 2, 3, &c. Such being the evidence, I 
feel justified in reversing the judgment pronounced by Broukhusius (ad, 
Properl., I. c), Drakenborch (ad Sil. Ital, 17, 357), and Ruperti (ad 
Sii, I. c.) in favour of the o final in ego being common, and in laying 
down the rule as I have givtm it. — With regard to modd (the adverb), I 
have marked 363 examples in Ovid, 48 in Propertius, 22 in Horace, 13 
in Virgil, six in Catullus, two in Lucretius ; in all of these (454) the 
final o is short, against which there is one in Lucretius where it is length- 
ened by the arsis. The same holds good of its compounds, with tho 
single exception of quom id in Catullus (10, 7)." (Ramsay's Lat. Pros. % 
p. 60, seq.) 



Juv. 
Id. 

'Tib jll 
Juv, 
Mart. 
Virg. 
Stat. 



FINAL SYLLABLES. 



79 



Horat. Herculis ritu modd dictus O plebs. (Sapphic.) 

Ovid. Nam modd, vos animo, dulces reminiscor amid. 

Lucret. Dummodo ne totum Corrumpas luminis orbem. 

Horat. Foznum habet in cornu, longe fage ; dummodo risum. 

Id. Postmodo, quod mi obsit, dare certumque locuto. 

Tibull. Postmodo qua votis irrita facta velit. (Pentam.) 

Horat. Cum victore sequor. M&cenas quomodo tecum. 

Id. Proximus esse. Veils tantummodd, qua tua virtus. 

Manil. Sed regione Nepa vix partes odd trahentis. 

Juv. Sic crescit numerus, sic fiunt octd mariti. 

Mart. Vix octd nummis annulum unde coznaret. (Scazon.) 



FINAL U. 

Rule. U final is long ; as, cornu, metu, partu, Panthu, 
vitatu, diu. 1 

Horat. Cornu decorum, leniter atterens. (Alcaic.) 

Virg. Parce metu Cytherea, manent immota tuorum. 

Id. Eumenidesque satce ; turn partu terra nefando. 

Id. Quo res summa loco, Panthu, quam prendimus arc em ? 

Horat. Aiebat sapiens vitatu, quidque petitu. 

Virg. Phozbe diu, res siqua diu mortalibus ulla est. 



EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc. 1. Indu, the old form of in, and nenu for non, both 
Lucre tian words, have the u short. 2 



1. Final u in the dative and ablative singular of the fourth declension 
is the result of contraction from ui, and therefore long. (Struve, ubcr 
Declin., &c, p. 36. — Burmann ad Property p. 119.) Hence metu is 
for metui, and partu for partui, or, rather, partue. — Some of the old 
grammarians maintained that neuter nouns in u had the final vowel short 
in the nominative, accusative, and vocative singular, but long in the 
other cases. This doctrine, however, is condemned by Priscian (vol. 1, 
p. 351, ed. Krehl). — The u in Panthu represents the diphthong ov in 
the original Greek word. — Diu is an old ablative from dius, as is evident 
from the common phrase diu noctuque. (Ramsay's Lat. Pros., p. 62.) 

2. Indu appears to have come from the yEolic Ivdov for evdov. Nenu 
is said to have been the parent of the Latin non. According to Wake- 
field, the more correct orthography for indu is endu when it stands 
singly, and indu when compounded. (Wakef. ad Lucret., L, 83, et 2, 
1095.) His authority, however, is of no great weight, especially as the 



60 



FINAL SYLLABLES. 



Lucret. Nec jacere indu manus, via qua munita Jidei. 
Id. Nenu queunt rapidei contra constare leones. 

T 

Exc. 2. The u continues short in those words whicn. 
naturally end in short us, and are only deprived of the 
s by the more ancient mode of pronunciation, in order 
to preserve the syllable from becoming long by its po- 
sition before a consonant at the beginning of the follow- 
ing word ; as, plenxC for plenus, bonu for bonus, &c. ] 
Ennius. Ille vir hand magna cum re, sed plenu* jidei. 
Id. Suavis homo, facundu*, suo contentu\ beatus. 

FINAL y. 

Rule. Y final is short ; as, moly, chely, Coty, Tiphy. 2 
Ovid. Moly vocant superi ; nigra radice tenetur. 
Stat. Cedamus chely, jam repone cantus. (Phalaecian.) 
Ovid. O Coty, progenies digna parente tuo. (Pentam.) 
Id. Ars iua, Tiphy, jacet si non sit in cequore jluctus. 

final b, d, t. 

Rule. Final syllables ending in b or d are short, as also 
those ending in t pure, that is, t immediately preceded by 
a vowel; as, db, ad, quid, illttd, et, at, amat. 
Ovid. Ipse docet quid ogam. Fas est et ab hoste docerL 
Virg. Dixit : at ilia fur ens, acrique incensa dolor e, 
Tibull. Luce sacra requiescat humus, requiescat arator. 



EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc. 1. But if t be preceded by another consonant, or 
the I or d by a diphthong, the syllable must of course 
remain long ; as, ast, amant, out, haud> 

Ovid. Ast ubi blanditiis, agitur nihil horridus ira. 

/Eolic change of e into i is well known. {Mailt., Dial., p. 208, ed. 

Siurz.) 

1. Consult remarks under "Ecthlipsis." 

2. The final y answers to the short final v in Greek. This rule is in 
part, repeated from page 72. 



FINAL SYLLABLES. 



81 



Virg. Aut onera accipiunt venientum, au, agmine facto. 
Id. Hdud obscura cadens mittet tibi signa Bootes, 

Exc. 2. Those third persons singular of the perfect tense, 
active voice, which contract ivit or ut into it, or avit 
into at, have the final syllable necessarily long ; as, 
petit fox petiit or petivit ; obit for obiit or obivit ; irritat 
for irritavit ; disturbdt for disturbavit. 
Ovid. Flamma petit altum, propior locus aera cepit, 
Juv. Magnus civis obit et formidatus Othoni. 
Lucr. Irritat animi virtutem, ecf ringer e ut arcia 
Id. Disturbdt urbes, et terras, motus abortus. 

FINAL C, 

Rule. C final has the preceding vowel long; as, ilttc, 
jlluc, dc, sic, hue, the adverb Be, the ablative hoc. 
Virg. Illic, officiant l&tis ne frugibus herba. 
Catull. Ionios jluctus postquam illuc Arrius isset 
Horat. Si sapiat vitet simul ac adoleverit cetas. 
Virg. Sic oculos, sic ille manus, sic or a fercbat, 
Catull. Hue, hue adventate ; meas audite querelas. 
Virg. Classibus hie locus, hie acies certare solebant. 
Ovid. Aut hoc, aut simili carmine notus eris. (Pentam.) 

EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc. 1. Nec, donee, 1 and the imperative fac 2 are short. 

Ovid. Parve, nec invideo, sine me liber ibis in urbem, 

h Donee is merely an abbreviation of domcum, a word of frequent oc- 
currence in Plautus, and itself evidently an adjective of the neuter gen- 
der. 

2. Vossius says that fac is always long, and cites the following lines 
in support of his opinion : 

Hos fac Armenios, Jicbc est Danaeia Per sis. (Ov., A. A., 1, 225.) 
Durius incedit, fac ambulet, omne papilla. (Id., R. A., 337.) 

Heinsius, however, upon unexceptionable MS. authority, restored in tho 
first Hos facito for Hos fac, and in the second fac inanbulet for fac am- 
bulet. — In almost all cases where fac is followed by a vowel, the MSS 
vaiy between fac and face. (Ramsay^s Lat. Pros., p. 33.) 



82 



FINAL SYLLABLES. 



Ovid. Donee eris fclix multos numerabis amicos. 
Lucret. Non possunt ; far, enim minimis e partibus esse. 
Mart. Signa rarius, aut semel fac Mud. (Phalaecian.) 

Exc. 2. Hie the pronoun is common, but much more 
frequently long than short. 

Virg. Solus hie infiexit sensus animumque labantem. 

Id. Hie vir hie est, tibi quern promitti s&pius audis. 

Id. H(£c finis Priami fatorum, hie exitus ilium. 

Ovid. Atque ait, Hie, hie est, quern ferus urit amor. (Pent.) 

Exc. 3. The neuter hoc is also common, but no example 
can be quoted, except from the comic writers, in which 
it is found short. 1 

Ovid. Dicendum tamen est, hoc est, mihi crede, quod cegra. 
Id. Hoc oleics et vates, hoc et mea carmina dicunt. 
Plaut. Heus ! ecquis hie est ? ecquis hoc aperit ostium ? 
(Iambic.) 

Id. Quid hoc hie clamoris audio ante aides meas ? (Iambic.) 
final I. 

Rule. L final has the preceding vowel short ; as, Han- 
nibal? semel, nihil, procul. 

1. The facts respecting the usage of the poets in the case of hie and 
hoc are given in the text. The opinions expressed by the old gramma- 
rians respecting the quantity of these words differ widely from each other. 
Velius Longus and Priscian seem to think that hie and hoc are both nat- 
urally short, and that in all passages where they are found long they 
ought to be written hicc, hocc, and regarded as abbreviations of hicce, 
hocce. Terentianus Maurus, Marius Victorinus, Probus, Charisius, and 
Martianus Capella, on the other hand, assert, that in these words c has 
the same force in pronunciation as a double consonant ; that, conse- 
quently, hie and hoc ought always to be long, and that Virgil was guilty 
of an inaccuracy in changing the pronunciation and quantity of hie in the 
two passages from the iEneid cited in the text. Vossius says that hoc 
is short in the nominative and vocative ; but he is unable to bring any 
better authority than that of two anonymous poets in the collections. 
(Priscian, vol. 1, p. 564, cd. Krehl. — Velius Longus, p. 2219, ed. Putsch. 
— Marius Victorinus, p. 2471. — Probus, p. 1390. — Charis., p. 4, seq. — 
Terent. Maur., v. 1657. — Mart. CapelL, lib. 3. — Voss., Art. Gramm., 
2, 29. — ClassicalJournal, vol. 9, p. 339. — Ramsay's hat. Pros., p. 35.) 

2. Consult note 1, page 51> where it would appear probable th»t the 



FINAL SYLLABLES. 



83 



Juv. Hannibal) et stantes Collina turre mariti. 
Virg. Quum sernel haserunt arms aurasque tulerunL 
Virg. Versando terram experti, nihil improbus ansef. 
Id. Arboris acclinis trunco, procul area ramis. 



EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc. 1. Sal, 1 sol, 2 and nil contracted from nihil, are long. 
Stat. Non sal, oxyporumve, caseusve. (Phaleecian.) 
Auson. Sal oleum panis, mel, piper, herba, novem. (Pent.) 
Ovid. Ulterius spatium medio sol altus habebat. 
Claud. Nil opis externa cupiens, nil indiga laudis. 

Exc. 2. Hebrew names ending in I have the final sylla- 
ble generally long ; as, Daniel, Raphael, Ismael. 3 
Tert. Quum magnus Daniel, qualis vir, quanta potestas ! 
Fortun. Qualiter aut Raphael occur sum impendent alma, 
Victor. Nec tamen Ismael, Agar de semine natus. 

earlier quantity of Hannibal, and other similar Carthaginian names, was 
Hannibal. 

1. There is great doubt whether sal ought to be regarded as an ex- 
ception to this rule. It appears to be nothing more than an abbreviation 
of the old nominative sale, still extant in a line of Ennius preserved by 
Aulus Gellius (2, 26) : " Cozruleum spumat sale conferta rate pulsum." 
Dr. Carey, therefore, thinks that it was in reality short, and that Statius 
and Ausonius made it long merely by poetic license. The apocope could 
never of itself lengthen sal from sale, since even those nouns in al, which 
had the a long in ale before the apocope took place, thence became short ; 
as, cervical, tribunal, vectigdl. 

2. Cicero's derivation of sol from solus would supply us with a suffi- 
cient reason for the long o in the former, if the etymology were really 
worth anything. His remark is as follows : " Cum sol dictus sit, vel 
quia solus ex omnibus sideribus est tantus, vel quia, cum est exortus, 
obscuratis omnibus solus apparet" (N. D., 2, 27). So also Boethius 
( Cons. Phil , 5, metr. 2) : 

" Quern, quia respicit omnia solus, 
Verum possis dicer e solem." 

The Latin sol is rather to be traced to sauil, one of the three Gothic 
forms for " sun," and both sol and sauil are related to the Sanscrit 
ria. (Grimm, Deutsch. Gramm., vol. 1, p. 611. — Pott, Etymol. Forsch., 
vol. 1, p. 130.) 

3. The Hebrew words have in the last syllable, in the original tongue^ 
the long vowel tseri. 



84 



FINAL SYLLABLES. 



FINAL m. 

Rule. When a word ends in and is immediately fol- 
lowed by a word beginning with a vowel or h, the poets of the 
Augustan age and their successors generally elide the m by 
a figure termed ecthlipsis, and also cut off the vowel prece- 
ding the m by another figure termed synalozpha : as, monstr' 
horrend? informe for monstrum horrendum informe, &C. 1 
Virg. Monstrum horrendum informe ingens cui lumen ademp- 
tum. 



EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc. 1. The older poets, or those prior to the Augustan 
age, frequently preserved the final m from elision, and 
made the preceding vowel short. 

Ennius. Insignita fere turn millia militum octo. 

Id. Dum quidem unus homo Roma tota superescit. 

Lucil. Pr(Btext<2 ac tunica, Lydorum oprf sordidum omne. 

Lucret. Vomerem atque loceis avertit seminis ictum. 

Id. Nam quod fluvidum est, e levibus atque rotundis. 

Id. Sed dum abest quod avemus, id exsuperare videtur. 

Obs. 1. An instance of m being retained before a vowel 
occurs even in Horace [Sat., 2, 2, 28) : 

Quam laudas, pluma ? cocto num adest honor idem ? 

1. Consult remarks on Ecthlipsis and Synaloepha, among "Figures of 
Prosody." — In strictness, no grammatical figure, such as ecthlipsis (e/o 
Oliijuc, i. e., "a dashing out"), takes place here, but the whole is a mere 
matter of pronunciation. The final m was never fully sounded among the 
Romans, as Priscian expressly remarks : '* M obscurum in cxtremitatc die- 
tionum sonata Quintilian also, who in one part calls m a ''''quasi mu- 
giens littera" (12, 10, 31), observes in another passage, 44 M littera, quo- 
ties ultima est, et vocalem verbi sequentis ita contingit ut in earn transire 
possit, etiamsi scribitur tamen parum exprimitur, ut multum ille, et quan- 
tum erat ; adeo ut pcene cujusdam nova: littera sonum reddat ; neque 
enim eximitur sed obscuratur, et tantum aliqua inter duas vocales velut 
nota est ne ipsa co'eanf' (9, 4, 40). It would appear, therefore, that the 
Romans did not give to such a syllable as om or um a full labial sound f 
with a close compression of the lips, but uttered the m with a slight na- 
sal sound, such as the French give it, for example, in the word /aim, 
and as the Portuguese enunciate it even in Latin words. It would seem 
that even in Hebrew the final mem was not very clearly enunciated ; at 
least, such is the opinion of Gesenius {Heb r . Gramm. Anm., §78, 2 a). 



FINAL SYLLABLES. 



85 



Obs. 2. But the best and purest writers seem in general 
to have retained this practice only in words compounded 
of com (or con) and of circum ; as, comes, comedo, circumago, 
circumeo. 

Ovid. Tu tibi dux comiti ; tu comes ipsa duct. (Pentam.) 
Juv. Luctantur paucce, comedunt coliphia paucce. 
Id. Quo te circumagas 1 quo? prima aut ultima ponas. 
Stat. Circumeunt hilares, et ad alta cubilia ducunt. 



FINAL ft. 

Rule. N final has the preceding vowel for the most part 
long, both in Latin words and in those of Greek origin ; as, 
non, en, ten, splen, Siren, Hymen, Pan, Titan, quin, sin, 

&C. 1 

Virg. De grege non ausim quicquam deponere tecum. 
Id, Dixerit, Hos calamos tibi dant (en accipe) Muses, 
Ser. Et trita illinitur : vel splen apponitur hcedi. 
Catull. Hymen, O Hymencee ! Hymen, ades, O Hymencee ! 
Tibull. Lacte madens illic suberat Pan ilicis umbrce. 
Lucret. Flammiger an Titan ut alentes hauriat undas. 
Ovid. Non potuit mea mens, quin esset grata, teneri. 
Phaedr. Quern si leges, Ice tab or ; sin autem minus. (Iamb.) 



To these add Greek accusatives in an from nominatives' 
in as, 2 and accusatives in en from nominatives in e or es / 
as also all Greek genitives plural in on ; as, JEnean, Tire- 

1. Ramsay gives the rule of n final as making the previous vowel 
short. We have thought it more advisable, however, to retain the old 
form of expression. — In Greek nouns, such as Siren, Hymen, &c, there 
is a long vowel, in the original, in the final syllable. 

2. There is some doubt with regard to the accusative in an from short 
a in the nominative, since some examples occur in which it is made long. 
In all of these, however, the syllable is in the arsis, and we may there- 
foie safely pronounce it to be naturally short. Thus, we have in Ovid 
(Trist., 2, 395), " Qui legis Electrdn et egentem mentis Orestem and 
again {Met., 4, 756), " Protenus Andromcdan, et tanti prcemia facti" 
But then, on the other hand, we have Ori/hyian (Ov., Met., 6, 707); 
Ossan (Propert., 2, I, 19.— Ov., Fast., 1, 307); Iphigenian (Ov., E. P., 
3, 2, 62, &c— Ramsay's Lat. Pros., p. 67). Consult Exc. 4 under 
♦.his r-ule. 

H 



86 



FINAL SYLLABLES. 



sidn, Penelopen, Anchisen, Cimmerian, Chalybon, Metstm* 
orphoseon, Sic. 1 

Virg. Et scevum jtEnean, agnovit Turnus in armis. 
Id. Occurrit ; veterem Anchisen agnoscit amicum. 
Catull. Jupiter ! ut Chalybon omne genus pereat ! (Pentam.) 
Tibull. Cimmerion etiam obscuras accessit ad arces. 



EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc. 1. An, for s an, for sit an, in, tamen, viden\ satin*? are 
short. 

Horat. Quis scit an adjiciant hodierncs crastina summ<e, 
Virg. Mittite ; forsan et hcec olim meminisse juvabit. 
Id. Forsitan et Priami fuerint qua fata requiras. 
Ovid. Ludit in humanis divina potentia rebus. 
Virg. Hie tamen ille urbem Patavi sedesque locavit. 
Tibull. Vota cadunt : viden', ut trepidantibus advolct alis ? 
Terent. Satin' id est ? Nescio, hercle : tantum jussu* sum, 
(Iambic.) 

Exc. 2. Nouns in en, which increase short in mis in the 
genitive case, have the final syllable short in the nom- 
inative ; as, nomen [nominis), jiumen (flumznis), tegmen 
(tegmmis), augmen (augminis). 

Ovid. Nomen Arionium Siculas impleverat urbes. 

Virg. Casperiamque colunt, Forulos, et jiumen Himellce. 

Id. Tegmen habent capiti ; vestigia nuda sinistri. 

1. As the Greek genitive plural ends in uv, the Latin on formed from 
this is of course long. The later Latin poets, however, make errors al- 
most continually in words borrowed from the Greek, which in the latter 
language end in uv. Thus, we have in Prudentius (Peristcph., 2, 505) 
the following iambic dimeter : " Dum dcemon invictum dei," where the 
on in dcemon is erroneously shortened, the Greek form being daljiov. So, 
again, in the same writer (Psychom., 857), the following hexameter oc* 
curs : " Hie chalcedon hebes perfunditur ex hyaeinthi" where chalcedon 
has the final syllable short, although the Greek form is x^wduv. 

2. Videri' is a colloquial form of videsne, and the change of quantity 
is supposed to have resulted from the former being employed as a short 
interrogation. So salvrC for satisne is of very frequent occurrence in tho 
romic writers. (Ramsay's hat. Prn , p. 67.^ 



FINAL SYLLABLES. 



87 



Exc. 3. The final syllable on is short in the singular 
cases of Greek nouns, which have those cases written 
in the original with an omicron or short o ; as, nom- 
inative, Ilion, Erotion, Pelion ; accusative, Cerberon, 
Menelaon, Rhodon. 

Ovid. Ilion et Tenedos, Simo'isque et Xanthus, et Ide. 

Mart. Pallida nec nigras horrescat Erotion umbras. 

Ovid. Cerberon abstraxit, rabida qui percitus ira. 

Id. Tu fore tarn lentum credis Menelaon in armis ? 

Horat. Laudabunt alii claram Rhodon, aut Mytilenen. 

But Greek accusatives in on, of the Attic dialect, havirg 
an omega or long o, in the original, are long ; as, 
Athon, Androgeon, Peneleon, Demolcdn. 

Exc. 4. Greek accusatives in an, of the feminine gender, 
are also short ; as, Maian, Iphigenian, Orithyian. 1 
Ovid. Maian et Electram Taygetamque Jovi. (Pent.) 
Id. Nescio quam dicunt Iphigenian iter. (Ditto.) 
Id. Orithyian amans fulvis amplectitur alis. 

Exc. 5. Greek accusatives in in and yn are likewise 
short ; as, Thy r sin, Daphnin, Parin, Thetin, Ityn. 
Propert. Thyrsm et attritis Daphnin arundinibus. (Pentam.) 
Ovid. Tantaque nox animi est* Ityn hue arcessite, dixit, 

final r. 

Rule, R final has the preceding vowel for the most part 
short ; as, calcar, audiar, oleaster, iter, glorier, color, robur, 
caditur. 

Ovid. Crescit, et immensum gloria calcar habet. (Pentam.) 
Id. Trans ego tellurem, trans latas audiar undas 
Virg. Infelix super at foliis oleaster amaris. 
Id. Angustum formica terens iter, et bibit ingens. 
Ovid. Fratre magis, dubito, glorier, anne viro. (Pentam.) 



\. Consult note 2, page 85. 



88 



FINAL SYLLABLES. 



Virg. Seu plures color tile vias et cceca relaxat. 
Id. Vomis et infiexi primum grave robur aratri. 
Id. Cceditur et tilia ante jugo levis altaque fagus. 



EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc. 1. Cur is long, and also Nar, far, fur, and ver. 1 
Horat. Multa quidem dixi, cur excusatus abirem. 
Virg. Sulfurea Nar albus aqua, fontesque Velini. 
Ovid. Far erat, et puri lucida mica salts. (Pentam.) 
Mart. Callidus effracta numos fur auferet area. 
Ovid. Et ver auctumno, brumes miscebitur cestas. 



Exc. 2. Greek nouns in er, which in the original end in 
r\p, and which increase in the genitive, have the final 
syllable of the nominative long ; as, aer (drjp, depog), 
(Ether (aldrjp, aiOepog), crater (tcparrjp, Kparrjpog), Sic. 
But pater and mater (rrarrip, narpog ; \L7\T7\p, fi^rpog) 
have the final syllable short. 

Lucret. Inde mare, inde aer, inde (Ether ignifer ipse. 

Ovid. Summus inaurato crater erat asper acantho. 

Virg. Est mihi namque domi pater, est injusta noverca 

Id. Non jam mater alit tellus viresque ministrat 



Obs. Hector, Nestor, and Castor, however, though com- 
ing from "EtiTOp, 'Neoroyp, and Kdarcjp, have the final syl- 
lable short. 

Ovid. Hector erat : turn colla jugo candentia pressos. 
Id. Cum sic Nestor ait, vestro fuit unicus cbvo. 
Horat. Infamis Helena Castor offensus vice. (Iambic.) 



Exc. 3. Iber is long, but Celtiber has the- final syllable 
long in Catullus and short in Martial. 

1. Cur is merely a contraction from qunr, and consequently long. 
(Priscian, vol. I, p. 45, ed. Krehl.) — Fur apparently gets its long quan- 
tity from the Greek (f>6p. — Far, if we may judge from its genitive farris, 
was originally written fdrr, being long by position. — Ver is from the 
Greek rjp (a contraction from eap) with the digamma prefixed. 



FINAL SYLLABLES. 



89 



Lircan. Si tibi durus Iber, aut si tibi terga dedisset. 
Catull. Nunc Celtiber es : Celtiberia in terra. (Scazon.) 
Mart. Ducit ad auriferas quod me Salo Celtiber oras. 

Obs. 1. Par and lar are usually accounted long ; and so, 
indeed, they are found, the former very frequently, the lat- 
ter in one instance in Ovid (Fast., 5, 141) ; but it would 
sf em more consistent with accuracy to call them common. 1 

Obs. 2. The quantity of cor has also been made a matter 
of dispute. The best opinion, however, is in favour of its 
being accounted short. 2 

FINAL as. 

Rule. Final as is long ; as, terras, tempestas, tractds, 
veniebas. 3 

Virg. Turbabat cozlo, nunc terras ordine longo. 
Id. Forte sua Libycis tempestas appulit oris. 
Horat. Tractds et incedis per ignes. (Iambic.) 
Ovid. Dure quid ad miseros veniebas exulis annos. 

1. The reasons that have been assigned in support of this latter opin- 
ion are as follows: 1. Par and lar increase short; and all other nouns 
in ar, which have a short increment, have the final syllable short. — 2. 
Even those which from are (with the a long) are reduced by apocope to 
ar, have the ar short ; as, calcdr, pulvindr, torculdr. — 3. Valerius Pro- 
bus says, 44 Nominativus singularis, R liter a finitus, omni genere . . . . 
brevem habet." (Putsch, Gram, hat., col. 1393); and Servius (ad 
Mn., 3, 91) remarks, " Omnia monosyllaba ad artem non pertinent." — ■ 
4. The compounds of par are found short in Prudentius (In Symm., 8, 
5), Avienus (Fab., 23, 8), and Martianus Capella (6, 55), whose author- 
ity (though not sufficient to outweigh that of earlier writers) may be al- 
lowed to have some weight in a doubtful or probable case, when sup- 
ported by reason and analogy. (Carey 1 's Lai. Pros., p. 140, 3d ed.) 

2. It is shortened, for example, by Cicero (Tusc. Quasi., 3, 26), by 
Ovid (Trist., 5, S.—Ep. ex Pont., 1, 3, 32.—- Met., 5, 384), by Mar- 
tial (10, 15), and by Paulinus (de Cels. Ob., 379). In opposition to all 
these authorities, the following line has been cited from Ovid (Her., 15, 
79) : 44 Molle meum levibus cor est violabile telis." Burmann, however, 
conjectures, 44 Molle mihi levibusque cor est violabile telis and a Frank- 
fort MS. has "Molle meum levibusque," &c. 

3. In terras, and other accusatives plural of the first declension, as is 
long because contracted from aes. — In nominatives like tempestas, it is 
long because the old form was tempestdts. — In tractas and the like, it is 
long because contracted from a'is. 

H 2 



90 



FINAL SYLLABLES. 



EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc. 1. Anas, " a duck," has the final syllable short. 
Petron. Et pictus anas enoiata pennis. (Phalaecian.) 1 

Exc. 2. Final as is short in the nominative of Greek noun s 
which form their genitive singular in dos (or in the Latin 
dis) ; as, Areas, genitive Arcados or Ar cadis ; Pallas, 
genitive Pallados or Palladis. 

Mart. Cum quibus Alcides, et pius Areas erat. (Pentam.) 

Ovid. Bellica Pallas adest, et protegit agide fratrem. 

Obs. But Pallas, genitive Pallantis, Calchas, genitive 
Calchantis, and the like, follow the general rule, and have 
ss long. 

Virg. Tela manusque sinit : Mine Pallas ins tat et urget. 
Ovid. Quam postquam reddit Calchas ope tutus Achillis. 

Exc. 3. Final as is also short in Greek accusatives plural 
of the third declension ; as, heroas, lampadas, delphinas. 
Virg. Permistos heroas, et ipse videbitur illis. 
Tibull. Accendit geminas lampadas acer Amor. (Pent.) 
Virg. Orpheus in sylvis, inter delphinas Arion. 

final es. 

Rule. Final es is long; as, spes, nodes, vides, pones. 2 
Ovid. Una tamen spes est, qua me soletur in istis. 

1. This line occurs in Petronius Arbiter (c. 93, 4), but B\irmann con- 
jectures avis for anas. 

2. Ennius furnishes one instance of the Latin plural es being short, in 
the following line : " VirginV nam sibi quisque domi Romanus habet sas" 
(Enn., Fragm., p. 32, ed. Column.). Cicero is said to give another in 
a fragment of his poetical version of Aratus (v. 472) : " Obruitur Pro- 
cyon ; cmergunt allies una but Ernesti reads, "Obruitur Procyon; 
emergunt alile lapsu," &c. The common text of Ovid (Her., 10, 86) 
also contains a reading which exhibits es in the accusative plural short : 
" Quis scit an hece sczvas insula tigres habet.' 1 Burmann, however, 
gives the line as follows : " Quis scit, an hcec scBvas tigridas insula ha- 
bet V 1 and observes, " Duo sunt qua: in hoc vcrsu offendunl. Primo, 
quod Latine haud dicilur, Quis scit an habet, scd an habeat. Deinde 
quod posterior em in tigres corripit." (Burmann ad Ov., I. c.) 



FINAL SYLLABLES. 



91 



Virg. Nodes atque dies pat et atri janua Ditis. 

Proper* Hoc quodcunque vides, hospes, quam maxima Roma. 

Horat. Pones iambis sive jiamma. (Iambic.) 



EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc. 1 . Nouns in es of the third declension, which in- 
crease short in the genitive, have es in the nominative 
short ; as, hospes, ccespes, ales, miles, prcepes, &c. (in 
the genitive hospitis, ccespitis, aUtis, miUtis, prapetis). 

Ovid. Vivitur ex rapto : non hospes ab hospite tutus. 

Rutil. Exiguus regum rector es cmspes habebat. 

Virg. Namque volans rubra fulvus Jovis ales in cethra. 

Id. Myrmidonum Dolopumve aut duri miles Ulixi. 

Id. Acer, anhelanti similis, quern prcepes ab Ida. 

Obs. But aries, abies, paries, and Ceres, as also pes, with 
its compounds, follow the general rule. 
Virg. Creditur : ipse aries etiam nunc vellera siccat. 
Id. Populus injluviis, abies in montibus altis. 
Horat. Votiva paries indicat uvida. (Choriambic.) 
Virg. Flava Ceres alto nequidquam spectat Olympo 
ManiL Desuper Auriga dexter pes imminet astro. 
Horat. Omnia magna loquens : modo sit mihi mensa tripes et. 
Virg. Stat sonipes, ac frena ferox spumantia mandit. 
Id. Toll it se ar rectum quadrupes, et calcibus auras. 

Exc. 2. Es, in the present tense of the verb sum, is 
short, together with its compounds potes, abes, ades, 
obes, prodes, &C. 1 ' 

1. In many passages of Plautus, an enumeration of most of which 
may be found in Wasse (cap. 16, p. 226, seqq.), es from sum occurs 
with a long quantity. These passages are too numerous to permit our 
supposing the syllable lengthened by a mere license, or by the force of 
the arsis, and it is therefore probable that, in the time of Plautus, es 
from sum., corresponding as it did to the Greek elg, was actually long, 
and was only shortened at a subsequent period. Si'ch, at least, is the 
opinion of Schneider (Gr. Lat, vol. 2, p. 757.) — According to Vossius, 
es, " thou eatest," tb t second person of edo, is long, being contracted, 



92 

Virg 
Id. 
Id. 

Exc. 3. The preposition penes has the final syllable short. 
Horat. Quern penes arbitrium est, et jus, et norma loqucndi, 
Ovid. Me penes est unum vasti custodia mundi. 

Exc. 4. Es is likewise short in Greek neuters ; as, ca- 
co'ethes, hippomenes, &c. ; and in Greek nominatives 
and vocatives plural of the third declension, from nouns 
which increase in the genitive singular, but which do 
not form that case in eos ; as, Tr it ones, Arcades, Tro- 
es, Amazones, Troades, (fee. 1 

Juv. Scribendi cacoethes, et cegro in corde senescit 

Stat. Armigcri Tritones eunt, scopulosaque cete. 

Virg. Ambo jlorentes (Btatibus, Arcades ambo. 

Id. Pulsant, et pictis bellantur Amazones armis. 

Obs. 1. But nominatives and vocatives plural in es, from 
Greek nominatives forming the genitive singular in eos, are 
long ; as, hcereses, crises, phrases, metamorphoses, 2 &c. 

Obs. 2. Where the Latin es represents the Greek r\q, it 
is of course long ; as in Alcides, Brontes, Palamedes, from 
'AktceCdrjg, Bpovrrjg, UaXafirjdrjg. 

FINAL is AND ys. 

Rule. Final* is and ys are short ; as, dulcis, lapis, bis, 

amabis, bibis, Thetis, Tethys, Itys, Capys. 3 

Horat. Dulcis inexpertis cultura potentis amici. 

Tibull. Fac lapis his scriptus stet super ossa notis. (Pent.) 

probably, from cdis. (Voss., de Art. Gramm., 2, 31.) Carey opposes 
this, but on weak grounds. 

1. Es here answers to the Greek ec, and is short, as a matter of course. 

2. Because es here answers to the Greek eie. 

3. Final ys corresponds to the Greek vg, which is for the most part 
short. 



FINAL SYLLABLES. 

Quisquis es, amissos hinc jam obliviscere Graios 
Tu potes unanimos armare in pralia fratres. 
Tuque ades inceptumque una decurre laborem. 



FINAL SYLLABLES. 



93 



Lucan. Ante bis exact um quam Cynthia conderet orbem. 
Mart. Et bibis immundam, cum cane, promts aquam. (Pent.) 
Ovid. Tethys et extremo scepe recepta loco est. (Pentam.) 
Virg. At Capys, et quorum melior sententia menti. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc. 1. All plural cases ending in is have that syllable 
long ; as, Musis, terns, nobis, vobis, Hits, amaris. 1 

Mart. Carmina quod scribis, Musis et Apolline nullo. 
Lucret. Secernunt, cozlumque a terns omne retentant. 
Id. Nobis est ratio, solis lunceque meatus. 
Ovid. Abstulit omne Phaon quod vobis ante placebat. 
Virg. Pinguia concipiunt, sive illls omne per ignem. 
Id. Strymoni(£que grues, et amaris intuba Jibris. 

Exc. 2. Final is is long in the second person singular of 
verbs of the fourth conjugation ; as, sentis, fastidls, au- 
dls ; to which add/zs, from fio? 

Horat. Sentis, ac veluti stet volucris dies. (Choriambic.) 

Id. Pocula, num esuriens fastidls omnia prater. 

Propert. Non audis? et verba sinis mea ludere, cum jam, 

Horat. Lenior ac melior f is, accedente senecta? 

Exc. 3. Glis, vis whether noun or verb ; veils and sis, 2 
with their compounds, as quamvls, noils, malls 9 adsis 9 
possls* have the final is long. 

!. Plural cases in is were anciently written with the diphthong ei; 
as, Museisj terreis, &c. 

2. The syllable is in verbs of the fourth conjugation is the result of 
contraction, and therefore long. Thus, we have avdiis, contracted au- 
dis ; sentiis, sentis, &c. 

3. Sis is formed by contraction from sies. The old forms siem, sies, 
siet, occur frequently in Plautus. 

4. In Juvenal (5, 10) some read possis with the final syllable short. 
Ruperti, however, condemns this reading, and substitutes possit. So in 
Ovid (Her., 12, 71), nescis is said to occur with the final syllable short, 
but erroneously. It appears neither in the edition of Heinsius nor in 
that of Burmann. The latter merely mentions it in a note, as a reading 
which is in direct violation of the metre- 



94 



FINAL SYLLABLES. 



Mart. H(bc tibi si vis est, si mentis tanta potestas* 

Id. Bellus homo et magnus, vis idem, Cotta, vidert. 

Id. Esse veils oro serus conviva Tonantis. 

Horat. Cum sis, et prave sectum stomacheris ob unguen*. 

Propert. Quamvis ille sua lassus requiescat avena. 

Juv. Et cui per mediam noils occurrere noctem. 

Horat. Magnas Crrcscorum malls implere caiervas. 

Virg. Adsis, O Tegeae, favens ; oleceque Minerva. 

Horat. Non possis oculis quantum contendere Lynceus. 

Exc. 4. The adverbs forls, gratis, and ingratls have the 
final syllable long. 1 
Horat. Ne biberis diluta, forls est promus et atrum. 
Phaedr. Gratis anhelans, multa agendo nil agens. (Iambic.) 
Lucret. Effugere haud potis est, ingratls hceret et angit. 

Exc. 5. Final is is long in those nouns which form their 
genitive singular in entis, Inis, or it is, with the penult 
long ; as, Simois (gen. Simoentis), Salamis (gen. Sal 
amlnis), Samnls (gen. Samnitis), Us (gen. litis). 
Ovid. Hac ibat Simois ; hmc est Sigeia tellus. 
Lucil. Samnls in ludo ac rudibus causis satis asper 

Exc. 6. The final syllable ris, in the second future of 
the indicative and perfect subjunctive, is common ; as, 
amaveris or amaverls. 2 

Exc. 7. Final ys is long in such contracted plurals as 
Erinnys for Erinnyes or Erinnyas. The following 
line of Seneca (CEdip., 644) shows the use of the 

1. Forts is in reality the ablative of fora, u a door," the same as for is 
of the third declension. Grafts and ingratls are contracted datives for 
gratiis and ingraliis, which are found in the open form in the comic 
writers. 

2. Almost all the examples in which it is found long are in the arsis ; 
but there is at least one instance in Horace which cannot be explained 
upon this principle : "Si ture placarts et liorna" (Od., 3, 23, 3). — A. 
numerous list of instances where ris occurs, either with the long or short 
quantity, may be seen in Ramsay^s hat. Pros., p, 77. 



FINAL SYLLABLES. 



95 



word, though it cannot be made any proof of the quan- 
tity : 

Et me cum Erinnys pronubas thalami traham. 

FINAL OS. 

Rule. Final os is long; as, virds, puerds, custos, ventos, 
jactatds. 

Virg. Inter se coi'isse virds , et cernere ferro. 
Propert. Differat inpueros ista tropaza suos. (Pentam.) 
Horat. Custos amatorem trecenta. (Iambic.) 
Yirg. Ventos et variura cceli pr&discere morem. 
Id. His accensa super, jactatds cequore toto. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc. 1. Final os is short in compos, impds, ds (" a bone"), 
and its compound eocos. 

Ovid. Insequere, et voti postmodo compos eris. (Pent.) 
Lucret. Exos et exsanguis tumidos pei'fiuctuat artus. 

Exc. 2. Final os is likewise short in Greek words, writ- 
ten in the original with an omicron or short o ; as, Ili- 
os, Tyros, Samds, Chios, Rhodds, epos. 1 
Ovid. Turn cum tristis erat, dcfensa est Ilids armis. 
Lucan. Et Tyros instabilis,*pretiosaque murice Sidon. 
Horat. Romce laudetur Samds et Chios, et Rkodos absens. 
Id. Facta canit, pede ter percusso, forte epos acer. 

final us. 

Rule. Final us _s short ; as, taurus, tempus, cultus, im- 

probus, solibus, scindimus, intus. 

Virg. Taurus, et adverso cedens Canis occidit astro. 

Id. Tempus humo tegere, et jamdudum incumbere aratris. 

Id. Conveniat, qua cura bourn, qui cultus habendo. 

Id. Improbus, et duris urgens in rebus egestas. 

1. But those words in which the L#tin os represents the Greek 6)f re 
tain their original quantity ; as, herds (ypog), Minds (Mb &* . 



96 



FINAL SYLLABLES. 



Virg. Pulverulenta coquat maturis solibus aistas. 
Id. At prius ignotum ferro quam scindimus aquor 
Id. Intiis aqua dulces, vivoquc sedilia saxo. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc. 1. Monosyllables in us are long ; &s,jus, plus, pus, 
thus. 1 

Pedo. Sed rigidum jus est et inevitabile mortis. 

Mart. Emi hortos ; plus est : ins true tu ; minus est (Pent.) 

Horat. Proscripti Regis Rupili pus atque venenum. 

Id. Angulus ille feret piper et thus ocius uva. 

Exc. 2. Final us is long in nouns which increase with 
long u in the genitive ; as, virtus (gen. virtutis), tellus 
{telluris), servitus (servitutis), palus (paludis). 2 
Horat. Virtus indigno non committenda poetcs. 
Prise. Divitias magnas hie tellus ipsa ministrat. 
Phaedr. Brevi docebo. Servitus obnoxia. (Iambic.) 
Virg. Cocyti, tardaque palus inamabilis unda. 

Exc. 3. Final us is also long in the genitive singular, 
and in the nominative, accusative, and vocative plural, 
of the fourth declension ; as, genitive sing., manus ; 
nom., accus., and voc. plural, manus. But nominative 
and vocative singular, manus. 3 

Pedo. Scilicet immunis si luctus una fuisset. 

Lucret. Sensus ante ipsam geniiam naturam animantis. 

Virg. Saltus et saturi petit o longinqua Tarenti. 

Exc. 4. Final us is also long in words transplanted from 

1. This exception and the one immediately following belong in strict- 
ness to the same head, namely, that of a long increment in the genitive. 

2. Horace (Ep. ad Pis., 65) furnishes a solitary instance of palus 
with the final syllable short. Bentley proposes a different reading. The 
line, however, is retained unaltered in the best editions. — (For some re- 
marks on the verse, consult Horat., cd. Anth., p. 326, not. crit.) 

3. In the genitive singular of the fourth declension the final us is a 
contraction from uis ; and in the nominative, accusative, and vocatiw 
plura\ from ues. Both, therefore, are long, of course. 



FINAL SYLLABLE OF A VERSE. 



97 



the Greek, in which us represents the Greek ovg % 
whatever the case may be; as, Panchus (Jlavdovg), 
Amathus ('Apadovg), Mantus (Mavrovg), Didus (At- 
dovg), &c. 

Virg. Panthus, Othryades, arcis Phwbique sacerdos. 
Id. Est Amathus, est celsa mihi Paphos, atque Cythera. 
Id. Fatidica Mantus et Tusci filius amnis. 
Varro. Didus atque suum misceri sanguine sanguen. 

Oes. 1. Polypus has the final syllable short in Horace 
(Epod., 12, 5), which it gets, not from the common Greek 
form noXvTTOvg, but from the Doric Trookvnog, which will 
account also for the lengthening of the initial syllable. 1 

Obs. 2. The sacred name IESUS (in Greek IH20T2) 
is included in this exception, and has the final syllable 
long. 

SECTION XXIV. 
FINAL SYLLABLE OF A VERSE. 
The final syllable of every verse (except the Anapaestic 
and Ionic a minore) may be either long or short, at the op- 
tion of the poet ; that is, a long syllable may be used to 
close a verse, though the measure require one that is short ; 
or a short syllable may be used, though the measure re- 
quire one that is long. Thus, in the first of the following 
lines, the long syllable t<b is made to stand in place of a 
short ; and, in the second, the short syllable que stands in 
lieu of a long. 

Horat. Jam satis terris nivis atque dira. (Sapphic.) 
Virg. Nescee, Spioque, Thaliaque, Cymodoceque. 

1. Athenasus (7, 107) quotes the following line from Epicharmus, 
where the Doric form occurs : Hulvnoc re, (jrjKiaL re, /cat iroraval rev- 
dideq ; and another from Archestratus : U6?iV7rot ev re Odeo) /cat Kapta 
eioiv upiGTot. He then goes on to remark, Auptelg <$' avrbv Sea rov o 
KCbkuvGi 7i6?ivrrov y 'E7r^ap^Of real SifiuvLdTig 6' £<p7]' „7r6?iv7rov 
di&ij,evo<;. u 'Attlkoi 6e ttoXvttovv. {Athcn. y 7. — vol. 3, p. 169, cd. 
Sckweigh.) So the Greeks used both Qcdl7rov£ , •oo ? o£ > and -ot>» 

I 



98 THE QUANTITY OF THE PENULT OF WORDS. 



Obs. 1. The principle on which the above rule depends 
is not that the syllable in question undergoes any actual 
change of quantity, but simply, that, by reason of its posi- 
tion at the end of the line, and the interruption which the 
metre there sustains, the same strictness is not required as 
in other syllables differently situated ; and hence the real 
quantity of the syllable becomes so comparatively unimpor- 
tant, that the poet has the license of which we are treating 
allowed him. 1 

Obs. 2. The exceptions in the case of the Anapaestic 
and Ionic a minore measures will be explained when we 
come to treat of those two kinds of verse. 

SECTION XXV. 

REMARKS ON THE QUANTITY OF THE PENULT OF 
WORDS. 

I. Patronymics in ides or ades usually shorten the penult; 
as, Priarmdes, Atlantiades, &c. Unless they come from 
nouns in cus ; as, Pelides, Tydides, Sic. 2 

1. Compare the remarks of Hermann: " Quum in numeris tempora 
omnia certa esse ac definita debeant, facile intelligitur, in numeris ipsis 
nihil usquam posse anceps esse ; itaque si qua inveniuntur ancipites 
syllaba, i. e., qua breves sint quum longa esse debeant, vel longa quum 
debeant breves esse, eas, quod ad numerum attinet, pro talibus numerari, 
quales debeant esse, etsi non sint tales. Id autem nemo non videt sic 
tantum fieri posse, si qui sint in numeris loci in quibus pravitas ista 
mensura nihil aut parum offensionis habeat. Hujus modi loci duo sunt. 
Unus est in Anacrusi ex una brevi syllaba. Alter est in fine ordinis, 
ubi, quoniam nihil sequitur, quod terminum ponat certum, ac potius 
pausa quadam succedit, paritcr delitescit mensura pravitas. Unde vci 
brevis syllaba longa locum tenere potest, vel longa pro brevi esse.'' 7 
(Herm., Elem. Doctr., 1, 9.) 

2. In a paper on " Greek patronymics" (published in the European 
Magazine for August, 1817), Dr. Carey, in remarking on the patronym- 
ics 'krpddng, HnXeldnc, &c, and their corresponding Latin forms 
(which he writes with ei instead of the long i alone, as), Atreides, Pe- 
leidcs, observes, " I conceive, that wherever, in Greek or Latin poetry, 
we find one of those patronymics in such a position as to allow the alter- 
native of one long syllable or two short, we are, if not bound, at least 
authorized, to pronounce the ei as two distinct syllables ; thus producing, 
in each of the following instances, a dactyl instead of the spondee, which 
results from the ordinary mode of pronunciation ; ex. gr., 



TEE QUANTITY OF THE PENULT OF WORDS. 99 



II. Patronymics and similar words in dis, eis, itis, dis, 
otis, ine, and one, commonly lengthen the penult ; as, Acha- 
ts, Ptolemais, Chrysels, JEneis, Memphitis, Latois, Icarid* 
tis, Nerine, Arisione. Except Thebais and Phocais ; and 
Nereis, which is common. 

III. Adjectives in acus, icus, idus, and imus for the most 
part shorten the penult ; as, JEgyptidcus, academicus, lepi* 
dus, legitimus ; also superlatives, as fortissimus, &c. Ex- 
cept opdcus, amicus, apricus, pudlcus, mendicus, posticus, fi~ 
dus, inf idus (but perfidus, of per and fides, is short), bimus, 
quadrimus, patrimus, matrimus, opimus ; and two superla- 
tives, imus, primus. 

IV. Adjectives in emus have the penult long ; as, postre- 
mus. 

V. Adjectives in alis, anus, arus, irus, ivus, orus, osus, 
udus, urus, and utus, lengthen the penult ; as, do talis, ur- 
banus, avarus, delirus, cestivus, decor us, for mosus, per crudus, 
edurus, astutus. Except barbdrus, opiparus. 

VI. Adjectives in His, if derived from verbs, shorten the 
penult; as, agilis, facilis, habilis, &c. But derivatives from 
nouns usually lengthen it ; as, anilis, civilis, herilis, &c. To 
these add exilis, subtilis ; and names of months ; as, Apri- 
lis, Quinctilis, Sextilis : except humilis, parilis, and also 
similis. But all adjectives in atilis are short ; as, versaii- 
lis, volatilis, umbratilis, &LC. 

VII. Adjectives in inus, derived from inanimate things, 



'Arpstdrjc re, ava% avdptiv, ical dloc 'kxiXkevg. 
Atreidas, Priamumque, et savum ambobus AcJiillem. 

Thus also, instead of spondaic lines in the following instances (Iliad, 2. 
9, and 17. 191), 

'FjWqv tc k1lcl7)v ' kyaueyvovog 'Arpstdao, 
Ot TTporl ugtv (pepov K%vra revx^a tlrjletdao, 

we should have verses of the regular form, with the dactyl in the fifth 
place ; and the same remark applies to Urj^etcova, which often occurs in 
the Iliad, and to various other patronymics, which it is not here neces- 
sary to enumerate.'' 



100 THE QUANTITY OF THE PENULT OF WORDS. 



as plants, trees, stones, &c. ; from adverbs of time, or 
from substantives denoting the four seasons of the year, 
shorten the penult ; as, amaracinus, crocinus, hyacintlunus ; 
cedrinus,faginus, oleaginus ; adamantinus, crystalUnus, sma- 
ragdtnus ; crastinus, diutinus, serotinus; earhius, oporinus, 
chimcrinus, therinus ; also annofmus, hornotinus. To which 
add bombycinus, clephantinus, which seem to refer rather to 
the silk and ivory than to the animals themselves. 

VIII. Adjectives in inns, derived from living things, 
numeral distributives, proper names, and gentile nouns, 
lengthen the penult ; as, agnTnus, camnus, leporinus ; binus, 
trinus, quinus ; Alblnus, Cralinus, Justinus ; Alexandrinus, 
LaCinus, Venusinus, &c. To which add adjectives of 
place ; as, collinus, marinus, vicinus ; and those derived 
from nouns denoting time ; as, matutinus, vespertinus ; to- 
gether with all other adjectives in inus not included in the 
preceding rule : as, festlnus, libcrtmus, inopinus, peregrinus, 
supinus, &c. 

IX. Diminutives in olus, ola, olum, and ulus, ula, ulum, 
always shorten the penult; as, urcedlus, filiola, musazolum ; 
lectulus, ratiuncula, corculum, &c. 

X. Adverbs in tim lengthen the penult ; as, oppidatim, 
viritim, tributim. Except offatim, perpetim, and statim. 1 

XI. Desideratives in urio shorten the antepenultima, 
which in the second or third person is the penult ; as, esu- 
rio, esuris, esurit. But other verbs in urio lengthen that 
syllable ; as, ligurio, liguris ; scaturio, scaturis. 

1. But statim, signifying "on the spot" "steadily" "constantly," 
has the penult long. It occurs in Plautus (Amph., 1, 1, 84 ; 76., 120) 
and in Terence (Phorm., 5, 3, 7). It is said to be derived, in commo*n 
with statim, from the same verb, sto. 



FIGURES OF PROSODY. 



101 



SECTION XXVI. 
FIGURES OF PROSODY. 

I. C-ESURA. 1 
Part I. 

I. The term Caesura is used in two different senses by 
prosodians ; first, with reference to whole verses, and, sec- 
ondly, as regards single feet. 

II. In the former acceptation, it means the division of a 
verse into two portions or members, affording a short pause 
or rest for the voice in some convenient part, where that 
pause may take place without injury to the sense or to the 
harmony of the line ; as, 

Virg. TantcB molts erat \\ Rornanam condere gent em. 
Id. Errahant actifatis || maria omnia circum. 

III. In this sense, however, it is usually, for distinction > 
sake, styled the Casural Pause, and is chiefly connected 
with the consideration of hexameter verse. It will there- 
fore be treated of more at large under that head. 

IV. In its application to single feet, the caesura means 
the division or separation which takes place in a foot, on 
account of the syllables which compose that foot belonging 
to different words ; as, 

Virg. Pasto\res ovi\um tener\os de\pellere | foetus. 

In this verse the caesura, in its second acceptation, occurs 
three times, viz., in the second foot, between res and ovi ; 
in the third, between um and tener ; and in the fourth, be- 
tween os and de. 2 

V. There are three kinds of caesura in its second accep- 

1. Ccesura, "a cutting off" (in Greek ro/irj), from cado, "to cut." 

2. Some give the name Caesura to the syllable that remains after the 
completion of a foot ; as, res, um, and os, in the line given in the text. 
The best prosodians, however, consider it more accurate to confine the 
term to the separation or division which takes place in a foot, and to call 
the residuary long syllable simply a long syllable, or a semifoot. 

12 



102 



FIGURES OF PROSODY. 



tation, namely, the Syllabic, the Trochaic, and the Mono* 
syllabic. 

VI. The Syllabic Casura is that in which the first part 
of the divided foot consists of the last syllable of a word ; 
as, 

Virg. Sylves\trem tenu\i mus\am medi\taris av\cna. 
Here the syllables trem (of sylvestrem), i (of tenui), and am 
(of musam), are instances of this species of caesura. 

The Syllabic Casura may take place in a heroic verse 
at what are technically called the triemimeris, penthemime- 
ris, hephihemimeris, and sometimes at the ennehemimeris. 1 
Thus, 

3 5 7 

Virg. Si cani\mus sylv\as sylv\& sint \ consule | digna. 

3 5 7 9 

Id. Ills la\tus nive\um moll\i fult\us hya\cintho. 
Here the caesural syllables mus (of canimus) in the first 
line, and tus (of latus) in the second, are in the triemime- 
ris, or third half-foot of the line ; the syllables as (of sylvas) 
and um (of niveum) are in the penthemimeris, or fifth half- 
foot ; the syllables a (of sylvce) and i (of molli) are in the 
hephthemimeris, or seventh half-foot ; and the syllable us 
{oifultus) is in the ennehemimeris, or ninth half-foot. 

VII. The Trochaic Casura is that in which the first part 
of the divided foot consists either of a long and short sylla- 
ble, or, in other words, a trochee (" w ), remaining at the end 
of a word, or of an entire word composed of one long and 
one short syllable ; as, 

Virg. Fortu\natus et | illc de\os qui \ novit a\grestes. 

t. These terms owe their origin to the practice, generally adopted by 
the old grammarians, of measuring lines by half-feet. Thus, the triem- 
imeris is that portion of a verse (counted or measured from the beginning 
of a line) which contains three half-parts (rp£?c, "three" rjiii, "half" 
and peplcy "apart"), i. e., three half-feet, or a foot and a half (two short 
syllables being counted as one long). Again, the penthemimeris indi- 
cates five half-parts (ttevte, "five" yfic, and fiepic), or two feet and a 
half ; the hephthemimeris, seven half-parts (e?rra, " seven" qui, and jlle- 
fjlc.) ; and the ennehemineris nine half-parts (kvvia, " nine" ijfitt and 
ueplc). 



FIGURES OF PROSODY. 



103 



Here natus in the second foot, ille in the third, and novit in 
the fifth, form each a trochee, aiid in each of these divis- 
ions of the line a trochaic caesura takes place. 

The Trochaic Ccesura may occur in either of the first five 
feet of a verse ; as, 

Virg. Arma pro\cul curr\usque vir\um mi\ratur in\anes. 

Id. Talia | voce re\fert, o | terque qua\terque be\ati. 
Two successive trochees, however, in the second and third 
feet must be avoided, since they give the verse a flippant 
and undignified air. Thus, 

Ennius. Ergo ma\gisque ma\gisque vir\i nunc \ gloria \ claret. 
Propert. Et gravi\ora re\pendit in\iquis \ pensa qua\sillis. 
In the third and fourth they are nearly as disagreeable as, 
Ennius. Prudent\em qui \ fnulta lo\quive ta\cereve | posset. 
But two successive trochees may agreeably occur in the 
first and second feet ; as, 

Virg. are ci\ere vir\os Mart\emque ac\cendere \ cantu. 
Or in the fourth and fifth ; as, 

Virg. Et glau\cas sali\ces casi\amque cro\cumque ru\bentem. 

VIII. The Monosyllabic Casura is that in which the first 
syllable of the divided foot is a monosyllable ; *as ? 

Virg. Hie vir hie | est tibi | quern pro\mitti \ sapius \ audis. 

IX. Of the three kinds of caesura which have been here 
enumerated, the syllabic seems to have been the principal 
one in Latin versification ; and but few harmonious lines 
can be found in which it is not introduced. Next in met- 
rical effect is the trochaic. 

1. In Homer, however, we'have two remarkable instances of the use 
of successive trochees in producing a beautiful onomatopoeia. Thus, 

HoTika 6* uv\dvTd } Kar\avTa, irdp\dvTd re, \ Soxf^cd | r\ rjWov. — (ZZ., 
23, 116.) 

clvtIq e7r\eiTa ne6\5v6e kv9[\lv6eto \ Tiadg dv\aidr)g. — (Od., 11,598.) 
The following striking passage may also be cited from Virgil (2En., 1, 85): 
Una Eu\rusque Not\usque ru\&nt cre\berque pro\cellis. 



104 



FIGURES OF PROSODY. 



X. On the caesura depend, in a very great degree, the 
beauty and melody of a verse. While its presence serves 
to give animation to the line, and, by connecting together 
the different words of which it is composed, imparts to it 
an air of gracefulness and ease, its absence, on the other 
hand, is marked by a total want of poetic harmony. A 
line in which the caesura is either wholly omitted, or in a 
great degree neglected, has, in fact, little to distinguish it 
from common prose, and can only be admitted into Latin 
poetry on occasions in which harmony is purposely avoid- 
ed, as in many of the neglected hexameters of Horace. 

XI. The following lines may serve to show the uncouth- 
ness and inelegance attendant upon the neglect of the cae- 
sura. 

Ennius. Sparsis \ hastis | late | campus \ splendet et \ hor- 
ret. 

Id. Disper\ge hostes \ distrahe \ diduc \ divide | differ. 
Propert. Non me | moribus \ ilia sed \ herbis | improba \ vicit. 

XII. A caesura, however, is not indispensably requisite 
in every foot of a verse. Although the most melodious 
lines are certainly those in which the caesura is frequently 
introduced, still a long uninterrupted series of them would 
have any other than a pleasing effect ; and therefore it be- 
comes advisable occasionally to omit the caesura in one or 
more of the feet, and in this way to produce an agreeable 
variety. — The following rules have been laid down on this 
subject, and deserve attention. 

1. In the first foot of a verse the caesura may generally 
be omitted ; as, 

Virg. Pauperis | et tugur\i con\gestum | cespite | culmen. 

2. In the second foot the caesura is often omitted ; but, 
when this omission takes place, the word which be- 
gins the foot is generally of sufficient length to com 



FIGURES OF PROSODY. 



105 



plete it, and leave a caesural syllable in the next foot ; l 
as, 

Virg. Squamea | convolv\ens sub\lato \ pectore | terga, 

3. The caesura is not so frequently omitted at the pen- 
themimeris as it is in the other feet ; and when it is 
omitted in the third it always occurs in the fourth, and 
generally in the second foot. When this omission of 
the caesura at the penthemimeris takes place, the third 
foot generally consists of the first two or three sylla- 
bles of a word, which is finished in the next foot ; as, 

Virg. Jussa mor\i quce \ sorti\tus non \ pertulit \ ullos. 

4. In the fourth foot the caesura is not necessary, if there 
be one at the penthemimeris ; as, 

Virg. Pinguis et j ingra\tce preme\retur | caseus \ urbi. 

5. The syllabic and monosyllabic cassuras are seldom 
introduced after the fourth foot, but the trochaic often 
occurs at the ennehemimeris, and in most instances is 
conducive to the harmony of the line ; as, 

Virg. S&pe le\vi somn\um sua\debit in\ire su\surro. 

Id. Hinc al\ta sub \ rupe can\et frond\atdr ad | auras, 

6. When there is but one caesura in a verse, it is gener- 
ally in the third foot, sometimes in the fourth, but nev- 
er in the second ; as, 

Virg. Quern mea | carmini\bus meru\isset \ fistula | caprum 

7. In a pentameter verse, a syllabic caesura generally 

1. The frequent recurrence of the verb ncscio as a dactyl, and of the 
prepositions inter and intra as spondees, forming the second foot, appears 
at first view inconsistent with this rule ; but, in reality, it is quite in accord- 
ance with it. It has been clearly ascertained that the preposition and its 
case were frequently pronounced with one accent as one word, and there 
is reason to suppose that ncscio was often connected in a similar manner 
with the word which followed it. Thus, the words inter se were pro- 
nounced, and consequently regarded in versification, as tkough they were 
written interse, and nescio quis as though written nescioguis. A similar 
connexion is not unusual in English words; thus, some body is pronoun- 
ced somebody; no body, nobody; can not, cannot. (Bradhy^s Lai, 
Pros., p. 49.; 



106 



FIGURES OF PROSODY. 



takes place at the penthemimeris, and a trochaic in 
the foot preceding the final syllable in the second hem- 
istich or half-verse ; as, 

Ovid. Nec quere\rer tard\os \\ ire re\licta di\es. 
Id. Nil mihi \ rescrib\as, || attamen | ipse ve\ni. 

8. There is sometimes a monosyllabic caesura at the 
penthemimeris of a pentameter, when the preceding 
word is a monosyllable ; as, 

Ovid. Magna tam\en spes \ est \\ in bonit\ate de\i. 

9. The trochaic caesura is sometimes neglected in the 
foot preceding the final syllable of a pentameter, and 
the verse is concluded by a word of four or more syl- 
lables ; as, 

Ovid. Lis est | cumform\a \\ magna pu\diciti\<s. 



C JE S UR A. 
Part II. 

I. A syllable naturally short is occasionally lengthened 
when it is caesural. 1 This, however, takes place chiefly in 
hexameter verse, and more sparingly in elegiac and lyric 
versification. Thus, in hexameters we have, among other 
instances, the following : 

Virg. Pectori\bus inhi\ans spir\antia | consulit | exta. 
Id. Emicat | Hurya\lus et | munere \ victor a\mici. 
Horat. Cum gravi\us dors\o sublet onus. | Incipit \ Me. 
Virg. Grains hom\o infecj\os linq\uens profu\gus hymen\(BOS. 

1. In ordinary language we ascribe this to the force of the ccesura ; 
but the true principle on which the rule depends is simply this ; that the 
pressure of the voice is exerted on the syllables in question, and produ- 
ces the same effect as if they were pronounced with double length. The 
stress of the voice in dactylic versification always falls, it must be re- 
membered, on the first part of the foot. This part is called the arsis 
(apaic), or " elevation," the tone of the voice being here somewhat ele- 
vated ; while the remaining portion is termed the thesis (tieoic), or " de- 
pression," the voice being in this part of the foot comparatively depress- 
ed. — (Compare the remarks of Maltby on the lUus Metricus, ch. 3, p. 
xii. — Lex. Pros.) 



FIGURES OF PROSODY. 



107 



In the second line of the elegiac distich we have the fol- 
lowing : 

Tib nil. Quicquid ag\at sang\uis || est tamen | ille tu\us. 
Propert. Vinceris \ aut vin\cis \\ hcec in a?n\ore rot\a est. 
Ovid. In liquid\%m redi\it \\ csthera | Martis eq\uis. 
In lyrics the following occur : 

Horat. Si non \ peri\ret || immisera\bilis. 

Id. Caeca tim\et ali\unde | fata. 

Id. Perru\pit Acheront\a Herculeus | labor. 

Id. Si fi\git adamant\inos. 

Id. Angu\lus ri\det ubi \ non Hym\etto. 
II. Instances even occur in which, on account of the in- 
fluence of the caesura (to adopt the common phraseology), 
the final m remains unelided before a vowel in the begin- 
ning of the word following, and forms, with its own prece- 
ding vowel, a long syllable. The following are among the 
number : 

Propert. O me \ feli\cem ! O \ nox mihi \ Candida et | O tu. 
Tibull. Et tant\um vene\ratur vir\um hum \ sedula \ curet. 
Luc. Scit non \ esse cas\dm. O \ vitce \ tuta fa\cultas. 
Manil. Emerit\us cozl\um et \ Claudia | magna pro\pago. 



II. Elision. 

Elision is the cutting off of the final vowel or diphthong, 
or of the two final letters, of a word, and is divided into 
Synalozpha and Ecthlipsis. 

Synalcepha. 

I. Synalcepha is the elision of a vowel or diphthong at 
the end of a word, when the following word begins with a 
vowel, a diphthong, or*the letter h ; l as, 

1. Quintilian applies the term Synalozpha, in one place (1, 5, 18), to 
what is commonly called Synaresis ; as, Phcethon for Phaethon : and in 
another (9, 4, 36), to what is usually styled Ecthlipsis ; as, Pr<Bsidi > est 
for Presidium est. As a general definition, however, he terms awak- 



108 



FIGURES OF PROSODY. 



Virg. Conticuere omnes, intcntique ora tenebant. 
Id. DardanidcR e muris : spes addita suscitut iras. 
Id. Scevus ubi j^Eacidai telo jacet Hector, ubi ingens. 
Id. Hnmida solstitia atque hy ernes orate serenas. 
Which lines, in scanning, are read as follows : 

Conticuer' omnes, intentiqu* ora tenebant. 

DardaniaV e muris : spes addita suscitat iras. 

Scbvus ub* JEacida telo jacet Hector, ub' ingens. 

Humida solstiti* atqu* y ernes orate serenas. 

This, however, is done only in scanning, and not in wri- 
ting, nor in the most approved mode of pronouncing a 
verse. In the two latter cases, the lines are always writ- 
ten, and generally pronounced, without any elision. 1 

II. Synalcepha affects not only a single syllable, but also 
two syllables sounded as one by synaeresis ; as, 

Virg. Stellio ; et lucifugis conges ta cubilia blattis. 
Catull. Et earum omnia adirem furibunda latibula. Gal. 

Here, in the first line, stellio et is pronounced stell yet; 
and, in the second, omnia adirem becomes omn yadirem. 

III. In addition to the elisions already mentioned, the 
earlier Latin poets were in the habit of frequently eliding 
the letter s, in words ending in is and us, when followed 
by a word beginning with a consonant, and thus permitting 
the vowel, which would otherwise have been long by posi- 
tion, to remain short ; 2 thus, 

oL<poi " co'euntes literce" (9, 4, 36). — The word Synalcepha is from the 
Greek ovva?\.0L<pri, and, according to its etymology, refers, not so much 
to the elision of one vowel before another, as to the blending of two 
vowels or syllables into one. On this account, some have considered 
ttfe term Synalozpha, as commonly used, an improper one, and recom- 
mend that, instead of Synalcepha and Ecthlipsis, the general term Eli* 
sion be substituted. 

1. The best opinion with regard to the amucnt mode of pronouncing 
Latin verse is this, that much of the apparent harshness of elisions was 
removed, by giving the elided syllable so slight and imperfect a sound 
that it could hardly be distinguished, and, consequently, interrupted but 
little the measure of the verse. 

2. Ennius, Lucilius, Lucretius, and the comic writers furnish the most 



FIGURES OF PROSODY. 



109 



Enn. Te nunc sancta precor Venus, et genetrix patri(s) 
nostri. 

Id. Versibu(s) quos olim Fauni Vatesque canebant. 
Lucret. Tit quasi transactis sape omnibu(s) rebu[s) profun- 
dant. 

Catull. At fixus nostris tu dabi{s) supplicium, (Pentam.) 

IV. We may notice here a peculiar species of elision or 
abbreviation not unfrequently employed in short, quick 
questions, by which the vowel is dropped in the interroga- 
tive particle ne before a consonant thus, 

Catull. Ten' provincia narrat esse bella?n ? (Phalaeeian.) 
Propert. Vidistin 1 toto sonitus procurrere cozlo ? 
Virg. Hectoris Andromache Pyrrhin* connubia servas ? 
Horat. Men' moveat cimex Pantilius ? aut cruciet quod. 

V. It has already been remarked, under the rules for final 
n, that in such forms as vidm' ut, the s is dropped before n, 
and the vowel shortened. Both this and the last-mentioned 
abbreviation are combined in viden' (for videsne) and virC 
tu (for visne tu). 

Catull. Nostra verba, Viderf ? faces. 
Horat. Tempore dicam; Jiodie tricesima s abb at a ; vin' tu. 
These expressions, as might be expected, are very com- 
mon in the comic writers. 1 

EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc. 1. Synaloepha never takes place in the words O, 

numerous examples of this license. Some instances also occur in Cicero's 
translation of Aratus, though comparatively few in number. About the 
time, however, when Cicero wrote his Orator, the custom of dropping 
the 5 before a consonant appears to have been fast going out of use ; at 
least the following passage from the work just referred to is in favour of 
such an opinion : " Quin etiam, quod jam subrusticum videtur, olim au~ 
tern politius, eorum verborum quorum eazdem erant postremce dua literal 
quaz sunt in optumus postremam liter am detrahebant, nisi vocalis insc- 
qucbatur. Iia non erat offensio in versibus quam nunc fughint poets, 
novi ; ita enim loquebantur ; qui est omnibu' princeps, non omnibus 
princeps, et vita ilia dignu' locoque, non tlignus." (Cic, Orat., 48, § 
161.— Compare Quintil, U, 4, 38.— Mar. Vict., p. 2472.) 
I. Ramsay' 's hat. Pros., p. 114. 

K 



110 



FIGURES OF PROSODY. 



heu, ah, a\, io, proh, vat, vah, hei, and the like interjec- 
tions, which sustain the voice, and retard the pronun- 
ciation, on account of the feeling or passion which 
they express ; as, 

Virg. O pater, | d homin\um div\umque a\terna pot\estas. 

Id. Heu ubi \ pacta jid\es ? ubi \ qua jur\are sol\ebas. 

Tibull. Ah ego \ ne poss\im || tanta vid\ere mal\a. (Pent,) 

Ovid. Ipse su\os gernit\us foli\is in\scribit et \ ~ai ai. 

Id. Et bis i\o Areth\usa i\o Areth\usa voc\avit. 

Exc. 2. Elision is sometimes apparently neglected in 
the case of a long vowel or diphthong ; and this gen- 
erally happens when the unelided vowel or diphthong 
is in the caesural syllable. Hence arise the following 
rules : 

First. When a long vowel or diphthong occurs in a 
caesural syllable, and the word that follows begins 
with either a vowel or diphthong, then the long vow- 
el or diphthong sometimes apparently remains une- 
lided; but, in fact, the long vowel or diphthong 
parts, by means of elision, with one of its two short 
component vowels, and the remaining short vowel, 
being in the caesura, is lengthened again by the stress 
of the voice. 

Secondly. When a long vowel or diphthong occurs, not 
in a c<Bsural syllable, and the word that follows be- 
gins with a vowel or diphthong, then the long vowel 
or diphthong sometimes apparently remains uneli- 
ded ; but, in fact, the long vowel or diphthong parts, 
by means of elision, with one of its two short com- 
ponent vowels, and the remaining short vowel, not 
being in the caesura, continues short. 



FIGURES OF PROSODY. 



Ill 



ILLUSTRATIONS OF EXCEPTION SECOND. 

Rule First. 

Virg. Et succ\us pecor\i, et | lac sub\ducitur \ agnis 
Id. Stant et \ juniper^ et | castane\a> hirs\ut(B. 
Id. Ter sunt | cona\tl im\ponere \ Pelio | Ossam. 1 
Id. Amphi\on Dir\ccBus in | Aet(B\d Ara\cyntho. 
Ovid. Et celer \ Ismen\us cum \ Phocdi\cd Erym\antho. 

Rule Second. 

Catv.ll. Uno in | lectulo | erud\itul\i ambo. (Phalsecian.) 
Virg. Credimus ? | an qui am\ant ips\i sibi [ somnia J fin- 
gunt ? 

Id. Nomen et \ arma loc\um serv\ant £e am\ice neq\uivi. 
Id. Et long\um form\ose val\e vale | inquit I\ola. 
Id. Insula | Ioni\o in magn\o quas | dira Cel\ano. 
Id. Te Coryd\on o Al\exi trah\it sua | quemque vol\uptas. 
Horat. Et Esq\uili\ri& al\ites. (Iambic.) 



Obs. The only exception in Virgil to the remarks con- 
tained in the preceding paragraph, occurs in the following 
line : 

Glaucd | et Pano\pe(B et | Ino\o Meli\cert(B. (Georg., 1,437.) 
Here the o in Glauco is not elided, but is allowed to remain 
long, though not in caesura. The line, however, in all 
probability, contains a false reading, and for Glauco we 
should substitute Glaucoque. 2 

1. In this line, the o in Pelio furnishes an illustration of rule second. 

2. Ramsay's usual accuracy deserts him, when he regards this line as 
transplanted without change from some one of the Greek poets, who 
were much less strict, in matters of this kind, than the Latins. It hap- 
pens, unfortunately for this remark, that the Greek, in that event, would 
be, YXavKu kclI TLavoirEir/ W 'Ivcjg) Me/U/cepr??, in which case the last 
syllable of Tlavtco) would be long, as a matter of course, without any li- 
cense whatever. Aulus Gellius (13, 26) informs us that Virgil borrow- 
ed the line from the Greek poet Parthenius, in whom it ran as follows : 
VkavKCd kcu Nnpfji koL 'Ivuo MeXucipTf). (Compare Macrob., 5, 17. — 
Fulv. Urs., Virg. cum Grcec. Script 0^1, p. 130.) This form of the 



112 



FIGURES OF PROSODY. 



Exc. 3. Very rarely is a short vowel left unelided. This 
happens only twice in Virgil, and in both cases there 
is a pause after the word ending with the short vowel, 
so that in repeating the line the effect would not be 
disagreeable. 1 Thus, 
Addam \ cerea | pruna : hon\os erit \ huic quoque | porno \ 
(EcL, 2, 53.) 

El ve\ra incess\u patu\it Dea. | Ille ubi | mairem. (jEn., 1, 
405.) 

Obs. For some remarks on elision at the end of a verse, 
when the next verse begins with a vowel or diphthong, con- 
sult the article Synapheia. 

* 

ECTHLIPSIS. 2 

I. Ecthlipsis is the eliding of the consonant m at the 
end of a word, when the following word begins with a 
vowel or the letter h ; and after the m is removed by ecth 
lipsis, a synaloepha immediately operates, and cuts off the 
vowel which preceded the m. Thus, 

Catull. Omnia tecum una perierunt gaudia nostra. 
Id. JEternum hoc sancta fozdus amicitm. (Pent.) 

In scanning which lines we must read them as follows : 
Omnia terf una perierunt gaudia nostra. 
JEtern' hoc sanctcs fozdus amicitm. 

Greek line, however, still remains hostile to Ramsay's opinion. Wag- 
ner, on the other hand, maintains that the true reading in Virgil is Glau- 
coque, as we have remarked in the text. His words are as follows : 
" Nullus dubito, quum nusquam longam syllabam in co posilu produxe- 
rit Virgilius, pessumdata etiam soni elcgantia, quin scripscrit Glauco- 
que. Apparet autem nusquam facilius excidere potuisse hanc copulam, 
per simplex q scilicet exprimi solitam, quam hoc loco, praccdentibus du- 
abus ipsi Q similibus Uteris, altera quidcm simillima, C et O. Sic in 
Medic. Mn., 1, 69, a m. pr. scriptum est SUBMERSASQ. BRUE pro 
submersasq. obrue, &c. (Wagner, Qucest. Virgil., 11,3.) 

1. Ramsay's hat. Pros., p. 116. 

2. The subject of Ecthlipsis has been in part anticipated in the re- 
marks respecting m final, p. 84, seqq. 



FIGURES OF PROSODY. 



113 



II. Ecthlipsis sometimes, by the aid of Synapheia, strikes 
out a syllable at the end of a line, when the next line be- 
gins with a vowel, and no long pause intervenes ; as, 
Virg. Jamque iter emensi, turres ac iecta Latino\rum 
Ardua cernebant juvenes, murosque subibant. 

H re the second line is to be read r 'Ardua cernebant, &c, 
the last syllable of Latinorum being cut off from the first 
verse and prefixed to the second. 

EXCEPTIONS. 

Exc. 1. The elision of m is sometimes neglected, espe- 
cially by the older poets, and in this case the syllable 
ending in m, when not a csesural one, is short ; l as, 

tiiicret. Nam quod fluvidum est, e levibus atque rotundis. 

Id., Sed dum abest quod avemus, id exsuperare videtur. 

Exc. 2. In some instances the caesura operates to pre- 
serve the final m unelided, in which case the syllable 
thus saved from elision becomes long ; as, 

Propert. O me felicem ! O nox mihi Candida ! et O tu. 

Before quitting the subject of elision, it may not be amiss 
to add the following rules, which regulate its use. 

1. A verse in which there are more than two elisions, is 
most commonly deficient in harmony ; as, for exam- 
ple, the following pentameter line : 

Catull. Quam modo qui me unum atque unicumumicum habuit, 

2. Elisions may generally be introduced into a verse 
without diminishing its harmony, when the final vow- 
el of a word is the same as that which begins the next 
word, and when the elided vowel is either naturally 
short, or is followed by a long syllable ; as, 

1. This and the succeeding exception have been partially anticipated 
in the remarks relative to linal m. 

K2 



114 



FIGURES OF PROSODY. 



Virg. Ipse ego cana legam tenera lanugine mala. 

Id. Turn casia atque aliis intexens suavibus herbis. 



3. An elision has seldom a good effect, either when it 
occurs in the first syllable of a verse, or in the end of 
the fifth foot of an hexameter, or immediately after the 
penthemimeris in a pentameter, or in a word ending 
with a long vowel or a diphthong before a word be- 
ginning with a short vowel ; as, 

Horat. Nam ut ferula ccedas meritum majora subire. 

Juv. Loripedem rectus derideat iEthiopem Albus. 

Catull. Troja nefas ! commune sepulcrum Europae Asiceque. 

Id. Me miser o eripuisti omnia nostra bona. (Pentam.) 



III. Sincere sis. 

I. Synaeresis is the contraction of two syllables into one, 
and is resorted to by the poets in order to make a word ad- 
missible into hexameter or other verse, which could not 
otherwise be introduced without some degree of inconve- 
nience or dissonance, or perhaps not at all. 

II. Hence we have, among others, the following instan- 
ces of this species of poetic license. 

1. CONTRACTION OF ed. 

aurea is pronounced as aura. 



cerea 
alvearia 
respondedmus 

anteactos M 
antedmbulo 11 
antehdc " 



cerd. 
alvaria. 

respondydmus (4 syllables). 1 
antydctos (3 syllables). 2 
antydmbulo (4 syllables). 
antydc (2 syllables). 



Virg. Aurea composuit sponda, mediamque locavit. 

1. The y is to be pronounced here like the same letter when it stands 
at the beginning of an English word. 

2. This word and the two that follow may otherwise be pronounced 
a?it'actos, anfambulo, ant'ac, and the vowel c may be supposed to have 
been actuallv elided before 1 K e one that succeeds. 



FIGURES OF PROSODY. 115 

Horat. Abdiderant furtim terris, et imagine eerea. 
Virg. Seu lento fuerint alvearia vimine texta. 
Lucret. Quid respondeamus nisi justam intendere litem. 
Tibull. Cum memor anteactos semper dolor admonet annos. 
Mart. Anteambulones et togatulos inter. (Scazon.) 
Horat. Antehac nefas depromere Ccecubum. (Alcaic.) 



2. CONTRACTION OF ei. 

cerei is pronounced as ceri. 

aranei 44 44 arani. 

baltei 44 44 balti. 

ferret 44 44 ferri. 

aureis 44 44 auris. 

anteirent 44 44 antirent. 

anteis 44 44 antis. 

anteit " 44 antit. 



Centum serei claudunt vectes (Bternaque ferri. 
Nec nebulam noctu, neque aranei tenuia fila. 
Exanimem, rapiens immania pondera baltei. 
Feneique Eumenidum thalami et Discordia demens. 
Atria, dependent lychni laquearibus aureis. 
Qui candore nives anteirent cursibus auras. 
Te semper anteit sava necessitas. (Alcaic.) 



3. CONTRACTION OF eo. 

alveo is pronounced as alvo. 
aured 44 44 auro. 

Typhoed 44 44 Typhoo. 

Virg. Deturbat, laxatque foros, simul accipit alveo. 

Id. Vulcanum alloquitur, thalamoque hcsc conjugis aureo 

Id. Inarime Jovis imperiis imposta Typhoeo. 1 

1. The nominative of this proper name is Typhoeus (three syllables), 
never Tyyhai %. 



Virg. 

Lucret. 

Virg. 

Id. 

M, 

Id. 

Horat. 



116 FIGURES OP PROSODY. 



4. CONTRACTION OF id. 

vindemiator is pronounced as vindemyator (4 syllables). 1 
Formiano " " • Forinyano (3 syllables) 



Horat. Vindemiator, et invictus, cui sape viator. 
Catull. Formiano saltu nonfalso Mentula dives. 



5. CONTRACTION OF iL 

connubTis is pronounced as connubyis (3 syllables). 
denarus " " denaryis (3 syllables). 

PceonTis " " Pceonyis (3 syllables). 

Tcenus " " Tcenfis (2 syllables). 



Virg. Connubiis arvisque novis operata juventus. 

Mart. Denariis tibi quinque Martialem. (Phalaecian.) 

Virg. Paeoniis revocation herbis et amore Diana. 2 

Id. Puniceis ibant evincti tempora taeniis. 



6. CONTRACTION IN 10. 

connubib is pronounced as connubyd (3 syllables). 
Idomemos " " Idomenyds (4 syllables). 

Virg. Connubio jungam stabili propriamque dicabo, 
Catull. Idomenios/ie pe.tam monies ? at gurgite.in alto. 

7. CONTRACTION IN %U. 

fomontorium is pronounced as promontoryum (4 syllables). 
Antlum " " Antyum (2 syllables). 

omnium " " omnyurn (2 syllables). 

mensium " " mensyum (2 syllables). 

lacrymaniium " <£ lacrymantyTcm 3 (4 syllables). 

1. The ?/, as has already been remarked, is to be here pronounced 
like the same letter at the beginning of an English word. 

2. In scanning this line some erroneously make Pceoni a dactyl. The 
second syllable, on the contrary, is long, the corresponding Greek form 
being Tiaiuvioq. Such a form as Pceoniis could only refer to the Pse- 
onians (Ualovag) of Thrace. (Consult Heyne ad Virg., JEn., 7, 779, 
not. crit.) 

3. Genitives in ium are frequently written without inserting the i, 



FIGURES OF PROSODY. 



117 



Ovid. Inde legit Capreas promontorium^we Minervce. 
Id. JEt tellus Circaa, et spissi litoris Antium. 
Lucret. Imbecillorum esse aquum miser erier omnium. 
Ovid. Cum tua sint cedantque tibi conjinia mensium. 
Virg. Exclusi, ante oculos lacrymantium^e ora parcntum. 

8. CONTRACTION IN 00. 

cooluerint is pronounced as coluerint. 
cooperiant " 44 coperiant. 

cooperuisse " " coperuisse. 



Lucret. Tandem cooluerint ea qua conjecta repente. 
Id. Cooperiant maria ac terras immensa superna. 
Id. Per terras omneis atque oppida cooperuisse. 



9. contraction in ee. 



deesse is 


pronoun c 


ed 


as desse. 


deest 


a 


it 


dest. 


deerat 




(I 


derat. 


deero 


it 


6i 


dero. 


deerrarunt 


it 




derrarunt. 


deerraverat 


it 


iX 


derraverat. 



Lucret. Talibus in rebus communi deesse saluti. 
Virg. Deest jam terra fuga : pelagus Trojamne petamus 
Id. Divitis uber agri Trojmve opulentia deerit. 
Lucret. Deerrarunt passim motus ab sensibus omnes. 
Virg. Vir gregis ipse caput deerraverat, atque ego Daph* 
nin. 



II. Synseresis may sometimes be referred to synaloepha, 
or, in other words, the first vowel in several instances may 
rather be considered as elided, than as uniting with the fol- 

as, parentum, serpentum, meiisum, &c. The poets, however, use the 
open form also, when it can be conveniently introduced ; as, parentium, 
serpentium, &c. ; nor must it be supposed that the contraction is purely 
a poetic license, since it is found in the best MSS. of prose authors. 
iRamsaifs Lat. Pros., p. 124.) 



118 



FIGURES OF PROSODY. 



lowing one to form one syllable. Thus many words com- 
pounded with semi followed by a vowel, or by the letter h 
with a vowel, such as semianimis, semianimus, semiadaper- 
tus, semihians, semihomo, semiustus, &c, lose by elision the 
final vowel of semi, and are to be pronounced in verse, 
sem'animis, scm'animus, sem'adapertus, sem'hians, sem'homo, 
sem'ustus, Sic. 1 

Virg. Semianimes^e micant digiti ferrumque retractant. 
Lucret. Languida semianimo cum corpore membra videres. 
Ovid. Obliquum capiat semiadaperta latus. (Pentam.) 
Catull. Semihiante labello. (Choriambic.) 
Virg. Semihominis Caci fades quam dira tenebat. 
Id. Fama est Enceladi semiustum fulmine corpus. 

III. Words which contain an h between two vowels oc- 
casionally drop the A, and contract the two vowels into one 
syllable ; thus, we have vehemens, vehementi, vehementer, 
vehementius, and also vemens, vementi, vementer ; so prehensi 
and prensi, dehinc and deinc, nihilum and nilum, mihi and 
ml, prohibeat, pronounced prolbeat (three syllables), &c. 2 
Virg. Transit equum cursu, frenisque adversa prehensis. 
Id. Ingentes tollent animos, prensique negabunt. 

Id. Cervici subnecte dehinc ubi libera colla. 

Id. Eurum ad se Zephyrumque vocat, dehinc taliafatur. 

Lucret. Nam sive est aliquid quod prohibeat ejjiciatque. 

IV. More violent than these are ostrea, eddem, "eddem. 
eadem, eosdem, torredt, dedrsum, sedrsum, seorsus, omnia 9 
vletis, Gabli, orTundi, patrui, fluitant, pronounced as dissyl- 
lables ; precantid, Tazyges, duellica, prabptarit, as trisylla- 
bles ; prout, a monosyllable ; all of which might be, and 
most of them often are, employed without being contracted. 3 

1. Among these some would place grav^oicns arid suav'olens, but these 
ought to be considered as two distinct words, grave olens and suave 
olens. (Ramsay's Lat. Pros., p. 123.) 

2. Vcmens occurs in Horace, Epist., 2, 2, 120 ; vemcnti in Lucre- 
tius, 3, 153 ; vementer in the same, 2, 1023, and 4, 821. 

3 Ramsay 1 s Lat. Prds.> p. 124. 



FIGURES OF PROSODY. 119 

Horat. Sudando, pinguem vitiis albumque neque osrea. 
Virg. Una eademque via sanguis animusque seqwuntur. 
Propert. Hoc eodem ferro stillet uterque cruor. (Pentam.) 
Lucret. lives cunt, eaedem dispansce in sole liquescunt. 
Id. Eosdem habuit secum quibus est elata capillos. 

Id. Quod sitis exurat miser os atque arida torreat. 

Id. Pondera quantum in se est deorsum deducere pug' 

nent. 

Id. At neque seorsum oculei, neque nareis, nec manus 

ipsa. 

Id. Seorsus item sapor oris habet vim, seorsus odores 

Virg. Bis patriae cecidere manus ; quin protenus omnia. 
Horat. Qui sudor vietis, et quam malus undique membris. 
Propert. Et qui nunc nulli, maxima turba Gabii. (Pentam.) 
Lucret. Denique cozlesti sumus omnes semine oriundi. 
Stat. Nocturnique canum gemitus, ubi lumina patrui. 
Lucret. Per malos volgata trabeisque trementia fluitant. 
Virg. Praferimus manibus vittas et verba precantia. 
Ovid. Iazyges et Colchi, Metereaque turba GetcEque. 
Lucret. Lanigera pecudes, et equorum duellica prole j. 
Catull. Omnibus his Thesei dulcem praeoptarit amorem. 
Horat. Pasco libatis dapibus. Prout cuique libido est. 

V. I is sometimes considered as a consonant, and in 
these cases had, it is probable, the sound of the English y 
in young, yes, &c. Thus, abiete, abietibus, ariete, parieti- 
bus, were pronounced in dactylic verse as abyete, dbyetibus, 
aryete, paryetibus, the first syllable being considered long 
by position. 1 

Virg. JRdijicant, sectaque intexunt abiete costas. 
Id. Ahietibus juvenes patriis et montibus aquas. 
Id. Custodes sufferre valent. La \at ariete crebro. 
Id. Hcerent parietibus scalce, postesque sub ipsos. 



VI. Upon the same principle, although without the plea 



1. Ramsay's hat. Pros., p. 131. 



120 



• 

FIGURES OF PROSODY. 



of absolute necessity, we find fiuvwrum in a passage of 
Virgil {George 1, 482), where it must be pronounced jluv- 
yorum; and Nasidieni in Horace (Sat., 2, 8, 1), which 
must be pronounced Nasidyeni. In Propertius likewise, 
we have abiegni (4, 1, 42), to be pronounced abyegni, and 
abiegnm (3, 19, 12), to be pronounced abycgna. 

Virg. Fluviorum rex Eridanus, camposque per omnes. 

Horat. Ut Nasidieni juvit te ccena beatiV 

Propert. Laser at abiegni venter apertus equi. (Pent.) 

Id. Induit abiegnae cornua falsa bovis. (Pent.) 

VII. In the same way the poets took advantage of the 
double power of u, and made it a consonant in words where 
such a change was necessary or convenient. In this way 
tenuia, tenuius, tenuis, tenue, tenuem, tenui, tenuis, genua, 
curruum, fortuitus, pituita, become tenvia, tenvius, tenvis, 
&c, genva, currvum, fortvitus, pitvita, Sic. 2 
Virg. Vclleraque utfoliis depectant tenuia Seres. 
Lucret. Qua neque mobilius quidquam neque tenuius exstat. 
Virg. Tenuis ubi argilla et dumosis calculus arvis. 
Id. Genua labant, vastos quatit ceger anhelitus artus. 
Id. Per campos pascuntur equi ; qua gratia curruum. 
Juv. Non quasi fortuitus, sed ventorum rabie, sed. 
Horat. Prcecipue sanus, nisi quum pituita molesta est. 

Horat. Nec fortuitum spernere cespitem. (Alcaic.) 3 
Catull. Mucusque et mala pituita nasi. (Phalaecian.) 

1. Nasidiene, without contraction, occurs in Martial (7, 8): " Aut 
tigila aut dormi, Ndsidiene tibiV (Pentam.) 

2. By combining the processes described in this and paragraph V"., 
ienmore is pronounced tenv-ybrc. {Ramsay's hat. Pros., p. 132.) 

3. Fortuitus, without contraction, occurs also in Phaedrus (2, 4, 4). 
On the other hand, in Manilius (1, 182) we have fortvitus. 



FIGURES OF PROSODY. 



121 



IV. Diaeresis. 1 

I. Diuresis is defined to be the division of one syllable 
into two ; as, aurai for aura;, suadent for suadent, miluus for 
milvus, sylua for sylva, soluo for solvo, &c. 

Virg. JEthereum sensum, atque aurai simplicis ignem. 
Lucret. Atque alios alii irrident, Veneremque suadent. 
Phaedr. Columba s&pe quum fugissent miluum. (Iambic.) 
Horat. Nunc mare, nunc syluae. (Dact. Trim. CaW) 
Tibull. Nulla queat pcsthac nos soluisse dies. (Pentam.) 

II. In strictness, however, no such figure as diawesis ex- 
ists, nor did the poets ever assume the power of stretching 
out words, although they sometimes contracted them. The 
examples usually quoted of this so-called figure, including 
those given under the preceding paragraph, are in reality- 
archaisms, or antiquated forms of expression, which were 
adopted by the poets for the sake of convenience or orna- 
ment. 

III. As the Ionic dialect in Greek frequently resolves the 
diphthongs el and q into rj'i, the Roman poets occasionally 
availed themselves of that license in w r ords of Greek origin, 
written in the latter language with either of those diph- 
thongs ; as, 

Ovid. Flebilis indignos, Elegeia solve capillos, 
Stat. Quas inter vultu petulans elegeia propinquat. 
Ovid. Invocat, Hippomenes, Cythereia, comprecor ausis, 
Virg. Puree metu Cythereia ; manent irnrnota tuorum. 
Ovid. Quid quod avus nobis idem Pelopeius Atreus. 
Lucan. Eumenidum vidit vultus Pelopeius Orestes. 
Propert. Pleiad um spisso cur edit imbre chorus. (Pent.) 
Ovid. Pleiades incipiunt humeros relevare patemos. 
Id. Plelas enixa est, letoque det imperat Argum. 

Virg. Pleias, et Oceani spretas pede repulit amnes. 



1. Aiaipeaic, u a separation," " a taking or drawing asunder," from 
Sid and alpeu. 

L 



122 



FIGURES OF PROSODY 



So also Plmbeius and Phozbeius ; Theseius and Thesei* 
us ; Threicius, Threcius, and Thracius ; Pegaseius and Pe- 
gaseus y <fec. 

V. Prosthesis. 1 — Aphjeresis. 2 

L Prosthesis is denned to be the addition of a letter or 
syllable to the beginning of a word ; as, gnatus for natus, 
gnavus Jbr navus, &c. 

II. In strictness, however, no such figure as prosthesis 
exists. On the contrary, the forms which are cited as in- 
stances of it are in reality archaisms, or antiquated modes 
of expression. 

III. Apharesis is defined to be the cutting off of the first 
letter, or syllable of a word ; as, maragdus for smaragdus, 
conia for ciconia. 

IV. Aphaeresis is, in truth, as imaginary a figure as pros- 
thesis. The forms usually cited as instances of it are ei- 
ther archaisms or colloquial shortenings. 

VI. Syncope. 3 — Epenthesis. 4 

I. Syncope is defined to be the dropping of a letter or 
syllable out of the body of a word ; as, aspris for asperis, 
caldior for calidior, circlos for circulos, oraclum for oraculum* 
periclum for periculum, &c. 

Virg. Improvisum aspris veluii qui sentibus anguem. 
Horat. Caldior est ? acres inter numeretur. Opinor. 
Virg. Ac primum laxos tenui de vimine circlos. 
Catull. Oraclum Jovis inter cestuosi. (Phalascian.) 
Virg. Vota metu duplicant matres, propiusque periclis. 

II. We must not imagine, however, that forms such as 

1. UpoaQeais, "addition," from Trpog and Tidrj/ut. 

2. 'A<j>a'ipeaic, " a taking away," from and and alpEO). 

3. ^vjKOTrrjy " a cutting short or to pieces," from avv and kotttu. 

4. 'EnivdeaiSy "an insertion," from km y ev, and tlOijiu. 



9 



FIGURES OF PROSODY. 



123 



these were all peculiar to the poets, or that syncope was a 
figure the use of which was confined to this class of wri- 
ters. Many of these shortened forms, on the contrary, oc- 
cur also in prose. Thus, for example, vincla is found in 
Cicero (Ep. ad Fam., 16, 18). Quintilian (1,6) says that 
calfacit was more common in his time than calefacit ; while 
from the contracted periclum we have the verb periclitor, 
and so on. 

III. The words most frequently contracted by syncope 
are the prater tenses of verbs ; as, s crips ti for scrip sisti, 
dixti for dixisti, promisse for promisisse, illuxe for illuxisse : 
the participles of compound verbs ; as, repostum for repos- 
iturn : genitives plural ; as, deum for deorum, amantum for 
amantium ; and words which have a u s m the penult before 
the consonant I ; as, vinclum for vinculum. &c. 

IV. Epenthesis is defined to be the insertion of a letter 
or syllable into the body of a word ; as, pluvi, fuvi, annuvi, 
genuvi, which is done, according to the grammarians, in 
order to lengthen the short u of plui, fui, annui, genui. All 
these so-called instances of epenthesis occur in Ennius. 

V. Epenthesis is, however, an imaginary figure, like those 
of which we have already made mention. " If we study," 
observes Ramsay, " the etymological formation of the Latin 
verb, we soon discover, that, in a very large class, the per- 
fect tense is distinguished by the addition of v to what 
Bopp calls the crude form ; we shall also readily perceive 
that the v is frequently dropped, as in amasti, amarunt, au- 
dieram, &c. We shall then have no difficulty in recogni- 
sing the true old perfects of pluo, fuo, &c, in pluvi, fuvi, 
&c. ; and, as might be expected, they are found in the very 
earliest specimens of the language, and scarcely, if ever, 
appear after the time of Plautus. It would be just as rea- 
sonable to assert that a v had been inserted in audiveram or 
abivi, in order to lengthen the short i of audit and abii, as 
to advance the same proposition with regard to pluvi, fuvi, 



124 



FIGURES OF PROSODY. 



and the rest. Moreover, we have the express testimony of 
Priscian, that preterites in ui had the u long in the oldest 
writers, especially those derived from the present in uo ; as, 
eruo, erui ; arguo, argui ; annuo, annul ; and he quotes from 
Ennius, 4 Annuit sese mecum decernere ferro in all of 
which it is clear that the long quantity of the u pointed out 
the recent disappearance of the v." 1 



VII. Apocope. 2 — Paragoge. 3 

I. Apocope is defined to be the omission of the final vow- 
el or syllable of a word ; as, men* for mene. 

II. In such instances as the one just cited, where a quick 
colloquial interrogation occurs, the figure may be allowed 
to stand. In other cases, however, its existence is purely 
imaginary; as, for example, in the following line from Lu- 
cretius : 

Disjcctare solet magnum mare transtra, guberna, 
where guberna is said to be by apocope for gubernacula. 

III. Paragoge is defined to be the addition of a letter or 
syllable to the end of a word ; as, amarier for amari, doce- 
rier for doceri, legier for legi. 

IV. Paragoge is also, in strictness, an imaginary figure, 
and amarier, doccrier, legier, &c, are merely archaisms, or 
antiquated modes of expression, mistaken for a poetical or 
grammatical figure. 

VIII. Tmesis. 4 
L Tmesis is defined to be the separation of a word into 
two parts, for the purpose of inserting another word be- 
tween them ; as, 

1. hat. Pros., p. 160. — Compare Voss., de Art. Gramm., 2, 13. 

2. 'Atcokotttj, 11 a cutting off," from aizo and kotttu. 

3. Tlapayoyt), M a leading or bringing beside," from irapd and ayu. 
In military phraseology, " the extending a line of troops beyond the flank, 
and presenting a new line or front." 

4. T^atf, " a cutting," from t^vg>, " to cut." 



FIGURES OF PROSODY. 



125 



Virg. Talis Hyperboreo Septem subjecta trioni. 
Lucret. Languidior porro disjectis &isque supatis. 
Id. Ccetera de genere hoc, inter qucequomque pretantur. 
Id. Conlaxat, xzxeque facit lateramina vast. 

II. Here the words septemtrioni, dissipatis, interpretantur, 
and rarefacit, are supposed to be divided by the figure tme- 
sis. The truth appears to be, however, that, in the earlier 
forms of the language, many words which were used sep- 
arately were in process of time compounded together ; and 
hence, just as we should expect, these separations are much 
more frequent in Lucretius and the older writers than in 
those who succeeded them. 1 

IX. Antithesis. 2 — Metathesis. 3 

I. Antithesis is denned to be the putting of one letter for 
another; as, olli for Mi, faciundum for faciendum, 

II. Antithesis is, in fact, no figure at all. The forms com- 
monly assigned as instances of it, are merely old modes of 
spelling words, which are found under this shape on many 
monuments, some of them of a late date, and certainly many 
of them not antiquated even in the age of Augustus. 4 

III. Metathesis is defined to be a transposition of letters ; 
as, Evandre for Evander, Thymbre for Thymber, corcodilus 
for crocodilus. 

Virg. H(bc mea magna fides ? At non Evandre pudendis. 
Id. Nam libi, Thymbre, caput Evandrius abstulit ensis* 
Phaedr. A corcodilis ne rapiantur, traditum est. (Iamb.) 

1. Ramsay's Lat. Pros., p. 161. — Compare the remark of, Hermann • 
" Quam tmesin vocant grammalici, ea et natura et usu prior fuit quam 
cvvdeotc. Sed nimirum, quoniam recentior consuetudo, ad quam omnia 
exigebant, ovvBeolv usurpabat, tmesin istam ut discessionem a communi 
usu animadvertere jubebant." (De Emend. Rat., G. (r.,p. 117.) Con- 
sult also, on the subject of tmesis in early Greek, the remarks of Mat- 
thias (G. G., vol. 2, p. 1398, 3d Germ. ed.\ Kiihner {G. G., vol. 2, p. 
313), and Nagelsbach {Anmerk. zu Ilias, Excurs. 16). 

2. 'AvrideGie, " a substitution," from avrc and tWi?/lu. 

3. Meradeaic, " a transposition," from fierd and tlOtj/il, 

4. Ramsay's Lat. Pros., p. 162. 

L2 



126 



FIGURES OF PROSODY. 



IV. The instances, however, that are given of metathesis 
are merely antiquated forms of expression. Thus, Evandre 
and Thymbre are nothing more than vocatives regularly- 
formed from old nominatives in us ; and corcodilus is mere- 
ly another form for crocodilus, obtained through the Greek. 1 



X. Systole. 2 

I. Systole is defined to be the shortening of a syllable, 
which, from its natural quantity or from position, ought to 
be long. 

II. No such figure, however, as systole in reality exists ; 
and we must not suppose that the poets could shorten syl- 
lables at their own caprice. 

III. Under systole are placed, for example, those com- 
pounds of jacio which sometimes drop the j. Thus, 

For abjicit, abjici, we find abicit, abici. 
ddjicit, adjici, " adicit, adtci. 
conjicit, " conicit. 

Injicit, " inicit. 

objicis, objicit, " obicis, obicit. 
subjicit, subjici) " subicit, subici. 

IV. These, however, are by no means cases of systole or 
poetic license, but are, in reality, old forms of the language. 3 

1. The Greeks appear to have said both KpoKodeiTtoc and KopKodeiXoc, 
as they said Kpadla and Kapd'ia, uparepoe and Kaprepog, and as the Scotch 
use indifferently frith and firth. {Ramsay, L. P., p. 162.) — Gudius, 
indeed, maintains that the form corcodilus is more correct than crocodi- 
lus. His words are as follows : " Testari possum, in optimis et sep- 
tingentorum, et amplius annorum membranis, non tantum apud poetas, 
iis in locis, ubi metri ratio id postulat, sed etiam in prosa apud oratores 
et philosophos reperiri Corcodilus. Neque his obstabit, quod belluje is- 
tius Niliacae nomen a Graecis Latini acceperint, qui KpoKodetTioc scrip- 
serint. Sic enim saepe vocabula, quae a Grascis habent Latini, immuta- 
runt. Sic tardus a fipadvc, etc. Eodem modo ndprepoc et tcparepoc. 
Non negandum vero est, poetas, quoties prima foret corripienda, ad im- 
itationem Graecorum scripsisse Crocodilus. Sic Hor., Epod., 12, 11: 
Postea unice tandem obtinuit ut scriberetur Crocodilus." (Gud. ad 
Phadr., 1, 25, 4.) 

2. ZvotoXtj, h a drawing together," from gvv and gteWcj. 

3. Ramsay's hat. Pros., p. 136. —Parcus, Lex. Crit. — Noris, Cen» 



FIGURES OF PROSODY. 



127 



V. Under systole we also find ranked the shortening of 
the penultimate syllable in the third person plural of per- 
fects ; as, dederunt, tulerunt, steterunt, &c. It is probable, 
however, that we have here the ancient pronunciation ; at 
least the analogy of the language is in favour of it. 1 

VI. To systole is also attributed the quantity of the ini- 
tial syllable in aperio, dmitto, hodie, and the like, which, 
being compounded, as is said, of ad and pario, ob and mitto, 
hoc and die, &c, ought to have the first syllable long. It 
will be sufficient, however, to observe, in reply, that the 
quantity of these and similar words is invariable, and must 
therefore have been the result of the ordinary pronunciation, 
and not of any poetic license. 2 

VII. A similar remark may be made with regard to viden' 
for videsne. In the latter of these two forms the syllable es 

otaph. Pis., diss. 4, c. 4. — Aul. Gell., 16, 7. The last-named writer 
blames Laberius for using coicior, on the ground that it was " obsoletum, 
aut ex sordidiore usu vulgi depromptum" 

1. By some these anomalies have been attributed to the mistakes of 
transcribers, who, it is supposed, may have written erunt instead of erant, 
or in some cases erint, both which terminations are occasionally found 
in MSS. Thus, in the following line from Virgil's Eclogues (4, 61), 
" Matri longa decern tulerunt fastidia menses we find three readings 
in the MSS., tulerunt, tulerant, and tulerint. If we examine, however, 
with care the different examples adduced, it will be found that in not a 
few of these the indicative perfect cannot be struck out without great vi- 
olence ; nor can we fail to perceive that a transcriber, when copying a 
MS., if he came to such a quantity as tulerunt or steterunt, which he 
might consider anomalous, would be much more likely to change it to 
tulerint or tulerant, than to transform one of these into tulerunt, in vio- 
lation of all ordinary rules. (Ramsay's hat. Pros. p. 105.) — Others, 
again, have boldly contended that the poets who used these forms were 
inadvertently guilty of a breach of prosody. There might be some plau- 
sibility in this assertion, if the instances of this pretended violation of rule 
were only few in number. It happens, however, that in Lucretius there 
are no less than 15, in Virgil five, in Propertius five, in Ovid 19, &c. 
It is idle, therefore, to talk in such a case of "inadvertent" errors. — The 
supposition in the text, that the penult of the perfect, in the third person 
plural, was originally short, seems much more probable, and coincides also 
with the general rule of e short before r, or, in other words, with the 
analogy of the language ; and, in confirmation of this opinion, we may 
cite the words of the grammarian Diomedes : " Fere in tertio ordine 
plerumque veneres tertia persona finitiva temporis perfecti, numeri plu- 
ralis, E mediam vocalem corripiunt, quasi legerunt, emerunt," &e. 

2. Ramsay's hat. Pros., p. 156 



128 



FIGURES OF PROSODY. 



is uniformly long ; whereas in viden' the e is as uniformly 
short. The reason probably is this, that in viden\ as well 
as in satin' and ain\ the pronunciation was so rapid that the 
voice was not permitted to dwell upon any of the syllables. 1 



XL Diastole. 2 

I. Diastole (or Ectasis 3 ) is defined to be the lengthening 
of a syllable naturally short. Like systole, however, it is 
merely an imaginary figure. 

II. To diastole is attributed the lengthening of the first 
syllable in 'Italia, Pnamides, 'Arabia, Sic, from ~Italus % 
Priamus, ~ Arabs, Sic But the true reason is, that such 
forms as Italia, Priamides, Arabia, Sic, could not have 
been used in dactylic verse unless the first syllable were 
lengthened. This license was therefore assumed by the 
Roman poets, in imitation of the Greeks. 4 

III. To diastole is also attributed the lengthening of the 
first syllable in certain compounds of Re. Thus, we find 

rellgio, reUgione, religionum, religiosa. 

reliquice, reUquzarum, reliquias. 

recidere, rccidimus. 

reldtum, remotum. 

rcducit, reducunt, reducere. 
To these must be added the three preterites reperit, repulit, 
retulit, and the tenses formed from them, repereris, repere- 
rit ; repuleris, repulerint ; retuleram, retulerat, retuleris, re~ 
tulerit, &c. 4 

IV. Various explanations have been given of this anom- 
aly. According to some, such words as religio, reliquice, 
recidere, could not find a place in dactylic verse, unless the 
first syllable were made long ; but, although this is true as 
far as these words are concerned, it will by no means ap- 

1. Ramsaifs Lai. Pros., p. 15G. 

2. AtaGTo?.7] y "a separation," "a drawing out," from did and oreXXu, 

3. 'Ektcglc, " a stretching out," from in and telvlj. 

4. Ramsay's Lat. Pros., p. 139, scq. 



FIGURES OF PROSODY. 



129 



ply to relatus, remotus, reditcit, &c, which are generally- 
found with the first syllable short ; nor will it explain the 
quantity of reperit, repulit, retulit, which is invariable. 1 

V. Other scholars, following the old grammarians, con- 
tent themselves with doubling the consonant after re in all 
cases where that syllable is long, and write relligio, rel- 
liquia, redduco, remmotus, <fcc, but this at best is but an 
evasion of the difficulty. 

VI. A more plausible explanation is grounded upon the 
supposition that the ancient form of re was red, as it appears 
in reddo ; for it cannot be said that the d is here inserted 
for the sake of euphony, as may be urged in regard to such 
words as redeo, redimo, and the like. In this way the ori- 
ginal form of refero, recido, removeo, reduco, &c, was red- 
fero, redcido, redmoveo, redduco, &c. ; and, although the d 
was afterward dropped, the poets, especially the earlier 
ones, considered themselves entitled to make use of either 
form, as best suited their convenience. 

VII. This may be the true account of the matter in most 
instances, but it certainly does not apply to the preterites 
reperit, repulit, retulit, which ought always to be written 
with the consonant doubled, being in reality contractions 
for the reduplications repeperit, repepulit, retetulit. This is 
the account given by Priscian 2 with regard to repperit, and 
it applies equally to the other two. 3 

VIII. The first syllable in quatuor, when made long, has 
also been regarded as an instance of diastole, since quat- 
uor is found short in Ennius, and its derivatives quater, 
quaterni, quadrupes, &c, have the a short. But Gesner 
and Vossius correctly maintain, that Virgil should be made 
the standard of pronunciation with regard to the word in 



1. The old reading in Catullus (66, 35), " Si reditum retulisset is, 
ant in tempore longo, et" is now changed in the best editions to " St 
reditum tetulisset," &c. 

2. Vol 1, p. 509, ed. Krehl. 

3. RamscnSst hat. Pros , p. 140. 



130 



FIGURES OF PROSODY. 



question, and that the first sellable should be considered 
long, as he uniformly makes it. 

XII. Synapheia. 1 

I. Synapheia is the connecting of verses together, so as 
to make them run on in continuation, as if the matter were 
not divided into separate verses. 

II. By this arrangement, the initial syllable of a succeed- 
ing verse has an influence on the final syllable of the pre- 
ceding, affecting it by the concourse of consonants, by ec- 
thlipsis, and by synalcepha. 

III. Synapheia chiefly prevailed in anapaestic and Ionic 
a minore verse, in which strict attention was paid to its ob- 
servance. Its occurrence in other kinds of verse was occa- 
sional and limited, and in these kinds it was seldom resort- 
ed to by good writers. 

IV. The following anapaestic lines furnish examples of 
the effect of synapheia : 

Praiceps | sylvas || mdntes\que fuglt || 

Citus Act\aidn, || agilis\que magis || 

Pede per \ saltus || et sax\a vagus || 

Mctuit | motas || Zephyrts | plumas. \\ (Seneca.) 
The short final syllables of fugit, magis, and vagus here 
become long by position before their own final, and the 
initial, consonants in the lines that immediately follow. 

V. Among other instances of synapheia, the following 
may be enumerated : 

Virg. Inseritur vero etf&tu nucis arbutus korril&a 
Et steriles platani malos gessere valentes. 

Virg. Jactemur, doceas : ignari hominumque locorumlque 
Erramus, vento hue, et vast is fiuctibus acti. 

Horat. Dissidens plebi, numero beato\rum 
Eximit Virtus, populumque falsis. 



1. Swa^eta, " a junction," from cvv andd^rrw. 



FEET. 



131 



Horat. Cur facunda p arum deco\xo 

Inter verba cadit lingua silentio ? 
In the first of these examples, the first line ends with horn, 
and the i, being regarded as the final syllable of the verse, 
becomes long. The syllable da combines with Et in the 
second line, and by synapheia and synaloepha we have oVet 
as the initial syllable of this line. 

In like manner, the second line of the second example 
commences with qiferramus, the second line of the third 
with r'eximit, and the second of the fourth with r'inter. In 
r'eximit, it will be observed, an ecthlipsis operates. 

VI. In most cases of synapheia (except in anapaestic and 
Ionic a minor e measures) there is little or no pause at the 
end of the line. 

VII. The rule of synapheia is carefully observed by the 
Greek tragic writers in their anapaestic systems ; and, as 
far as our authorities go, by the Latins also. The law of 
synapheia was discovered by Bentley. 1 

SECTION XXVII. 
OF FEET. 

I. A Foot is a combination of two or more syllables, with 
due regard to their times or quantities. 

II. Feet in metre are so called, because by their aid the 
voice, as it were, moves along through the verse in a meas- 
ured pace. 2 

III. Feet are divided into simple and compound. Of the 
simple feet, four are of two syllables, and eight of three. 
The compound feet are sixteen in number, and contain each 
four syllables. 

1. Dissertation upon Phalaris, p. 190, ed. Dyce. — For farther obser- 
vations respecting synapheia, consult remarks on the Anapaestic and 
Sapphic measures. 

2. " Pes vocatur, sive quia in percussione meirica pedis pulsus poni- 
tur tolliturque ; seu quia, ut nos pedibus ingredimur atque progredimur, 
ita et versus per hos pt hs metricos procedit et scandit." (Mar. Vict., 
p. 2485.) 



132 



FEET. 



SIMPLE FEET OF TWO SYLLABLES. 

I. The Spondee (Spondazus) consists of two long sylla 
bles, as omncs, and derives its name from onovdrj, Si a liba* 
Hon,' 1 because it was much used in the slow, solemn chant 
which accompanied a sacrifice. 1 

II. The Pyrrhich (Pyrrhichius) consists of two short 
syllables, as deus, and was so called from the martial Pyr- 
rhic dance (7Tvppi%r\), which was performed in quick time, 
and in the measure adapted to which this foot predomina- 
ted. 2 

III. The Trochee (Trochceus) consists of one long and 
one short syllable, as servat, and takes its name from rpe~ 
%(x>, " to run" or from rpoxog, " a wheel" in consequence 
of the tripping character which it communicated to the 
verses in which it prevailed. 3 It was also called by the 
Greeks x°P Ei0 ^ (from %6poc, " a dance"), and by the Lat- 
ins Chorius or Chorceus, because it is well adapted to dan- 
cing. 4 

IV. The Iambus (Iambus) consists of one short and one 

1. 'O onovdaloc, ek Svo fianpibv GvyicEifiEvoc- EK?a/6v 6e ovtuc, 6ti ev 
rale cnrovdaic, ag ettolovvto rrpbg Tovg -&£ovg, toiovtu /uerpu kxpcovTO' 
k. r. 1. (Schol., Hephccst., p. 82, 4.) According to Diomedes (fib. 3, 
p. 473), this foot was called by Numa Pompilius Pontificius, from its 
being employed in the music of the Salic hymns. (Consult Terent. 
Maur., ed. Santcn., p. 62.) 

2. HoTieuiKT) de 6okeI elvac tj Tcvppixv- "RvottXol yap avrr/v rcaldeg 
bpxovvrai. Tdxovg de del tl) tcoTie/jLL) tig to Siukelv, kclI elg to ijTTUfie- 
vovg (pevyeiv, p?oe [ieveiv, find' aidELGBat Kctnovg eIvo.l. (Athenaus, 14, 
p. 629, c.) — Another derivation of the name is from Pyrrhus, the son of 
Achilles, " qui crebris et citis exsultalionibus bis breviter prominenlem 
clypeum genibus incumbens, et, per hunc, terror em hostibus immittcns, 
inferebatur y sicul versus illustrat, vnacKidLa irpofiifjuvroc." (Diomed., 
3, p. 471.) — The Pyrrhich was also called Tjyeucov, " the leader," because 
by some it was ranked first among metrical feet. Another name was 
AiBpaxvg, which the Latins rendered by Bibrevis. It was likewise call- 
ed Hapiajj,6oc (Pariambus), " quod minus habeat ununrf tcmpus ab Iam- 
bo : rcapa enim Groeci minus dicunt." {Mar. Vict., p. 2489. — Compare 
Schol. ad Hephccst., p. II.) 

:i. Mar. Yietorm , p. 2487. — Schol., Hephast , p, 82. — Plotius, p. 
2(>'25. — Diomed., p. 474. — Sa/iten., ad Terent. Maur., p. 69. 

<1. The names Chorius (or Chorazus) and Trochaus were also given 
to the tribrach. 



FEET. 



133 



long syllable, as pios. Most of the old grammarians would 
derive it from Iambe, the name of a damsel, the slave of 
Eleusinian Celeus, who amused Ceres by dancing and 
song when mourning the loss of her daughter Proserpina. 1 

SIMPLE FEET OF THREE SYLLABLES. 

I. The Molossus (Molossus) consists of three long syl- 
lables, as delectant, and derived its name, according to the 
scholiast on Hephasstion, from Molossus, son of Pyrrhus 
and Andromache, who repeated hymns, in which this was 
the prevailing foot, at the shrine of Dodona in Epirus. 2 

II. The Tribrach (Tribrachys) consists of three short 
syllables, as melius, whence its name is derived {rpeig, 
" three" and (3paxvg, " short"). It is also called Chorius? 
and sometimes Trochceus. 4, 

III. The Dactyl (Dactylus) consists of one long and 
two short syllables, as carmina, and derives its name from 
ddttrvXog, " a finger" because each finger consists of one 
long joint and two short ones. 5 

IV. The Anapaest (Anapcestus) consists of two short 
syllables and one long, as animos, and it is thus denomina- 

1. Plotius, p. 2625.— Schol, Nicand. Alex., v. 130, p. 139.-— Schol., 
Hephazst., p. 81. — Eustath. ad Od., 11, 277. — Other derivations may be 
found in the notes of Santenius to Terentianus Maurus, p. 67, seqq. 

2. Others say that it was named from the Molossi in Epirus, who 
used it in their war-songs. (Diomed., p. 475.) It was known also by 
several other names, such as Vortumnus, Extensipes, Hippius, Chaon- 
ius. {Diomed., I c.) ^ 

3. Schol, Hephast., p. 158. 

4. Quintil, 9, 4. — Terent. Maur., v. 1446. — Santen., ad loc. 

5. Plotius, p. 2625. — Cledonius, p. 1885. — Victorinus, p. 2488, quo- 
ted, among other authorities, by Santen (ad Terent. Maur., v. 1406). — 
Diomedes gives another derivation for the name : " ab Idazis Dactylis. 
Hi namque in insula Creta Jovem custodiendo, ne vagitu se parvulus 
proderct, lusus excogitato genere, clypeolis ceneis inter se concurrentes, 
tinnitu axis illisi rhythmica etiam pedis Dactyli compositione celavere 
vocem tnfantis." To the same effect the scholiast on Hephaestion re- 
marks : tj anb tlov AaKTvXov, ovg €7Ti?,a6ojLLev7} rrjc -yrjg avfjuev i] 'Fea, 

ol dsKa bvrec, aal tovtu r<p usXei adovrec nal bpxovuevoi, rbv 

"Kpovov 7]Tidrcov. (Schol , Hcphccst., p. 82.) The dactyl was also call- 
ed Herdus, from "its being particularly employed in relating the exploit* 
of heroes. {Aristot., lihet., 3, 8. — Cic, de Orat., 3, 47, seq.) 

M 



*34 



FEET. 



ted from the ^erb dvanaLG), " to strike in reverse order," be* 
cause the order of its syllables is directly the reverse of that 
observed in the dactyl. 1 Hence the anapaest is also called 
'AvTtddrtTvXog (Antidactylus) by the Greeks, and Retroac- 
tus by the Latins. 2 

V. The Bacchius (Barcx^og) consists of one short sylla- 
ble followed by two long ones, as dolor es, and it is so call- 
ed from its having been frequently used by worshippers in 
the hymns to Bacchus. 3 

VI. The Antibacchius ('Aim6a/e%eZoc) 4 consists of two 
long syllables followed by a short one, as pelluntur, and it 
takes its name from its opposition to the Bacchius. 

VII. The Amphimacer ('AfMpifiaicpog), or Cretic (Creti- 
cus), is composed of one short syllable between two long, 
or, in other words, of a long, a short, and a long, as casli- 
tas. Both names are mentioned by Quintilian, who makes 
the second, however, the more usual one. The former ot 
these two appellations comes from dfMpl, " on both sides,'' 9 
and fiatcpog, " long," while the latter is said to have been 
given to this foot from its resembling in time the blows 
struck by the Corybantes in Crete on their brazen shields, 
to drown the cries of the infant Jove, lest these should 
reach the ears of Saturn. 5 

VIII. The Amphibrach {Amphibrachys) consists of one 
long syllable between two short, or, in other words, a short, 



1. " Dictus napa rov avanaUiv, Kara to avdnaTiiv avriKpovetv npbc 
rbv AuktvXov, quia recurrendo repercutiens Dactylum sono reciproco oh- 
loquitur ei per antistrophen." (Diomed., p. 475.) 

2. Diomcd., 1. c. — Quintil., 9, 4, 81. 

3. A great deal of confusion exists among the old grammarians with 
regard to the bacchius and antibacchius. — Terentianus Maurus, for ex- 
ample, makes the former consist of two long syllables followed by a 

short ( ~), and the antibacchius the reverse of this (~ ). The 

common distinction, however, as given in the text, has the authority of 
Quintilian (9, 4, 82) in its favour. (Consult Sanlen. ad Tcrent, Maur., 
I c.) 

4. Called also Palinbacchius. 

5. Compare note 5 page 133, where a similar etymology is given for 
the term dactylus. 



FEET* 



133 



a long, anU a short; as, amare. It derives its name from 
d[i<pL, " on both sides" and /3pa%vg, " short" 1 



COMPOUND FEET. 

I. The Dispondjeus, or Double Spondee, is composed of 
four long syllables, or, in other words, of two spondees ; 
as, infiriitis. 

II. The ProceleusmatIcus consists of two pyrrhichs, or 
of four short syllables ; as, horninibus. It is said to have 
taken its name from fceXevafia, the word of command given 
by the ballet-master, in double quick time, to accelerate the 
step. 2 

III. The Dii'ambus, or Double Iambus, consists of two 
iambi ; as, severitas. 

IV. The Ditrochj2Us, or Dichor^eus, consists of two 
trochees ; as, permdnere. 

V. The Ionicus Major (or a Majore) consists of a spon- 
dee and a pyrrhich, that is, of two long syllables followed 
by two short ; as, calcaribus. 

VI. The Ionicus Minor (or a Mindre) consists of a pyr- 
rhich and a spondee, that is, of two short followed by two 
long ; as, properabant. 

The two feet just described are called Ionic, either from 
their having been Tavourites with the Ionians, or from Ion, 
their inventor. 3 One is called Ionicus Major, or a majore, 
because it begins with the greater quantity, that is, with 
two long syllables ; and the other is called Ionicus Minor, 



1. The amphibrach is also called Amphibrevis. (Diomed., 3, p. 475.) 
Victorinus styles it Mesites (p. 1956). 

2. 'HyeiTo 6e icad' laaarov x^pov elg avqp, dg evedidov rolg aKkoig ra 
Trig bpxwGeog o-xvpara nptirog, eldcxpoptiv rag izoTiefiiKag kol Gvvrovovg 
KLVTjGEig ev rolg irpoKe'XevGfiaTLKOig (bg ra iroX^a pvO/iolg. (Dion. Hal., 
Ant. Rom., 1. 7, p. 476.) For some learned observations on the proce- 
leusmaticus, consult Santen. ad Terent. Maur., v. 1460. 

3. Gesner thinks that the Ionic mode of dancing was adapted to these 
two feet, whence their name. (Thesaur. L. L., s. v.) Plotius, on the 
contrary, ref:iarks, " Ionici ab Ion &inv entore suo dicti" (p. 2626). 



136 



FEET. 



or a minore, because it begins with the less quantity, that 
is, with two short syllables. 1 

VII. The Choriambus consists of a choraeus or trochae- 
us and an iambus, that is, of two short syllables between 
two long ; as, nobilitas. 2 

VIII. The Antispast (Antispastus) consists of an iam- 
bus and a trochee, that is, of two long syllables between 
two short ; as, secundare. It derives its name from clvtl- 
OTt&G), " to draw asunder" two long syllables being separa- 
ted or drawn asunder by two short ones. 3 

IX. The Epitritus Primus, or First Epitrit, is compo- 
sed of an iambus and spondee, and consists of one short 
syllable and three long ; as, salutantes. 

X. The Epitritus Secundus, or Second Epitrit, is 
composed of a trochee, and a spondee, and consists of a 
long, a short, and then two long syllables ; as, concitati.. 

XI. The Epitritus Tertius, or Third Epitrit, is com- 
posed of a spondee and an iambus, and consists of two 
long syllables, followed by a short and a long ; as, commu- 
nicant. 

XII. The Epitritus Quartus, or Fourth Epitrit, is 
composed of a spondee and a trochee, and consists of three 
long syllables and one short ; as, incantare. 

1. The Greek names for these two feet are o arcb fielCovoc 'Iovlkoc 
and 6 a?r' hldacovog 'Icjvlkoc. — The greater Ionic was also called Per- 
sicus, because Persian histories were written in this measure. Hepoi- 
koc de, Sta to rag lOTOpiac tclc TlepaiKac tovtcj tgj fierpa) yeypatyBai. 
(Schol., Hephczst., p. 82.) The minor Ionic was likewise styled Hypo- 
cyclius ('T7tokvk?iloc. — Schol. , Hcphccst., I. c). 

2. The choriambus was also called Cyclius (Kvk?uoc), and Hypobac- 
chius CYKoSaKxeioc), and likewise Bacchius a Trochao (Ba/cj^eZoc Kara 
Tpoxalov). It was probably used in the circular dances around the altar 
of Bacchus, whence the names just mentioned, which are given by the 
scholiast on Hephaestion (p. 83). Compare Santcn. ad Tcrent. Maur., 
v. 1487. 

3. The antispast was also called Spondceacus (ZTTOvdataKoc) and Ba/c- 
Xeloc Kara 'lafi6ov. (Schol., Hephcest., p. 83.) — This foot appears to 
have been a favourite with the prose writers. Vossius states (hist., 
Oral., 4, 4) that he counted in Cicero's oration for Archias twentv-six 
instances of an a»»t spost af 'he end of a clause. Compare Prolms, p. 
14&2, and Diomufes, |» 4ii7 



FEET. 



137 



These four last-mentioned feet derive their name from 
the word errlrplrog, which denotes a combination or pro- 
portion containing some particular number, together with 
a third part thereof. Thus, in the present instance we 
have three^ long syllables, which may be regarded in one 
sense as the basis of the foot, and besides these we have 
another syllable, a short one, from the relative position of 
which last in each of the four feet are derived the names 
of first, second, third, and fourth epitrits. In other words, 
we have three syllables, with a third of these, namely, one 
syllable, added thereto (rpCrrj-errL). 1 

XIII. The P.eon Primus, or First Pceon, is composed 
of a trochee and a pyrrhich, and consists of one long syl- 
lable followed by three short ; as, conftcere. 

XIV. The PjEon Secundus, or Second Paon, is compo- 
sed of an iambus and a pyrrhich, and consists of a short 
and a long, and then two short syllables ; as, resolvere. 

XV. The PiEON Tertius, or Third P<eon, is composed 
of a pyrrhich and a trochee, and consists of two short syl- 
lables followed by a long and a short ; as, socidre. 

XVI. The PJeon Quartus, or Fourth P&oti, is compo- 
sed of a pyrrhich and an iambus, and consists of three short 
syllables and one long ; as, celeritas. 

The Pceon, according to some authorities, 2 derived its 
name 'from Paeon, an ancient poet, its alleged inventor. 
According to other and better accounts, however, this foot 
was so denominated from its having been particularly used 
in the hymns to Apollo. 3 Hence also, besides the appel- 

1. Cicero renders krc'iTpiTOc, which Plato uses in his Timaeus (p. 36, 
a., ed. St.cph,), by the Latin sesquitertius (Tim., c. 7), a term likewise 
employed by Augustinus (de Mus., 2, p. 76). — Aulus Gellius (18, 14) 
defines an epitritus as follows : " Epitritus est qui habet totum aliquem 
numerum, et ejusdcm partem tertiam." (Compare Macrob., in Somn. 
Scip., 2, 2.) The scholiast on Hephaestion has also the following: 
, Y l iTLTpi.Tog apidjubc Ziejerai. 6 apid^iov tlvcl e^wv ev kavru, kcil to rpirov 

TOVTOV. 

2. Flotius, p. 2626.— Isidor., Orig., 1, 16, p. 830. 

3. Oi eic 'AtzoXIuvcl de ypatyovres, t& ttoSI tovtu, tu IIclluvi, XP& V ' 

M 2 



138 FEET. 

lation of Paeon, it received that of Paan. 1 — The paeon is 
directly opposed to the epitrit. In the latter there is one 
short syllable with three long ones ; in the former, one long 
with three short. The first, second, third, and fourth paeons 
are so named from *he relative situation of the long sylla- 
ble in each. 



To the list of compound feet are sometimes added the 
following : 

1/ The Dochmius (Aox(uog), composed of an antispast 
and a long syllable, and consisting of five syllables, namely, 
a short, two long, a short, and a long ; as, aberr aver ant? 

II. The Mesomacer (Meao^a/cpog), composed of a pyr- 
rhich and a dactyl, and containing also five syllables, 
namely, two short, a long, and two short ; as, avidissimus. 3 



The following table exhibits the feet, both simple and com' 
pound, in the order in which they have just been described. 

SIMPLE FEET OF TWO SYLLABLES. 

i 1. Spondee 

f 2. Pyrrhich ~ w 

i 3. Trochee . . . . . ... . — 

1 4. Iambus . . . . . . . ~ — 

rat. (Schol., Hephast., p. 12.) Compare the remark of another scho- 
liast : rove naiavag adovTec kxpCovTO avroig [Hcu&ai] oi naTiaiol. 
(SchoL, Hermog., p. 394.) 

1. Aristot., Rhet., 3, 8. — Cic., de Oral., 1, 59. — Santen. ad Terent. 
Maur., v. 1532. 

2. The Dochmius takes its name from doxfuoq, " obliquus" in allu- 
sion to the irregularity that marks the order or succession of its compo- 
nent times ; or, in the words of an ancient writer, diu to itoiti'ikov Kal 
avdfioiov, Kal to fiy naf evOv &Eopeio6aL ttjv pvOfiOTrouav. (Aristid., dc 
Mus., 1, p. 39.) — This foot is sometimes called Dochimus, but incor- 
rectly. (Erncsti ad Cic., Oral., 64. — Santen. ad Terent. Maur., v. 
1551, p. 130, scq.) ' 

3. From fieooq, " m ddlc," and fxaKpog, " long," the name being de- 
rived from the position of the long syllable, in the middle, between two 
ehor" on each side. . 



FEET. 



SIMPLE FEET OF THREE SYLLABLES. 

1. Molossus 

2. Tribrach 

3. Dactyl 

4. Anapaest 

5. Bacchius ........ 

6. Antibacchius 

7. Amphimacer 

8. Amphibrach 



COMPOUND FEET. 
FOUR 17ITH THE SAME FOOT DOUBLED, 
j I. DlSPOND^EUS 

> 2. Proceleusmatic js 

j 3. DlTROCHiEUS . . . . . 

1 4. DlIAMBUS 



four of contrary feet. 

1. Greater Ionic .... 

2. Minor Ionic . . >. 

3. Choriambus 

4. Antispast 



FOUR IN WHICH LONG TIMES EXCEED. 

fl. First Epitrit 

J 2. Second Epitrit 

| 3. Third Epitrit 

V4. Fourth Epitrit 



FOUR IN WHICH SHORT TIMES EXCEED. 

r l> First P^eon 

2. Second P^eon 

3. Third P^eon . . . . 

^4. Fourth P^eon 



TWO OTHER COMPOUND FEET, OF FIVE SYLLABLES, 
j 1 DOCHMIUS ....... 

' 2. Mesomacer ....... ^ 



140 



METRE. 



SECTION XXVIII. 
OF METRE. 

L Metre, in the general acceptation of the word, signi- 
fies a combination of verses belonging to the same or to 
different classes, which succeed each other in a fixed or- 
der. When we speak of Dactylic metre, Iambic metre, &c, 
the word metre is employed in this general sense, and is 
then synonymous with verse'. 

II. But a metre, in the technical and restricted sense, 
signifies either a single foot in a verse, or a combination of 
two consecutive feet, according to circumstances. 

III. In Latin poetry, the metres employed are the follow- 
ing : 

1. Dactylic. 

2. Anapaestic. 

3. Iambic. 

4. Trochaic. 

5. Choriambic. 

6. Ionic 

IV. These metres have received their respective names 
from the frequent recurrence in them of some particular 
foot ; and it has been supposed that each species was ori- 
ginally made up of those feet only from which it is denom- 
inated, but that others, equal in time, were afterward ad- 
mitted under certain restrictions. 

V. Metres, however, are often called also after the name 
of some celebrated poet, who used a particular species of 
verse ; as, Sapphic, Anacreontic, Hipponactic, &c. 

VI. Metres are likewise classified according to the num- 
ber of feet or measures which they contain. Thus, a verso 

of seven metres is called Heptameter. 
" six " " Hexameter. 

" jive " " Pentameter. 



METRE. 



141 



of four metres is called Tetrameter. 
" three " " Trimeter. 

" £uw " " Dimeter. 

" one " " Monometer. 

VII. In Anapcestic, Iambic, and Trochaic verses, a metre 
consists of two feet ; but in the other kinds of verse a sin- 
gle foot constitutes a metre. 

VIII. Thus, in Anapcestic, Iambic, and Trochaic versifica- 
tion, 



Monometer contains two 


feet. 


Dimeter 


a 


four 




Trimeter 


tt 


six 


it 


Tetrameter 


a 


eight 


a 


Pentameter 


tt 


ten 


tt 


Hexameter 


a 


twelve 


u 


Heptameter 1 


tt 


fourteen 


a 



On the other hand, in Dactylic, Choriambic, and all other 
measures except the three just mentioned, 
a Monometer contains one foot. 
Dimeter 
Trimeter 
Tetrameter 
Pentameter 
Hexameter 
Heptameter 

IX. A combination of two consecutive feet is sometimes 
termed a dipodia (dmodca) or syzygy (av^vyCa). Most 
usually, however, the combination of two dissyllabic feet 
is called a dipodia, and that of two trisyllabic, or a dissyl- 
labic and trisyllabic, a syzygy. 

X. The conjunction of two feet is often likewise termed 
a base. 2 

1. Some of these, of course, do not occur. They are given, however, 
to illustrate the rule laid down. 

2. Diomed yp. bQl,—Mar. Vict, p. 2489. 



it 


two 


feet. 


it 


three 


tt 


a 


four 


tt 


tt 


five 


a 


u 


six 


it 


tt 


seven 


a 



142 



ISOCHRONOUS FEET. 



SECTION XXIX. 

OF ISOCHRONOUS FEF]T. 

I. By Isochronous (or even-timed}) feet are meant those 
that are interchangeable in metre. 

II. In order to ascertain what feet are thus interchange- 
able, recourse must be had to the arsis and thesis. 

III. As has already been observed, 2 that part of the foot 
which receives the ictus, the stress of the voice, or beat of 
the time, is called arsis, or " elevation." The rest of the . 
foot is termed thesis, or " depression." 

IV. The natural place of the arsis is the long syllable of 
the foot, and hence in the iambus it falls on the second syl- 
lable ; in the trochee, on the first ; while the spondee and 
tribrach leave its place alike uncertain. 

V. The fundamental foot of a verse, however, deter- 
mines the arsis for the other feet, and hence the spondee, 
in iambic and anapaestic verse, has the arsis on the second 
syllable, but in trochaic and dactylic on the first. 

VI. So, again, the tribrach, when it stands for the iam- 
bus, is to be pronounced w w o ; but when it stands for 
the trochee, ^ ^ ^. 

VII. Now the ancients considered those feet only iso- 
chronous which were capable of being divided into parts 
that were equal in time ; so that a long syllable should 
have either a corresponding long syllable or two short 
ones. 3 

VIII. The following scheme will exemplify this more 
clearly, the place of the arsis being denoted, as above (VI.), 
by a mark resembling that of the acute accent. 



Iambus . 
Tribrach 



Trochee 
Tribrach 



1. "looc, " equal " and XP° V0 C> " time." 

2. Page 106, note 1. 

3. Dawes, Misc. Crit., p. 62, seqq., ed. Kidd. 



ISOCHRONOUS FEET. 



143 



Dactyl . . — I ^ ^ ( Anapaest . . w w I -l- 
Spondee . — | — ( Spondee . . — | 

IX. By this we perceive that the iambus and the trochee 
are each interchangeable with the tribrach, and that the 
dactyl, spondee, and anapaest are interchangeable with each 
other. 

X. In like manner it will appear that the iambus and the 
trochee are not interchangeable, and that an iambus never 
admits a trochee into iambic verse, nor a trochee an iambu*? 
into trochaic verse. Thus, 



Iambus 
Trochee 




Here it will be perceived that the long syllable of the iam- 
bus has neither a correspondent long syllable in the tro- 
chee, nor two short ones in the same. And the case is 
precisely similar with the long syllable of the trochee, 
which has nothing to correspond to it in the iambus. 
Hence the two feet are not interchangeable or isochronous. 1 
XI. Again, it may be shown in the same way that the 
spondee and amphibrach are also not interchangeable. 
Thus, 

Spondee ... — — 
Amphibrach ^ — ^ 

Here, in whatsoever way the amphibrach be divided, each 
division contains either more or less than the correspond- 
ent part of the spondee. Hence the two feet are not iso- 
chronous ; and, for the same reason, the amphibrach is not 
isochronous with the dactyl or anapaest. 

1. For this reason the scholiast on Hephaestion calls the iambic and 
trochaic measures avrnradovvra fiirpa, and Tricha remarks, avrtnaBrjc 
teal olov vttevclvt'loc tg) la/ido) 6 rpoxatog. (Schol. ad Hephast., p. 76. 
— Trich., de Metr., p. 9, ed. Herm.— Compare Dawev, Misc. Crit., p. 
103, ed. Kidd.) 



144 VERSE. 

SECTION XXIX. 

OF VERSE. 

I. A Verse is a certain number of feet disposed in a reg- 
ular order, and forming a line of poetry. 

II. A Hemistich 1 is, properly speaking, a half verse ; the 
name, however, is commonly applied to either portion of a 
hexameter line divided at the penthemimeris ; as, 

JEre ciere viros, || Martemque accendere cantu. 

III. Scanning is the dividing of a verse into the feet of 
which it is composed, and the assigning of their proper 
quantity tp the respective syllables of each foot. 

IV. Verses are denominated Acatalectic, Catalectic, 
Brachycatalectic, Hypercatalectic (or Hypermeter), and 
Acephalous. 

V. An A catalectic verse is one that is complete in all its 
parts, and comes to a full termination ; as the following, 
which is Iambic Dimeter Acatalectic. 2 

Musce I Jovis |i sunt fil\Tai. || 

VI. A Catalectic verse is one that wants a syllable at the 
end to complete the measure ; as the following, which is 
Iambic Dimeter Catalectic. 2 

Muslb I Jovem || cane\bant. — j| 

VII. A Brachycatalectic verse is that which wants two 
syllables at the end to complete the measure ; as the fol- 
lowing, which is Iambic Dimeter Brachycatalectic} 

Mus~a> | Jovis || gnatce | || 

1. From 7/fiL, "half," and ot'lxoc, "averse." 

2. Acatalectic, from aKaraXnicriKoc (d and Karalyyu, to stop), i. e., 
not having an abrupt termination. Compare Hephaestion (c. 4, p. 24, 
ed. Gaisf.): 'AtcardTinKTa naTielrai juerpa oca rbv rehevralov noda 6Ao- 
xlnpov lx et - 

3. Catalectic, from naralnKTiKoc, which is itself a derivative from 
KaraTi-fiyo, denotes verses that stop before they reach their full ending. 
Compare the language of Hephaestion (/. c.) : KaraTtTjKTiKa de baa fie- 
asLDfievov e%ei rov Televralov noda. 

4. BpaxvKara'ATjKTd de KaXelrai, baa dirb tiiizodiac hnl Tehovg ofy) 
irnoi hehelu w at* (Hephast., L c.) 



DACTYLIC MEASURES. 145 

VIII. A Hyper cat ale die or Hypermeter verse is that which 
has a syllable at the end beyond the complete measure ; as 
the following, which is Iambic Dimeter Hyper 'cat alectic or 
Hypermeter? 

Musa? | sordr\\es sunt | Minerv\\(B. 

IX. An Acephalous verse is that, which wants a syllable 
at the beginning ; as the following, which is Acephalous 
Iambic Dimeter. 2 

Non ] ebur || neque aur\eum. \\ 

SECTION XXX. 
DACTYLIC MEASURES. 

I. The only feet admissible in dactylic verses are the 
dactyl and spondee. 

II. Originally all the feet were dactyls, but the spondee 
was afterward admitted, as being an isochronous foot, and 
in order to impart more gravity and dignity to the line. 

III. It will be remembered that in dactylic verses a sin- 
gle foot constitutes a metre ; and hence a dactylic hexam- 
eter contains six feet, a dactylic pentameter Jive, a dactylic 
tetrameter four, &c. 

IV. In treating of the dactylic, as of other measures, we 
will commence with the simplest in use, and end with those 
of the greatest length. 

1. Dactylic Dimeter Acatalectic, or Adonic. 

I. This measure consists of two feet, a dactyl and spon- 
dee ; as, 

Terruit | urbem. 
Vlsere \ mantes. 

II. The dactylic dimeter, or Adonic, is usually subjoined 

1. 'TirepKaTaTiVKra de boa irpbg r<p teTie'lg) TrpocreXafie fiepog irodog. 
(Hephcest., I. c.) Some call it Hyper acatalectic (TnepaKaraTmKToc), i. 
e,, going beyond acatalectic 

2. Acephalous, from aaifya'kos, 11 without a head" (a and K^ak^). 

N 



146 



DACTYLIC MEASURES . 



to three Sapphic lines, thus forming what is called the Sap- 
phic stanza, of which an account will be given elsewhere. 

III. In tragic choruses, the Adonic is arbitrarily added 
to any number of Sapphics, without regard to uniformity. 1 

IV. This measure was called Adonic (Adonium metrum 
— 'AduvLov fierpov) because employed originally by the 
Greeks in the lamentations for Adonis. 2 

V. Sappho is said to have composed entire poems in this 
measure, now lost. Terentianus Maurus, from whom we 
derive this information, has also left us a short piece of this 
kind, 3 and another of thirty-one successive Adonics occurs 
in Boethius. 4 



2. Dactylic Trimeter Catalectic. 

I. This measure, also called Archilochian Penthemime- 
ris, is an heroic penthemimeris, or the first five half-feet of 
a dactylic hexameter. In other words, it consists of two 
feet and a half. 

II. Horace, who uses this verse in one of his odes (4, 7) 
alternately with the dactylic hexameter, uniformly has two 
dactyls and a semifoot ; as, 

Horat. Arbort\busque com\(£. 

Id. Flumina | pr&tere\unt. 

Id. Ducere \ nuda chdr\ds. 

Id. Qua rapzt \ hora dt\em, &c. 

III. Ausonius, however, who has a poem of fifty-seven 
lines, 5 all in this measure, sometimes makes the first foot a 
spondee, and in two instances uses a spondee also in the 

1. Scncc, (Ed., 110, seqq.—Id., Troad., 1010, seqq.—Id., Thy est., 
546, scqq., &.C. 

2. Mar. Vict , p. 2564.— Plotius, p. 2640. 

3. Tercnt. Mj.ur., v. 2160. — Some cominentators think that the words 
r fl rbv 'AScjvlv, cited by Plotius (p. 2640), belonged to the Adonic poem 
of Sappho mentioned by Terentianus. (Santcn. ad Ter. Maur., I. c.) 

4. De Cons. Phil., 1, metr. 7. 

5. Auton., Prof., 10. 



DACTYLIC MEASURES. 



147 



second place. But the spondee, in either case, is a dispar- 
agement to the verse, particularly in the latter. 

Auson. Doctri\na exigu\us. 
Id. et li\berti\na. 
Id. et tu | Cdncdr\di. 



3. Dactylic Trimeter Acatalectic. 

I. The Dactylic Trimeter Acatalectic consists of the last 
three feet of a dactylic hexameter ; that is, the first foot 
may be either a dactyl or spondee, but the second must be 
a dactyl, and the third a spondee ; as, 

Horat. Grato \ Pyrrha sub | antro. 

II. But the lines which are usually thus denominated 
are with greater propriety included in the class of choriam* 
bics, and ranked with Pherecratics. 



4. Dactylic Trimeter with a Base. 

I. This measure consists of two dactyls, followed by a 
spondee, with a base (that is, one long, or two short sylla- 
bles) prefixed to the beginning of the line. — Ausonius will 
afford an example. 1 Thus, 

Modu\larnine \ ri&riia \ tristi, 
Tacu\um sine hon\ore reUmquat. 
Super | indole \ cujus ad \ ulli, 
Mag\n(B bona | copia | laud is. 

5. Dactylic Trimeter Hypercatalectic. 
I. This measure consists of three dactyls, and a syllable 
over. The following example of its use is taken from Au- 
sonius. 2 

Parva eti\am fuit \ Idatya, 
Nomine \ prckdita \ quaz Paphips, 



1. Parent., 17, 1. 

2. Ib., 28. 



148 



DACTYLIC MEASURES. 



Et speci\em meru\it Vener\is, 
Quai genit\a est mihi \ pane sd\rdr, 
Filia | nam fuit \ lube amit\<£, 
Quam cele\brat sub kon\ore pt\o, 
Ncemd \ carmine \ funere\d. 
II A variety of this measure is found in Boethius (3, 

met? 6), which admits of a spondee in the first two places. 

Thus, 

Hie claus\it membr\is ariim\ds. 
Unus e\nim re\rum pater \ est. 
Ni viti\is pej\drafdvfrns. 
III. The Dactylic Trimeter Hypercatalectic is called by 
some Tetrameter Catalectic. 



6. Dactylic Tetrameter Meiurus, or Faliscan. 1 

I. This measure consists of the last four feet of an ordi- 
nary hexameter, except that the concluding foot is an iam- 
bus instead of a spondee. Thus, 

Sept. Ser. Vitis et \ ulmus ut\i simul | eant. 
Id. Liber at \ arva prilus fruti\cibus. 

Boeth. Falce rub\ds fili\cemque re\secat. 

II. The dactyl was preferred in the first three places, 
though the spondee was nevertheless admissible into the 
first and second. 

1. The name Meiurus is from the Greek : „ airo rod fieiovaOac rr}v 
ovpdv, quod veluti cauda minor et mutilus sit.'* (ForcclL, Lex.) Dio- 
medes calls such verses " Ecaudcs" (3, p. 499), and Marius Victorinus 
styles them Teliambi (p. 2512). — The origin of the name Faliscan has 
been much disputed. The form Phaliscus, given in some editions of 
Terentianus Maurus, as well as Paliscus (Augustin.< de Mus., 4, p. 83), 
are erroneous. It is probable that the appellation Faliscan was given 
to this species of verse from the poet Annianus, who frequently employ- 
ed it, and who was of the nation of the Falisci. (Santcn. ad Tcrent. 
Maur., 1998.) Victorinus states that this measure was called by the 
Greeks Calabrion (p. 2f)78). — Servius, the grammarian, styles Faliscan 
poems " docta?* the reason for which appellation is unknown. (8crv. % 
in Ccntimetr.y p. 1824.) 



DACTYLIC MEASURES. 



149 



7. Dactylic Tetrameter a posteriore, or Spondaic 

Tetrameter. 

I. This measure consists of the last four feet of a dac- 
tylic hexameter, and hence it is called Tetrameter a poste- 
riore, because supposed to be taken from the latter part of 
an hexameter line (a posteriore parte versus hexametri). 

II. In other words, the first two feet of this measure may 
be either dactyls or spondees, the third is generally a dac- 
tyl, rarely a spondee, but the fourth is invariably a spondee. 
Thus, 

Horat. Ibimus, \ d soci\l comit\esque. 

Certus e\nim prd\misit Ap\ollo. 
Me nec \ tarn pati\ens Lace\damdn. 
O fdrt\es pej\oraque \ pas si. 

III. In the following line a spondee is found in the third 
foot, preceded by a dactyl, answering to the spondaic line 
of the hexameter ; and in such a case as this, the prece- 
ding foot ought always to be a dactyl, or the line will be 
too heavy. Thus, 

Horat. Mensor\em coki\bent Arch\yta. 

8. Dactylic Tetrameter a priore, or Alcmanian. 1 

I. This measure consists of the first four feet of a dac- 
tylic hexameter, with merely this difference, that the fourth 
or last foot is always a dactyl. And it is called a priore 
because taken from the first part of an hexameter (a priore 
parte versus hexametri). Thus, 

Boeth. Lumim\busque pri\dr redi\it vigor. 
Id. Desuper | in terr\am nox \ funditur. 
Auson. Dlce\bas in | me ma\lertera. 

II. The Dactylic Tetrameter a priore is also called the 
Alcmanian Tetrameter, from the Greek poet Alcman, by 
whom it was frequently employed. 1 

III. This metre was much used in tragic choruses. 



1. Serv., p. ]820, ed. Putsch. 

N 2 



150 



DACTYLIC MEASURES. 



9. Phalaecian Dactylic Pentameter. 

I. This measure, which is called Phalaecian on the au- 
thority of Terentianus, 1 consists of a dactylic penthemime- 
ris (two feet and a half), followed by a dactylic dimeter or 
Adonic ; as, 

Boeth. Vise\bat geltd\ce || siderd | brumxt. 

Id. Heu qudm \ proecipit\i \\ mersd prolfundd. 

II. Like the iEolic Pentameter, this species of Phalae- 
uan verse admits a trochee in the first place ; as, 

Senec. Arva \ mutdn\tes || quasque Mot\dtis. 

Id. Allu\it gent\es \\frigida \jiuctu. 

Id. Quasque \ despect\at \\ vertice \ summd. 

III. Besides the trochee, Boethius uses the iambus in the 
first and second places ; as, 

Hie e\mm cau\sas || corner e \ promptum est. 
Illlc | laten\tes || pectora \ turbant. 
Cuncta | qu& rar\a || provehit | atas. 
Stupet | cum subi\tis || mobile | vulgus. 

IV. A Phalaecian Dactylic Pentameter may be formed 
from an hexameter, by striking out the fourth foot and the 
latter half of the third. Thus, 

Hex. At re\gina grav\ijam | dudum | saucia \ curd. 
" Cdnsed\ere du\ces et \ vulgi \ stdnte cdr\dnd. 

" Sanguine\dque mdn\u crepi\tdntia \ concutit | drmd. 

Phalaec. At re\ gind grdv\i \\ saucia | curd\ | 
<{ Cdnsed\ere du\ces \\ stdnte cdr\dnd. | 
" Sdngulne\aque mdn\u || concutit | drmd, J 



1. " Namque hie de genere est Phalaciorum." (Ter. Maur., v. 
1946.) The name is derived from that of the poet Phalaecus, who was 
said to have been the inventor of this species of verse, along with the 
others that went under this general appellation. The true form is Pha- 
lacian, not Phaleucian. (Santen. ad Ter. Maur., v. 2545.) 



DACTYLIC MEASURES. 



151 



V. Those Phaleecian lines in which neither the trochee 
nor iambus occur, may be scanned as Choriambic Tetram- 
eters Catalectic. Thus, 

Vise\bat gelida \ sidera briimfe 

Jam nunc | blanda melds \ cdrpe Did\ne. 

10. jEolic Pentameter. 

I. The iEoiic Pentameter, so called from its native dia- 
lect, was invented, it is said, by Sappho, a native of the 
iEolic island of Lesbos. 1 

II. It consists of four dactyls, preceded by a spondee, a 
trochee, or an iambus. In other words, it is a Dactylic 
Tetrameter Acatalectic with a base. 2 Thus, 

Terent. Maur. Cdrdi | qudndd fu\isse si\bi cdriit | dtthida 
Id. edi\dit tuba \ terribi\lem somt\um pro cut. 

11. Dactylic Pentameter. 
I. The Dactylic Pentameter was so called in consequence 
of the manner in which it was scanned by some of the old 
grammarians, who viewed it as consisting of five continu- 
ous feet, namely, two dactyls or spondees, followed by a 
spondee and two anapaests, according to the following scale : 



1 


2 


3 


4 


5 













Frigidl\us gldci\e pect\us dmdnt\is erdt. 
Nil mihi | rescrib\ds dt\tamen ips\e vera. 
Ldssd\ret vidu\ds pend\uld tel\a mdnus. 
Flebdm \ success\u pds\se cdre\re dolds. 

1. Terent. Maur., v. 2148.— Compare Mar. Vict., p. 2559.— Plot., 
p. 2636.— Sen?., p. 1824, — The 29th Idyl of Theocritus is in this 
measure: Olvoc, \ w \ iral, 7isyl\ral Kala\7id6ed, j k. t. 2,. For oth 
er examples, consult Gaisford ad Hcphcest., p. 275, 

2. Terent. Maur., v. 1722.— Diorned., p. 502.—Quintil, 9,4. 



152 



DACTYLIC MEASURES. 



II. Heph<estion, however, who has been followed by al- 
most all modern scholars, regards it as composed of two 
dactylic penthemimers. In other words, the first two feet 
may be either dactyls or spondees ; then comes a long syl- 
lable, to which succeed two dactyls, followed by another 
long syllable. 1 Thus, 





2 


3 


4 


5 


6 















Frigidi\us glaci\e || pectus am\aniis er\at. 
Nil mi hi I rcscrib\as \\ attamen \ ipse ven\i. 
Lassa\ret vidu\ds || pendula \ tela man\us 
Flebam \ success\u || posse car\ere ddl\ds. 

III. That this last is the proper view to take of the struc- 
ture of the pentameter seems certain from the fact, that a 
division of the verse takes place invariably at the end of 
the fifth half-foot, as well in the Greek as in the Latin wri- 
ters. 

IV. Ovid is considered the model of this species of verse 
among the Romans, and the wonderful smoothness and 
melody of his compositions are the result of close atten- 
tion to a number of minute observances, which were alto- 
gether neglected by the Greeks, and by their imitators, Ca- 
tullus, Tibullus, and Propertius. 2 These rules will now 
be given. 

Rules J or the Structure of Dactylic Pentameters. 

I. The pentameter must always be so constructed as to 
have the caesural pause after the penthemimeris, and thus 

1. Tov de 6aKTV?UKOv irevdyfitfiepovg Sic ?Mju6avouivov yiverai to 
hleyelov, k. t. JL (Hcphast.,\>. 92, ed Gaisf.) Compare the language 
of the scholiast (p. 186): BiXriov tie ovto (lerpetv enel mat etc 6vo 6ty- 
pTjTCLi 'nevdrjuiuepy, K. T. 

2. Ramsay's hat. Pros., p. 184. — Tate, Remarks on Dactylic Pen- 
tameters, in the Classical Journal. 



DACTYLIC MEASURES. 



153 



oe divisible into two equal portions of two feet and a half 
each. And the pause ought always to be strictly the last 
syllable in a word, and not fall on any syllable before this. 1 
Hence the following line is faulty : 

Inter nostras gentilis oberrat equus. 

2. It is also deemed a blemish for the caesura to fall af- 
ter a syllable which has become the last by elision ; as in 
the following lines from Catullus : 

Quam veniens una atque || altera rursus hyems. 
Troia virum et virtutum || omnium acerba cinis. 
Nec desistere amare \\ omnia si facias. 

3. If the first caesural syllable be a monosyllable, which 
ought not to happen frequently, it must be preceded by a 
long monosyllable, or by a word of the same time, i. e., a 
word consisting of two short syllables ; as, 

Ovid. Et mihi si non vis |] par cere, parce meis. 
Id. Tu dominus, tu vir, || tu mihi f rater eras. 
Id. Nulla tibi sine me || gaudia facta neges. 
Id. Pr&ierito magis est || iste pudendus amor. 
An exception to this rule, however, is made when the 
monosyllable is est, and the word before it suffers elision. 
Such lines as the following are not uncommon : 

Ovid. Litteraque invisa est, H hac mea parte tibi. 
Id. Quo nisi consilio est || usa puella tuo. 
But such as the following are very rare in Ovid : 
Sed sic inter nos \\ ut latuisse velint. 
Quod licet inter vos || nomen habete meum. 
Justaque quamvis est, || sit minor ira dei. 
Qucere suburbana hie || sit mihi terra locum. 

4. The last word of a dactylic pentameter is, in the 
great majority of instances, a dissyllable in Ovid. We oc- 

1 . There is no exception to this, even in Greek, except in a proper 
name ; as, 

'leoa vvv de Aioofcovpideco yeverj. (Callim., frag, excii.) 



154 



DACTYLIC MEASURES. 



casionally find est in this place, preceded by a dissyllable 
which suffers elision ; as, 

Hie est cujus amans hospita capta dolo est* 
Nee repetor ; cessas, iraque lenta tua est. 
More rarely two monosyllables ; as, 

Pramia si studio consequor ista, sat est. 
But such a line as the following must be considered al- 
together unworthy of imitation ; 

Omnis an in magnos culpa deos scelus est. 1 

5. The trisyllabic ending, although very common in the 
Greek poets, in Catullus, &c, may be said to be altogeth- 
er excluded from the O vidian pentameter. We find one 
example only in his earlier works, and five others in the 
Epistles from Pontus, which, together with the Tristia, 
were composed while the poet was plunged in the deepest 
despondency, and bear tokens of less accurate revision 
than his other productions. 

Quce tamen externis danda forent generis. 2 

Ne non peccarim, mors quoque non faciet. 3 
Quolibet ut saltern rure frui liceat. 4 
Aut quod scepe soles, exigis ut recitent. 5 . 
Vix excusari posse mihi videor . 6 
Spectarem, qualis purpura te tegeret, 7 

6. The quadrisyllable ending is likewise very uncommon, 
except in the Tristia and Epistles from Pontus. We have, 
however, two or three examples in his other works. 

Unda simul miserum vitaque deseruit. 8 
Et circumfusis invia fluminibus. 9 
Cantabat mozstis tibia funefibus. 10 

1. Ovid, Ep. ex Pont., 1, 6, 26. 2. Ovid, Heroid., 14, 62. 

3. Id., Ep. ex Pont., 1, 1, 66. 4. Id. Ep. ex Pont, 1,8,40. 

5. Id. ib., 3, 5, 40. 6. Id. ib., 3, 6, 46. 

7. Id. ib., 4, 9, 26. 8. Heroid., 19, 202. 

9. Fasti, 5, 582. 

10. Ib , 6, 660. — Other examples are $-*ven in Ramsay, p. 184. 



DACTYLIC MEASURES. 



155 



7. The qumquesyllabic ending is still more rare than the 
quadrisyllable. 

Lis est cum forma magna pudicitise. 1 
Nec sedeo duris torva superciliis. 2 

8. As to the kind of words that conclude the line, they 
ought to possess some emphasis. They are usually nouns, 
the personal and possessive pronouns, or verbs. Adjec- 
tives do not often occur in this place, adverbs still more 
rarely, and less frequently than either, the present participle 
active. 

9. Elisions should be resorted to sparingly, especially in 
the second half of the verse, where they are by no means 
harmonious. They may be allowed in the first of the two 
dactyls ; as, 

Ultimus est aliqua decipere arte labor. 
Incipis, incipiet desinere esse mea. 
But when they fall on the second dactyl, the melody of 
the line is destroyed ; as, 

Quis scit an kmc savas tigridas insula habet I s 

10. At the beginning of the verse it is better to have a 
dactyl followed by a spondee than the reverse. Thus, 

Vix Priamus tdnti totaque Trojafuit. 
Res est solUciti plena timoris amor. 

V. Dactylic pentameters are never found in a system by 
themselves, in the classic writers (unless seven lines in 
Ausonius can be taken as an exception), but always in com- 
bination with hexameters. 

VI. Hexameters and pentameters, placed alternately, 
constitute what is termed the Elegiac Distich. 4 

1. Heroid., 16, 288. 

2. 16., 17, 16. — For other instances," consult Ramsay, p. 184. 

3. 16., 10, 86. 

4. The Greeks employed this combination of the two measures in 
war-songs, hymns, and epigrams or inscriptions ; the Romans in epi- 
grams, epistles, and amatory poetry. 



156 



DACTYLIC MEASURES. 



VII. The name of Elegy ("EAeyoc) was first applied to 
the alternating hexameter and pentameter in the time of the 
Greek poet Simonides ; whether it was that he himself in- 
troduced the name, or whether the mournful and plaintive 
nature of his themes justified this appellation from others. 1 

VIII. Ovid, in some of his elegiac pieces, employs oc- 
casionally a species of metrical echo, if we may so term it, 
the second half of the pentameter being a repetition of the 
commencement of the preceding hexameter, either pre- 
cisely the same words being used, or else a slight change 
being made in them. Thus, 

Militat omnis amans, et liabet sua castra Cupido : 
Attice crede mihi, militat omnis amans?' 

Graia juvenca venit, qua te patriamque domumque 
Perdat. Io prohibe I Graia juvenca venit? 

Invida vestis eras, quce tarn bona crura tegebas ; 
Quoque magis spectes, invida vestis eras. 4 

Ars tua, Tiphy, jacet, si non sit in cequore fluctus 
Si valeant homines, ars tua Phcebe jacet. 5 

Auspiciis animisque patris, puer, arma movebis, 
Et vinces animis auspiciisque patris. 6 

IX. Martial also, in one of his epigrams (9, 98), has six 
consecutive distichs, each commencing and ending with the 
words rumpitur invidia? 

1. This combination of hexameters and pentameters is said to have 
been invented by Callinus, and applied by him to martial themes. It 
was not called eleyog at first, but snog, the latter of which terms was 
afterward confined to heroic verse, when Simonides brought in the name 
eheyog, and along with it the handling of plaintive themes in this species * 
of measure. 

2. Am., 1, 9, 1. 3. Her ., 5, 117. 

4 Am , 3, 2, 27. 5. Trist., 4, 3, 77. 

6. A. A., 1, 191. 

7 This species of play upon words gave rise, in later ages, when 
tasU' had become thoroughly corrupted, to entire poems. Verses of this 



DACTYLIC MEASURES. 



157 



Rumpitur invidia quidam, carissime Juli, 
Quod me Roma legit, rumpitur invidia. 

Rumpitur invidia, quod turba semper in omni, 
Monstramur digito, rumpitur invidia, &c. 



12. Dactylic Hexameter. 

I. The Dactylic or Heroic Hexameter was considered 
to be the most ancient as well as the most dignified species 
of verse, and was said to have been invented by Phemonoe, 
the first priestess of the Delphian Apollo, who, when in- 
spired by the god, was wont to chant his oracles in this 
measure. 1 

II. The origin of dactylic versification, however, is to be 
traced back to the earliest periods of the Greek language, 
and connects itself with the peculiar mode of intonation 
that characterized the ijEolic tribes. 2 

kind were called " Versus Lyrici, Ophites, and Serpentini." Some of 
these pieces may be found collected in the Miscell. Obs. Nov. (vol. 5, p. 
475, seqq.). WernsdorfT gives in his collection {Poet. hat. Min., vol. 
3, p. 268) a poem of this kind by Pentadius, " De Adventu Veris" the 
commencement of which is as follows : 

Sentio fugit hyems, Zephyrisque moventibus orbem 
Jam tepet Eurus aquis ; sentio fugit hyems. 

Parturit omnis ager, prcesentit terra calorem, 
Ger minibus que novis parturit omnis ager. 

Lata vireta tument, foliis sese induit arbor, 
Vallibus apricis lata vireta tument, &c. 

1. Schott. ad Prod., p. 18.— Voss., Inst. Poet., 3, 3, 2.— Fabric, 
Bibl. Gr., vol. 1, p. 154.— Plin., H. N., 7, tt.—Pausan., 10, 5.— 
Schol. ad Eurip., Orest., 1093. 

2. Got fling's Greek Accentuation, § 2, seq. — The tendency in the 
JEoWc pronunciation was to throw the accent back on the root, or as 
near to it as possible, so that the dactylic rhythm, with the arsis on the 
first syllable of the foot, could easily and naturally arise from this kind 
of pronunciation. As the JEolic dialect was spoken at Delphi, the na- 
tive city of Phemonoe, the two accounts just given may^ easily be recon- 
ciled. — The most ancient hexameters known are those which Herodotus 
informs us (5, 59) that he himself saw at Thebes, in the temple of the 
Ismenian Apollo, inscribed on certain tripods, consecrated by Amphitry- 
on, and by two other princes of the 13th or 14th century before our era. 
It is more than probable, however, that the historian was here imposed 
UDon by the priests. (B'dhr ad Herod., I. c. — Wolf, Prolegom. ad Horn , 

, P : iv.) 

o 



158 



DACTYLIC MEASURES. 



III. The dactylic hexameter was introduced into Latium 
by the poet Ennius, who first discarded the rude Saturnian 
measure of his predecessors. 1 

IV. This species of verse is also called the Heroic, from 
its having been selected by both the Greeks and Romans 
as the proper medium for heroic or epic themes. It was 
also employed in didactic and satiric compositions. 



V. The Dactylic Hexameter consists, as its name im- 
ports, of six feet, whereof the fifth is usually a dactyl, and 
the sixth always a spondee, while each of the other four 
feet may be either a dactyl or a spondee, at the pleasure 
of the writer ; as, 

Virg. Sic abe\unt rede\untque me\i vari\antque tim\dres. 
Catull. Et quam\vis te\cum mult\d cdn\jungerer \ usu. 
Virg. TaMs et \ ipse ju\bam cer\vice eff\udtt e\quina. 
Id. Cdllect\umque frem\ens vdlv\U sub \ nanbus | ignem. 

VI. Sometimes, however, in a solemn, majestic, or mourn- 
ful description, or in expressing astonishment, consternation, 
vastness of size, &c, a spondee is admitted in the fifth foot, 
and the line is thence termed Spondaic ; as, 

Virg. Cara deum soboles, magnum Jovis \ incre\mentum. 
Id. Constitit, atque oculis Phrygia agmina \ circum\spexit. 
Cat. jEquorem monstrum Nereides \ admir\antes. 
Man. Scorpius ingentem perterruit \ Gri\ona. 

VII. In spondaic lines the fourth foot is usually a dac- 
tyl ; not uniformly, however. Thus, 

Virg. Saxa per et scopulos et \ depresses con\valles. 
Id. Aut leves ocreas lent\d du\cunt ar\gento. 

VIII. The older poets do not scruple to use lines con- 
taining spondees alone ; as, 

Enn. Olli \ respdnd\et rex | Alba\i ldng\ai. 

1. Lud U.j 1, 118, seqq. — Sil. Italy 12, 410, seq. — Column. , Ennii 
Vit.j p. 6 —For an account of the Sa'urnian, vid. page 199. 



DACTYLIC MEASURES. 



159 



Enn. Gives \ Roma\nl tunc \ fdcti \ sunt Cam\parii. 
Lucret. An cxl\um nd\bis na\tura ult\rd cor\ruptum. 
Catull. Quis te \ lerii\rem nd\bis, neu | cdnar\ere. 

IX. Spondaic lines are much more common in the Greek 
than in the best Latin poets. There are, for instance, some 
twenty-eight of this description in Virgil, while in a single 
piece of Catullus' 1 (containing 409 lines), who formed his 
verses upon the Greek model, we find a greater number. 2 

CcBSura in Dactylic Hexameters. 

X. The beauty and harmony of hexameter verse depend 
in a very great degree upon the proper management of the 
caesura. In its application to single feet, the caesura has 
already been explained ; it only remains to consider it with 
reference to whole verses, in which acceptation it may be 
more correctly termed the Ccesural Pause. 

XI. The caesural pause most approved of in heroic po- 
etry, and which, above all others, tended to give smooth- 
ness and rhythm to the line, was that which took place 
after the penthemimeris. This was particularly distin- 
guished as The Heroic Caesural Pause. Thus, 

Virg. At domus \ interi\or , || regali splendida luxu. 
Id. Julius | a magn\o \\ demissum nomen lulo. 

XII. Sometimes the penthemimeral pause is found com- 
bined with others ; as, 

Virg. Ad nos vix tenuis H famm \\ perlabitur aura. 
Id. Insignis || reserat || stridentia limina consul. 
Id. Sunt geminm || belli || porta, \\ sic nomine dicunt. 

XIII. Instead, however, of the caesural pause at the ex- 
act penthemimeris, a different division was equally admitted 
as heroic, which took place after a trochee in the third foot ; 
as, 

Virg. Effigi\em statu\ere, \\ mfas qua triste piaret. 
Id. Tecta met\u peti\ere, \\ ruunt de montibus amnes. 



1. Catull., 64. 



2. Ramsay's Lat. Pros., p. 173. 



160 



DACTYLIC MEASURES. 



XIV. Next in merit to the perithemimeral was the heph- 
themimeral pause. Thus, 

Virg. Arbori\busque sat\isque Not\us, || pccorique sinister. 
Id. Haud mora \ prosilu\ere su\is : || ferit cethera clamor. 

XV. In some instances we find lines where the penthe- 
mimeral is combined with the triemiineral ; as, 

Tibull. Di patrii || purgamus agros, \\ purgamus agrestes. 
Virg. Prima tenet, || plausuque volat, \\ fremituque secundo. 

XVI. The caesural pause the least approved of in heroic 
poetry was that which divided the verse exactly into halves, 
since it gave the line an undignified air, and degraded it to 
a Priapean. 1 Thus, 

Virg. Cui non \ dictus Hy\las puer || ct La\tonia \ Delos? 
Id. Exple\ri ment\em nequit \\ ardes\citque tu\endo. 

XVII. The ceesural pause between the fourth and fifth 
feet was considered by grammarians as peculiarly adapted 
to pastoral poetry, more especially when the fourth foot 
was a dactyl ; and it was termed, from this circumstance, 
the Bucolic caesural pause ; 2 as, 

Calpurn. Idas \ laniger\i domi\nus gregis, \\ Astacus horti. 
Auson. Commu\nis Paphi\e dea \ sideris || et deajloris. 



13. Priafean. 

I. The Priapean measure was so called because origi- 
nally employed on themes having relation to Priapus, the 
god of gardens. 

II. This measure is generally regarded as a species ol 
hexameter, the first, as likewise the fourth, foot of which 
was most commonly a trochee, often, however, a spondee, 

1. The Priapean will be considered after the hexameter. 

2. Valckenaer was the first to mark the bucolic caesura in Theocritus. 
The first seven Idyls, with the tenth and eleventh, contain 927 lines, ol 
which not less than 711 have this cresura. Virgil's Eclogues consist ol 
830 lines, but of these only 232 conform to the bucolic model (Wai 
tun, de Foes Bucol. — Thcocrit . vo! I. |>. xxxvi ) 



ANAP^STIC MEASURES. 



161 



but rarely a dactyl ; the second almost always a dactyl ; 
the third, though sometimes a dactyl, much more frequently 
an amphimacer. The scale is as follows : 



1 


2 


3 


4 


5 


- 6 















Catull. col\oma | qua cupis \\ ponte | ludere | longo. 
Id. lnfdss\a Ligu\ri jacet \ supper\nata se\curi. 

III. A preferable mode of scanning, however, is to make 
the first hemistich a Glyconic, and the second a Pherecratic 
verse, and thus to consider the line, not as forming one 
dactylic verse, but as composed of two choriambics. 

14. Hexameter Meiurus. 

I. The Hexameter Meiurus is a defective species of hex- 
ameter, having an iambus in the sixth place instead of a 
spondee ; as, 

Liv. Andron. Dirige odorisequos ad certa cubilia canes. 

II. It is to be considered, however, rather as a vicious 
and defective hexameter, than as forming a separate spe- 
cies of verse ; though Livius Andronicus designedly wrote 
such lines as these, which he alternately mingled with per- 
fect hexameters. They have all, however, perished except 
two. 

SECTION XXXL 
ANAP^STIC MEASURES. 

I. In Anapaestic verse the feet admissible without restric- 
tion are, the anapaest, the spondee, and the dactyl. 

II. Dactyls, however, ought to be employed sparingly in 
Latin anapaestics. When introduced, they ought to be the 
first foot in the dipode, and ought to be followed bj a spon* 
dee in preference to an anapaest. 

O 2 



162 



ANAPiESTIC MEASURES. 



III. Anapaestic verso is scanned by metres of two feet 
each ; thus, an anapaestic monometer contains two feet ; a 
dimeter, four; a trimeter, six, &c. 

IV. No specimen of anapaestic verse is extant in the pu- 
rer Latin writers. Those that have reached us belong to 
a later age. 

V. No Latin poet ever wrote anapaestics necessarily con- 
sisting of four anapaests (with the exception of a few in 
Seneca and Ausonius) ; but they all appear to have intend- 
ed their anapaestics for single measures or monometers, 
leaving the reader to connect or disjoin, as the sense might 
require or his own judgment dictate. Convenience in 
printing, however, is answered by the division into dime- 
ters, and hence they are generally exhibited in this form 
in editions of ancient authors. 

VI. Anapaestic verses arranged in monometers or dime- 
ters, and thus forming a succession of many lines, are call- 
ed Systems. 

VII. The species of anapaestics most in use among the 
Greek tragic writers was the Anapcestic Dimeter Acatalec- 
tic, which is frequently found in systems interspersed with 
the Monometer Acatalectic. 

VIII. These systems of anapaestic dimeters are usually 
closed, among the Greeks, by an Anap&stic Dimeter Cata- 
lectic, otherwise called a Pareemiac, it having been a favour- 
ite vehicle for proverbs (Tlapoiiiiai). 

IX. The Latin writers do not, as often as the Greeks, 
close a system of dimeters by a Parcemiac. Seneca never 
does. 

X. It must be borne in mind that anapaestic systems pro- 
ceed on the principle of continuous .scansion. Hence the 
last syllable of every verse is not common, but is subject to 
the ordinary rules of prosody, unless at the end of a sen- 
tence, or any considerable pause in the sense. 1 

1. Consult remarks under the article Synaphcia, page 130. 



ANAPAESTIC MEASURES. 



163 



XL The only exception to the rule laid down in the pre- 
ceding paragraph is in the case of the Paroemiac, the last 
syllable of which is common. An anapaestic system, there- 
fore, is, in fact, one long line broken np into several lines, 
the end of which long line is marked by the Parcemiac. 

XII. Hence we see why the last syllable of the Parcemi- 
ac is the only one in the entire system that is common, it 
being in reality the concluding syllable of a long line, which 
line is supposed to commence with the first verse of the 
system. 

1. Anapaestic Monometer Acatalectic, or Anapaestic 

Base. 

I. The Anapcestic Monometer consists of two feet, which 
may be either anapaests, spondees, or dactyls. 

II. The scale, therefore, of this measure is as follows : 



1 


2 







Senec. ululass\e caries. || 
Id. Fundite \ fietus || 

Edite | planctus [| 

Fingite ] luctus || 

Resonet \ tristl || 

Clamdr\e forum. || 

2. Anapjestic Dimeter Acatalectic. 

I. The Anap<BStic Dimeter Acatalectic consists of four 
feet, which may be either anapaests, spondees, or dactyls. 

II. The scale is as follows : 



1 


2 


! 3 


4 











164 anapaestic measures. 

Senec. Indus \ gelidum || potat Ar\axem 9 \\ 

Albim | Per see, \\ Rhenum\que bibunf fl 
Venient | annis || sceculd | sens \\ 
Quibus 0\ceanus || vinculo, \ rerum || 
Ldxet et \ ingens \\ pateat | tellus || 
Tethys\que novos || detegat | or&es || 
iVec sit | ierm || ultima \ Thule. || 

3. Anapaestic Dimeter Catalectic, or Parcemiac. 

I. This measure consists of three feet, followed by a 
catalectic syllable. 

IT. The third foot of a Parcemiac must always be an an- 
apaest. The dactyl is less frequently used in the first and 
second places than the spondee. 

III. The following is the scale. 



1 


2 


3 


4 











Prudent. Venient \ ciib sa!c\\ula cum | jam 
Socius | color dss\\a revis\it, 
Animdt\aque sang\\ume viv\d 
Habitdc\uld prist\\ina gcst\et, 

IV. Prudentius, from whom the above lines are taken, 
does not admit a dactyl, and uses a spondee in the first 
place only. Boethius, however, allows himself greater lat- 
itude, as may be seen by the following : 

Qui se | volet ess\\e pdtent\em. 
Animos | domet ill\\e fero\ces, 
Nee vict\a libi\dme cdll\a 
Fdzd'is | submitt\\dt habe\nis. 
Etcnim | Ucet l?id\\ica long\e 
Tellus | tua jur\\d tremis\\cat, 
Et servtyat ult\imd Thu\lc, 
Tdmen dtr\as pell\\ere curias. 



IAMBIC MEASURES. 165 

Miser as\que fuga\\re querelas 
Non poss\e, potent\\w non | est. 

SECTION XXXII. 

IAMBIC MEASURES. 

I. Iambic verses are scanned by measures of two feet, 
it having been usual, in reciting them, to make a short 
pause at the end of every second foot, with an emphasis. 

II. This kind of verse derived its name from the iambus, 
of which foot it was originally composed, to the exclusion 
of all others. 

III. Afterward, in order to vary the rhythm, and dimin- 
ish the labour of the poet, a spondee was allowed in the 
odd places of the verse, the iambus still occupying the 
even places. 

IV. In the even places, the long syllable of the iambus 
was resolved into two short ones, and thus the tribrach, 
which is isochronous with the iambus, gained admission. 

V. In the odd places, by resolving the first long syllable 
of the spondee, an anapaest was formed ; and, by resolving 
the second syllable, a dactyl. 

VI. Thus eventually all these feet were employed in 
iambic measures, subject, however, to certain restrictions, 
which will now be specified. 1 

1. An iambus is admitted into every place, which maybe 
resolved into a tribrach in every place except the last, 
where there must be invariably an iambus. 

2. The spondee may be used in the uneven places ; that 
is, in the first and third of the dimeter, and in the first, 
third, and fifth of the trimeter. 

3. The dactyl may be used in the uneven places, like 
the spondee ; but its appearance in the fifth place of 
the trimeter is very rare. 

1. The rules here given are much less strict, as regards the dactyl 
and anapasst, than those which regulate the Greek iambic trimeter. 



166 IAMBIC MEASURES. 

4. The anapaest also is admitted into the uneven places, 
and in the fifth place seems to have been particularly 
affected by the Roman tragedians. 

5. A proceleusmaticus is sometimes found in the first 
place of the iambic trimeter. 



1. Iambic Dimeter Catalectic. 

I. This measure consists of three feet, properly all iam- 
bi, and a catalectic syllable. 

II. It admits, however, the tribrach, spondee, and ana- 
paest into the first place, but suffers no variation in the third 
foot. 

Petron. anus \ recoct\\a vm\o 
trement\ibus [| labell\is. 

Prudent. Lex Kmc \ data est || cadu\cis 
Deo | jubent\\e me?nbr\ts 
ut temp\eret \\ labdr\em 
medica\bilis \\ vdlupt\as. 

2. Iambic Dimeter Acephalous. 1 

I. This measure is an iambic dimeter, wanting the first 
syllable. 

II. Horace and Prudentius made no variations, but uni- 
formly employed the iambus in the few lines they have 
left us of this metre. 

Horat. Non \ ebur || neque aur\eum. 
Prud. Dd\na cdn\\scien\ti<B. 

III. Some consider such lines as catalectic trochaic dim' 
eters, and scan them as follows : 

Non eb\ur ne\\que aure\itm. 
Dona | cdnsc$\enti]w.. 



1. Acephalous, i. e M without a Mad (or initial syllable), from d, priv 
and K6$ai,r}, " a head." 



iambic measures. 167 

3. Iambic Dimeter Hypercatalectic. 

I. This measure, likewise called Archilochian, and form- 
ing the third line in the Alcaic stanza, is an iambic dimeter 
with an additional syllable at the end. 

II. According to the usage of Horace, the first foot may 
be either a spondee or an iambus, but is generally a spon- 
dee ; the second foot is an iambus ; the third is invariably a 
spondee, 1 and the fourth an iambus. The Horatian scale, 
therefore, is as follows : 



1 


2 


3 


4 















Horat. Sylvce j labdr\\dntes \ gelu\\que. 
Id. Depro\me quadr\\imum \ Sabin\\a. 
Id. Puer | quis ex ]| aula | capill[\is. 

III. The practice of Horace differs from that of Alcaeus 
as regards the third place, the latter having uniformly an 
iambus in this part of the line. 

IV. This measure is called by some the Alcaic Ennea 
syllabic. 2 

4. Iambic Dimeter Acatalectic 

I. This measure consists of four feet or two metres. 

II. Properly speaking, all the feet are iambi. It admits, 
however, the variations that are usual in iambic verse, and 
its scale is as follows : 

1 2 3 4 



1. The line of Horace, which occurs Od., 2, 19, 15, "Disjecta non 
led ruina," has been corrected by Bentley, from MSS., as follows* 
" Disjecta non lent ruina" 

%. Consult remarks on the Alcaic measure. 



168 



IAMBIC MEASURES. 



Id. 
Id. 
Id. 
Id. 



Prudent 
Hadr. 



Horat. 



inars\U 7st\\uos\ius. || 
Vel ha>d\us c\\rcptus*\ lupo. || 
imbres | nivZs^que com\parat. || 
ast ego | viciss\\im rls\ero. \\ 
Vider\e pr dp er\\ antes | domum. || 
Jam mell\a de |] scopulis \ jiuunt. || 
animu\la vagu'\Ia bland\ula, || 
Hospes | cdmes\\que cdrp\dris, \\ 
Qua nunc | dbi\bis In | Idea, \\ 
PalUdu\la rigi\\dula nu\dula 1 || 
Nec ut | soles || dabis | jocos. \\ 



III. Although Horace has not used this metre except in 
conjunction with verses of a different kind, other authors 
wrote entire poems in it, as Prudentius, St. Ambrose, Pope 
Damasus, Sedulius, &c. 

IV. The Liturgy of the Church of Rome has several 
hymns in this metre. The following lines form the com- 
mencement of one of them, and will also furnish an instance 
of rhyming or Leonine versification. 



5. Iambic Trimeter Catalectic. 
I. This measure is the iambic trimeter, wanting the last 
syllable. In other words, it consists of five feet, properly 
all iambi, followed by a catalectic syllable ; as, 



II. Like the trimeter, however, it admits the spondee 



Salutis humana sator, 
Jesu voluptas cordium, 
Orbis redempti conditor 
Et casta lux amantium : 
Qua victus es dementia 



Ut nostra ferres criminal <fec. 



Horat. Voca\tus at\\que non \ vocd\\tus aud\it. 
Prudent. Pius \fide\\lis in\nocens || pudi\cus. 



IAMBIC MEASURES. 



169 



into the first and third places, but not into the fifth, which 
would render the verse too heavy and prosaic. 

Horat. Trahunt\que sic^cas md\chmai \\ cart\nas. 

Prudent. Ndnnull\d qnerc\\u sunt \ cava\\ta et ulm\d. 
III. Terentianus prefers scanning this kind of verse as 
part of an iambic trimeter, with three trochees following. 
Thus, 

Trdhunt\que sic\cds [| machi\n7e carinas. 

6. Iambic Trimeter Acatalectic. 

I. This measure consists of three metres, or six feet, 
originally all iambi, and when a line of this kind still oc- 
curs, it is called a pure iambic line. 

II. The other feet that were subsequently allowed to en- 
ter, and the places proper to each, have been considered 
elsewhere. 1 

III. When other feet besides the iambus enter into the 
line, it is called a mixed iambic. 

IV. Another name for this measure is the Senarius, from 
the six feet of which the line is composed. 

V. The caesural pause most commonly falls after the 
fifth semifoot ; as, 

Phdse\lus ill\e || quern | vide\Cis hdsp\ites. 

VL The scale of the mixed iambic trimeter is as follows: 



1 


2 


3 


4 


5 


6 














W V-/ 













Pure Iambics. 
Horat. Comes \ mindr\e sum \ futur\\us in \ metu. || 
Catull. Es im\pudi\\cus et \ vordx \\ et dl\cd. \\ 



1. Consult introductory remarks on iambic verse, paragraphs III., 
IV., V., VI. 

p 



170 IAMBIC MEASURES. 

Spondee in 1 and 3. 
Catull. Per cdns\ula\\tum pe\jerat || Vatin\ws. |) 

Spondee in 1, 3, 5. 
Horat. Unxe\re ma\\tres 1\U<b ad\dictum \ fens. || 

Tribrach in 1, and Spondee in 5. 
Horat. /Sec? o7l|i2s 5rd||dV ow£ | puell\\ce ca?id\idcz. || 

Tribrach in 2 and 4, Spondee in 1, 3 and 5. 
Horat. Fec^ajcw humer\\is tunc \ ego ini\\micis \ eques. | 

Tribrach in 3, and Spondee in 5. 
Horat. Z^e* | ^acellre moda | swZ> an\\tiqua il\ice. \\ 

Dactyl in 1, Spondee in 3 arid 5. 
Horat. Aut ami\te le\\vi rar\d tend\\it re\tid. |] 

Dactyl in 3, Spondee in 1 and 5. 
Horat. Qa5 awa | scelest\\i rui\tis out \\ cur dex\teris. [) 

Anapcsst in 1 , Spondee in 3 and 5. 
Horat. Po^5^|c/wc vernll as di\tzs ex\\amen | domus. |j 

Anapcsst in 1 and 5, Tribrach in 2. 
Horat. Pdvidum\que lepd\\rem et ad\venam || laqued \ gruem.\\ 

Dactyl in 1, Tribrach in 3 and 4. 
Horat. at\\que canz|6ws Ao7nz||cIdam i/ec£|amn. || 

VII. The prevalent ceesural pause in iambic trirr Dters is, 
as we have already remarked, the penthemimeral. If this 
be wanting, the line must then have the hephthemimeral 
pause. Thus, 

Catull. Ait fuisse || navium celerrimus. 

Id. Rhodumve nobilem \\ horridomve Thraciam. 

Horat. Defixa codo || devocare sidera. 

Id. Cave ! cave namque || in malos asperrimus. 



IAMBIC MEASURES. 



171 



Catull. Neque ullius natantis || impetum trabis. 
Id. Propontida trucemve \\ Ponticum sinum. 

VIII. There is no instance in Catullus of the total omis- 
sion of the ceesural pause, and only two in Horace, namely 

(Epode, 1, 19) Ut assidens implumibus pullis avis.' 
(Epode, 11, 15) Quod si meis incestuat pracordiis. 

Porsonian Pause. 

IX. Porson, in his celebrated preface to the Hecuba, as 
serted that the following rule was always observed by tho 
Greek tragedians : 

" When the iambic trimeter has, after a word of more 
than one syllable, the cretic termination ( - ^ — ), either in- 
cluded in one word, or consisting of — ^ and a syllable, or 
of a monosyllable and — — , then -the fifth foot must be an 
iambus." 

X. There is no exception to this law in Catullus, whose 
iambic trimeters are almost all pure ; but it is constantly 
violated by Horace, in those odes in which iambic trime- 
ters are combined with other kinds of verse ; whereas in 
Epode 17, where these form a system by themselves, it is 
but once neglected : 

Alitibus atque canibus homicidam Hectorem. 1 

7. Scazon, or Choliambus. 

I. This measure, called also Hipponactean, is a variety 
of the Senarius. It differs from it in this, however, that 
while the iambic trimeter has invariably an iambus in the 
sixth place, the scazon has invariably a spondee in the 
sixth place, and an iambus in the fifth. 

II. In all other respects the scazon is the same as the 
trimeter. 

III. An iambus is necessary in the fifth place, in order 
that the line may not be too lame and heavy ; as in spon- 



L Ramsay 1 s Lat. Pros., p. 208* 



172 . 



IAMBIC MEASURES. 



daic hexameters, we usually find the fourth foot a dactyl 
for a similar reason. 

IV. The terms Scazon (Zfcd^cov, " limping' 1 or " halting") 
and Choliambic (Xcdkiafiducoc;, " lame iambic") have refer- 
ence to the peculiar characteristic of this measure, namely, 
its lame and halting gait, occasioned by the spondee in the 
sixth place, in opposition to the brisk and lively ending of 
the regular trimeter. 

V. The name Hipponactean is derived from that of the 
virulent poet Hipponax, who, according to some, invented 
this measure. After his example it was much employed 
in invectives and in sarcastic composition generally. 

VI. The following may be taken as a specimen of this 
measure. 

Catull. Suffe\nus ist\\e Var\e quern || probe | nostl, || 

Homo est | venust\\us et \ dtcax || et urb\dnus, \\ 

Idem\que long\\e plur\imds \\ facit | versus, || 

Puto ess\e ego ill^i m~dl\ia out \\ decern out \ plura || 

Perscript\a nec || sic, ut | fit, hi || palim\psesld || 

Rela\ta: chart\\(e rcg\icz, || novl \ libri, \\ 

Novi umb\ili\\cT, ldr\d rubr\\a, membr\ana \\ 

Direcl\d plumb\o, et pu\mice o?nnf\ia ce\quata. || 
• 

8. Comic Iambic Trimeter. 

I. In comedy, satire, and fable, the poets indulged in 
very great licenses as regarded the structure and scansion 
of the trimeter. 

II. They admitted the spondee and its equivalents, the 
dactyl and anapaest, into the second and fourth places, not 
confining themselve-s to the iambus except in the sixth. 1 
Thus, 

1. " Cum non solum Tercntius, sed etiam Plautus, Ennius, Accius- 
que et Ncevius atque Pacuvius Turpiliusque, et omncs tarn tragcedicz 
quam comozdut veteris Latince sr.riptores eodem mctri modo Iambici sunt 
usi, ut omnibus in locis indiffer enter poncrcnt quinque pedes ; id est 
iambum, vet lribrachyn y vel anapastum, vel dactylum, vel spondceum* 
absque postrerno loco, in quo vel iambum vel pyrrhtckium omnmo posu^ 



IAMBIC MEASURES. 



173 



Petron. An ut \ mdtro\\na drnd\td phale\\ris pela\giis. \\ 
Id. Tub | pdld\\td cldu\sus pdv\\o pdsc\itur. \\ 
Id. JEquum est | indue\\re nupt\dm. ven\\tum textfilem. \\ 
Phaedr. Peri\culo\\sdm. fe\cit medi\\cindm \ lupo. \\ 
Id. Est dr\delio\\num quce\ddm Rd\\m<B na\lid* \\ 
Id. Rex urb\is e\\jus ex\perwn\\di grd\tid. \\ 
Id. Ignd\tds fall\\it no\tis est |] den\sui. || 
Terent. Fide et | tdcitur\nitd\te, Exspect\\d quid | veils. || 
Id. Cur simu\lds igi\\tur rem dm\ncm dprin\\cipio medics. \ 
Id. Quod ple\riquc dm\\nes fdci\unt ddu\\lescen\tuli. \\ 
Id. Alere out \ canes || ad ven\andu?n out || ad philb\sd- 
phos. || 

Id. Nunquam \ pra>pdn\\ens se ill\is ltd \\ fdcill\ume. (| 
Id. Age\bdt ldn\\a dc te\ld vict\\um qua>\ritdns. \\ 
Id, Egdmet | continued me\cum cerate capl\us est. |] 
Id. Die sd\des quis her\\i Chrystydem habu\\lt nam An) 
drw. || 

Id. Queer e\b dm cdm\\perie\bdm nihil \\ ad Pdm\philum. \\ 

9. Iambic Tetrameter Acatalectic, or Octonarius. 

I. This species of verse consists of four measures or 
eight feet, properly all iambi, but subject to the same vari- 
ations as the iambic trimeter ; so that, by prefixing one 
measure to a common iambic trimeter, we convert it into 
an Octonarius. 

II. This metre is often used by the Latin comic writers. 
Terent. Sane \ pol is\\ta te | mulent\\a est muU\er et || tern- 

e?'dr\id. \\ 

Id. Nunc hie | dies \\ alidm \ vitam au\\fert ali\os md-\\ 

res pdst\uldt. || 

Id. Patere\tur : nam || quern, ferr\et si || pdrent\em ndn || 
ferret \ siium ? || 

issc inveniuntur ; miror quosdam vel abnegate esse in Tcrentii comxz&iis 
metra, vel ea quasi arcana qu&dam, et ab omnibus doctis semota, sibi 
solis esse cognita, confirmare" (Priscian, de Vers. Com. — vol. 2, p. 
403, ed. Krehl.) 

P2 



174 



IAMBIC MEASURES. 



Terent. Lend \ sum. fdte\\or per\nicies || commu\nis add\\les- 





centrum. \\ 


Id. 


Nequid | propter || tuam | fidem \\ decept\a pate-^ 




istur | malt. || 


Id. 


Cujus | nunc mise\\ra spes \ opes\\que sunt | in te 




u\\no omnes \ silos. || 


Plaut. 


.lllds | qui dant \\ eds \ deri\\des ; qui | delu\\dunt de-\ 




peris. || 




10. Iambic Tetrameter Catalectic. 



I. This measure, called likewise Hipponactic, from its 
inventor, Hipponax, is the tetrameter or Octonarius depri- 
ved of its final syllable. 

II. The same variations are admissible here as in the 
case of the trimeter and tetrameter, and the comic writers, 
who sometimes used this species of verse, took as great 
liberties with it as with the trimeter; always observing, 
however, to make the seventh foot an iambus. 

Catull. Remitt\e paU\\ium | mi hi \\ meiim | quod in^vdlds\ti. 
Id. Deprens\d ndv\\is in \ mari || vesd\nien\\te venl\d. 
Id. Quum de | via || mulier \ aves || ostend\it dsc\\itdnt\es. 
Terent. Non poss\um sat? || ndrrdr\e quos || ludos \ prdibue-W 
ns int\us. 

Id. Ndstra\pte cul\\pd faci\mus ut || maids \ expedi\\at 
ess\e. 

III. In this measure there is uniformly a division of the 
verse at the* end of the fourth foot. Thus, 

Remitte pallium mihi || meum quod involasti 
Deprensa navis in mari || vesanicnte vento. 

IV. This species of verse is a great favourite with the 
Greek comic poet Aristophanes, and is also found in many 
passages of the Latin comedians. The only specimen of 
it, however, in a pure state in the Latin classics, is a short 
poem of Catullus'. 1 

1 . This measure comes to our ears with a very lively and graceful 
cadence in those lines where accent and quantity do not clash. Thus, 



IAMBIC MEASURES. 



175 



11. Galliambus. 

I. This measure derives the first part of its name from 
the Galli, or priests of Cybele, by whom it was employed 
in their wild orgies. 

II. The only specimen of this verse extant is the poem 
of Catullus on the legend of Atys, consisting of 93 lines, 
and remarkable for the wild dithyrambic spirit that per- 
vades it. 

III. From the scanty remains that we possess of this 
measure, it becomes a difficult task to determine its struc- 
ture with any great degree of precision. The following, 
however, is the scheme given by Vulpius, an eminent com- 
mentator on the Roman poet : 

1. The first foot of the six into which he divides the 
measure is generally an anapaest, but sometimes a 
spondee or a tribrach. 

2. The second is generally an iambus, rarely an anapaest, 
a tribrach, or a dactyl. 

3. The third is generally an iambus, rarely a spondee 

4. The fourth is a dactyl or spondee. 

5. The fifth is often a dactyl, sometimes a cretic or 
spondee. 

6. The sixth is an anapaest, and sometimes an iambus, 
preceded by a cretic. 

According to this view of the Galliambic measure, the 
scale is as follows : 



1 


2 


3 


4 


5 


6 




V_X 











Idemque Thalle turbida rapacior procella ; 

like the English ballad, 1 i And thus we daily dance and sing, and cast 
all care behind us." 



176 



TROCHAIC MEASURES. 



IV. The following lines will afford an idea of the meas* 
ure : 

Super al\ta vect\us At\ys celer\t rate | marta. 
Ubi capita Mce\nades | vi jaci\unt hcdefrigwTe. 
Viridem | citiis ad\tt l\dam prdper\ante pe\de chorus 
Abero | ford \ palcEst\rd stadi\o et gymn\as7is. 

V. Some prosodians, however, make the Galliambic 
measure consist, of an iambic dimeter catalectic (the first 
foot of which is generally a spondee or an anapaest), fol- # 
lowed by another such dimeter wanting the last syllable. 
Hence they give the scale with its variations as follows: 



1 2 3 4 5 6 7 




Super dlt\d vect\us At\ys || celeri \ rate ma\ria. 
Ubi capi\ta M<£?i\ddes \ vi \jdciunt | hcden\gcrce. 
Viridem | cilus dd\it l\dam \\ properant\e pcde \ chorus. 

SECTION XXXIII. 
TROCHAIC MEASURES. 

I. Trochaic verse derives its name from the foot which 
prevails in it, namely, the trochee. 

If. Originally the trochee was the only foot allowed to 
enter into the line ; but variations were afterward introdu- 
ced, as in the case of iambic verse. 

lit. The trochee, like the iambus, is convertible into a 
tribrach. Hence this last-mentioned foot is allowed to en- 
ter, and so are the spondee and anapaest. The dactyl, 
however, is in general not admitted, except in the case of 
a proper name. 

IV. ^ difference, deserving of careful notice, exists be- 
tween the iambic and trochaic measures, in that the former 



TROCHAIC MEASURES. 



177 



admits the spondee and anapaest into the uneven places 
but the trochaic into the even only. 



1. Trochaic Dimeter Catalectic. 

I. This measure consists of three feet, properly all tro- 
chees, and a catalectic syllable ; as, 

Horat. Non e\bur ne\\que aure\um, 
Prud. Dona | co?isci\\enti\<B. 

II. In the second place it admits the spondee, the dac 
tyl, and likewise the anapaest. 

Senec. Lenls \ ac modi\\cum jlu\ens, 
Aura | riec ver\\gens lat\us 
Ducat | intrepi\\dam rat\em 
Tuta | me medi\\a ve\hat 
Vita | decurr\\ens vi\a, 

III. The trochaic dimeter catalectic is otherwise scanned 
as an Iambic Dimeter Acephalous. 



2. Trochaic Dimeter Acatalectic. 

I. The trochaic dimeter consists of four feet, properly 
all trochees ; as, 

Boeth. Ndnfa\cit quod 1] dptat | ipse.\\ 

II. The spondee, however, and its equivalents in quan- 
tity, the anapaest and dactyl, are admitted into the second 
place. 

Buchanan. tncd\l& terr\\arum ab | or tit, || 
Softs | ulti\\mum ad cu\bile || 
Eja | Domino \\jubl\late. \\ 
Consci\os sceler^is ne\fandi. \\ 



3. Trochaic Tetrameter Catalectic. 

I. This measure consists of seven feet and a catalectic 
syllable. 

II. Originally all the feet were trochees, but variations 



178 



TROCHAIC MEASURES 



having been subsequently introduced, the following result 
was finally obtained : 

1. The trochee may in every place be resolved into a 
tribrach. 

2. In the even places, that is, the second, fourth, and 
sixth, in addition to the trochee, a spondee is admis- 
sible, which may be resolved into an anapaest. 

3. A dactyl is admissible, in the case of a proper name, 
in any place except the fourth and seventh. 

III. The caesura uniformly takes place after the fourth 
foot, thus dividing the verse into a trochaic dimeter acata- 
lectic and a trochaic dimeter catalectic. 

IV. The scale, according to what has just been laid 
down, is as follows : 

i 2 3 i 5 6 7 



Proper Name. 



Crds am\et qui || nunquam am\avit \\ quique am\avtt |j eras 
am\et. 

Ver ?iov\um, ver \\ jam can\orum \\ vere | natus \\ orbis | est. 
Vere \ cdncord\\ant am\dres, \\ vere \ nubunt || alit\es, 
Et nem\us cdm\\am re\sdlvit || de mar\itis \\ imbri\bus. 1 

V. The following lines are given without the marks of 
scansion, to show the place of the caesura. 

Quando ponebam novellas ]| arbores mail et piri 
Cortici summce notavi || nomen ardoris mei. 
Nulla Jit exinde finis f| vel quies cupidinis : 
Crescit ardor, gliscit arbor, || ramus implet literas. 2 

VI. This metre was much used in hymns, for # whicH, 



1. These lines are taken from the Pervigilium Veneris, 

2. Burmann, Anthol. Lat., vol. 1, p. 687. 



CHORIAMBIC MEASURES. 



179 



from its grave and sonorous character, it is well adapted. 
The division made in the line by the caesural pause would 
suit, no doubt, the convenience of the chorus, one portion 
of their number singing the complete dimeter, the other the 
catalectic. Thus, 

Prudent. Macte judex mortuorum, \\ 

Made rex viventium. 
M. Cap. Scande cadi templa Virgo, || 
Digna tanto feeder e. 

VII. The comic writers took equal liberties with this as 
with the iambic measure, introducing the spondee and its 
equivalents, the anapsest and dactyl, into the trochaic places. 



Terent. 


Quot mdd\Ts con\\temtus | spretus? || facta [ trans- 




act^ dmm\a hem. 


Id. 


T ant am | rem tarn [| necle\genter \\ agere? | pratefi-W 




ens mdd\d. 


Id. 


Obstipu\i cen\sevb me \ verbum \\ potulss\e ullum || 




prdlb\qui out. 


Id. 


Tot me im\pediunt || cures | qu& me\\um animum j 




divots® tra\hunt. 


Id. 


AUqutd | facerem, ut 11 hoc ne | fdcerem \\ sed nunc \ 




quid pri\\mum exse\quar? 



SECTION XXXIV. 
CHORIAMBIC MEASURES. 

I. Choriambic verses are so denominated from the foot 
(or measure) which predominates in them, namely, the 
choriambus, compounded of a choree (or trochee) and an 
iambus ; as, TantaUdair 

II. The structure of choriambic verses is extremely sim- 
ple, the first foot (with the exception of the dimeter) being 
generally a spondee, sometimes a trochee or iambus, the 
last an iambus, while one, two, or three choriambi are in- 
terposed. 



i 



ISO 



CHORIAMBIC MEASURES. 



1. Choriambic Dimeter. 

I. The Choriambic Dimeter consists of a choriambus 
and a bacchius ; as, 

Horat. Lydia die | per omnes. 

Perdere cur | apricum. 
Cur neque mi\titdris. 
Temper at d\ra frenis. 

II. This measure occurs once in Horace, in conjunction 
with another species of choriambic verse. 

2. Choriambic Trimeter Acatalectic, or Glyconic. 

I. This measure, called Glyconic from the poet Glycon, 
its inventor, consists, as it appears in Horace, of a spondee, 
a choriambus, and an iambus ; as, 

Sic te | Diva potens \ Cypri. 
Ventd\rumque regat \ pater. 
Navis ] qua. tibi cre\ditum. 

II. This species of choriambic verse is not used in ft 
system by itself in the works of either Horace or Catullus, 
but in combination with other species of choriambic meas- 
ures. 

III. Horace, who was very fond of the Glyconic, invari- 
ably adheres to the spondee in the first place, except in the 
two following instances, where a trochee occurs : 

Teucer et Sthenelus sciens. (OcZ., 1, 15, 24.) 
Ignis Iliacas domos. (Ib., 1, 15, 36.) 
The best editions, however, now read, 

Teucer, te ^Sthenelus sciens. 
Ignis Pergameas domos. 

IV. Catullus, however, frequently has a trochee in the 
. first place ; as, 

Rusti\ca agricdla \ bonis. 
Cinge | tempora Jldr\tbus. 
Fldmme\um cape lce\tus hue. 



CHORIAMBIC MEASURES. 



181 



Nupti\alia ccm\cinens. 
Voce | carmina finn\ula. 

V. The same poet also occasionally uses an iambus in 
the first place ; as, 

Puell\(£ et pueri in\tegri. 

VI. In the following line Horace lengthens a short final 
syllable by the force of the caesural pause : 

Sif\git adamant\inos. 

3. Choriambic Trimeter Catalectic, or Pherecratic. 

I. The Pherecratic verse, so called from the poet Pher- 
ecrates, is the Glyconic (which we have just been consid- 
ering) deprived of its final syllable. It consists of a spon- 
dee, a choriambus, and a catalectic syllable ; as, 

Horat. Grato | Pyrrha sub an\trd. 
Id. Nigris | Ikquora vent\is. 
Id. Sperdt | nescius aur\~<k. 

II. This species of verse, like the preceding, is not found 
in a system by itself in the works of either Horace or Ca- 
tullus. 

III. In Horace, the first foot is invariably a spondee. In 
Catullus, although a spondee is sometimes employed in *he 
first foot, a trochee is far more common ; as, 

Amni\umque sonant\um. 
Dicta | lumine Lun\a. 
Tecta | frugibus ex\ples. 

IV. An iambus also occurs in Catullus, but rarely ; as, 

Puell^que cana\mus. 
Hymen \ O Hymencefe. 

V. In one instance in Catullus, a long syllable is found 
supplying the place of the two short ones that contribute to 
form the choriambus ; as, 

Nutri\unt humor\e. 

Q 



182 



CHORIAMBIC MEASURES. 



VI. The Pherecratic, as it appears in Horace, with a 
spondee in the first place, is scanned by some as a dactylic 
trimeter acatalectic. Thus, 

Grdto | Pyrrha sub \ dntro. 

Nigris | aquora \ vends, 

Sperat | nescius | aiircB. 

4. Choriambic Asclepiadic Tetrameter. 

I. This measure (sometimes called the Minor Asclepia- 
dic) consists of a spondee, two choriambi, and an iambus. 

II. The name Asclepiadic is derived from that of the 
poet Asclepiades, who is said to have been the inventor of 
the measure. 

III. The following are specimens of it : 
Horat. M(£ce\nas atavis || edite re\gibus. 
Senec. Non ill\um poterant || figere cusp\tdes. 
Prud. Hostis | dirus adest || cum duce per\fidd. 

IV. The csesural pause always falls after the first chori- 
ambus, as marked in the lines just given ; and in the fol- 
lowing verses this pause lengthens a short syllable. 

Horat. Quam si quidquid arat \\ impiger Appulus. 
Certa sede manet, \\ humor et in genas. 

V. The position of the caesural pause after the first chori- 
ambus, facilitates the scansion of this measure as a dactylic 
pentameter catalectic. Thus, 

Maecenas ata\vis \\ edite | regibus. 
Non lll\um pote\rant || figere | cuspides. 
Hostis | dirus ad\est \\ cum duce \ perfido. 

VI. This latter mode of scanning was, as we learn from 
Terentianus Maurus, adopted by many of his contempora- 
ries. He himself, however, condemns the practice. 1 

1 Sunt qui tradiderint, ultima versui 

Tanquam pentametro syllaba dempta sit, 

Quam si restituas, pentametrum fore, &c. (Ter. Maur., 2650.) 



CHORIAMBIC MEASURES. 183 

VII. Sometimes, though very rarely, the first foot of the 
Asclepiadic was made a dactyl ; as, 

Senec. Effugi\um, et miseros libera mors vocet. 
M. Capell. Ommge\num genitor regna movens Deum. 

5. Choriambic Tetrameter Acatalectic. 

I. This species of verse consists of three choriambi and 
a bacchius (~ ) ; as, 

Sept. Ser. Jane pater, \ Jane tuens | dive biceps J biforrtiis. 
Auson. Tu bene si j quid facias | non memiriiss\e fas est. 
Claud. Omne nemtts, | cum fluviis, \ omne canat \ pro- 
fundum. 

II. It admits, however, of variations, each of the three 
choriambi being changeable to other feet of equal time ; as, 

Seren. Cui resera\ta mugiunt j aurea claust\ra mundi. 
Id. Tibi vetus ar\a caluit abd\rigineo \ sacello. 

6. Choriambic Pentameter Acatalectic. 

I. This measure consists of a spondee, three choriambi, 
and an iambus ; as, 

Horat. Tu ne \ qucssieris, \ scire nefds, | quern rnihi, quern | 
tibu 

Id. Nullam | Tare sacra | vite prius \ sevens arb\orem. 
Catull. Alphe\ne irnmemor, at\que unanimis [ false soda\Ubus. 

II. This species of verse is sometimes called the Great- 
er Asclepiadic. 

Epichoriambic Verse. 
I. By Epichoriambic verse is meant a species of measure 
wb* ch admits some feet that do not properly belong to cho- 

And again : 

Quod jam pentametri non patitur modus ; 

Nam sic tres videas esse pedes datos. (Id., 2663.) 



184 



CHORIAMBIC MEASURES. 



riambic measure, but which are, as it were, superadded 
thereto. 1 

II. The most important varieties of this species of meas- 
ure are the two following : 

1. Epichoriambic Trimeter Catalectic, or Sapphic. 

I. This measure is a variety of the choriambic trimeter 
catalectic, and is composed of a second epitrit, a choriam- 
bus, and a bacchius ; as, 

Horat. Jam satis ter\ris riivis at\que diraz. 
Catull. CcBsarls vis\ens mdnument\a magni. 

II. In practice, however, it is more convenient to con 
sider it as composed of a trochee, a spondee, a dactyl, and 
two trochees ; as, 

Jam sat\is terr\is rams \ atque \ dim. 
Cciesar\is vis\ens monu\menta | magni. 

III. Horace invariably has a spondee in the second 
place ; but Catullus, imitating the example of the Greeks, 
admits a trochee ; as, 

Sell Sac\as sag\ittifer\dsque | Parthos. 

IV. Horace generally makes the first syllable of the dac- 
tyl caesural ; as, 

Pindarum quisquis \\ studet cemulare. 
Sanguinem, per quos \\ cecidere justa. 
Integer vitce \\ scelerisque purus. 

V. More rarely the first two syllables of the dactyl close 
a word, thus forming a species of trochaic caesura ; 2 as, 

1. The term Epichoriambic is from £7T£, "in addition to" and x°9 L " 
afiBoc. 

2. Horace, however, seems to have changed his opinion with regard 
to this pause. In the first three books of the Odes it occurs but seldom 
(as, for example, 1, 10; 1, 12; 1, 25; 2, 30; 2, 6, &c), while in 
book fourth it happens eleven times in odes second and sixth, four times 
in ode eleventh, and twelve times in the Carmen Saculare. The form 

Nuntium curvceque lyrcc parcntcm, 

where the enclitic que is the second syllable of the dactyl, occurs twice 



CHORIAMBIC MEASURES. 



185 



Laurea donandus || Apollinari. 
Pinus aut impulsa |] cupressus Eu to. 

VI. In one instance, Horace lengthens a short syllable 
in the caesura ; as, 

Angulus ridet |] y.bi non Hymetto. (Oc?., 2, 6, 14.) 

VII. Catullus, following the Greeks, neglects this caesu- 
ra altogether ; as, 

Seu Sacas sagittiferosque Parthos. (11, 6.) 
TJltirni jlos prceterennte postquam. (11, 22.) 

Sapphic Stanza. 

I. This stanza, so called from the two celebrated frag- 
ments of the gifted Sappho that have reached our times, 
consists of three Sapphic lines, such as have just been de- 
scribed, followed by an Adonic, or Dactylic Dimeter Acat- 
alectic. 

II. Taking Horace for our model, the scale of the Latin 
Sapphic stanza will be as follows : 




Jam satis terris || nivis atque dir& 
Grandinis misit \\ pater, et rubente 
Dextera sacras \\ jaculatus arces 
Terruit urbem. 



III. There is one feature prominently conspicuous in the 
Sapphic stanza, namely, a close connexion between the 
third and fourth lines, and hence Horace four times divides 
a word between them : 

only in the first three books, namely, Oct., I, 10, 6, and 18, while in the 
fourth book it is found four tim^ in ode second, once in ode sixth, and 
seven times in the Carmen Sccculare. {Ramsay's hat. Pros., p. 195.) 

Q 2 



186 



CHORIAMBIC MEASURES. 



Labitur ripa, Jove non probante, ux- 

-orius arnnis. (1, 2, 19.) 
Thracio bacchante magis sub inter- 

-lunia vento. (1, 25, 11.) 
Grosphe non gemmis neque purpura ve- 

-nale nec auro. (2, 16, 7.) 
Pendulum zona bene te secuta e- 

-lidere collum. (3, 27, 59.) 

IV. We have a similar instance in Catullus (11, 11) : 

Gallicum Rhenum horribilisque ultim- 
-osque Britannos. 

V. This division of a word is confined, it will be remem- 
bered, to the third and fourth verse ; no example being 
found of such a division at the end of the first, second, or 
fourth. Hence it has been conjectured, and the supposi- 
tion is a very probable one, that neither Sappho, nor Catul- 
lus, nor Horace ever intended the stanza to consist of four 
separate verses, but wrote it as three, namely, two five foot 
Sapphics, and one of seven feet (the fifth foot of the long 
verse being indiscriminately either a spondee or trochee) ; 
thus: 1 

Jam satis terris nivis atque dirce 
Grandinis misit pater, et rubente 
Dextera sacras jaculatus arces, terruit urbem. 

Ilice dum se nimium querenti 

Jactat ultorem, vagus et sinistra 

Labitur ripa, Jove non probante, uxorius am?iis, 

Otium bello furiosa Thrace, 
Otium Medi pharetra decori, 

Grosphe, non gemmis, neque purpura venale nec auro. 

VI. Elision sometimes takes place between the second 

— # » 

1. Monthly Review, January, 179? p. 45. 



CHORIAMBIC MEASURES. 



187 



and third, and the third and fourth lines. Thus, in Hor- 
ace, 

2. Dissidens plebi numero beator(um) 

3. Eximit virtus, &c. (2, 2, 18.) 

2. Mugiunt vacca, tibi tollit hin?iit(um) 

3. Apia quadrigis equa, &c. (2, 16, 34.) 

2. Plorat, et vires animumque mores(qiie) 

3. Aureos educit in astra, nigro(q\\e) 

4. Invidet Oreo. (4, 2, 22.) 

3. Romulce genti date remque prolem(que) 

4. Et decus omne. (C S., 47.) 



VII. Elisions of this kind, however, are not necessary 
in their nature. Thus we find an hiatus between the third 
and fourth lines in the following, from Horace : 
Neve te nostris vitiis iniquum 

Ocior aura. (1,2, 47.) 
Between the first and second, from the same : 
Sive mutatajuvenem figura 
Ales in terris, &c. (1, 2, 41.) 
And between the second and third : 

Aut super Pindo gelidove in Hsemo 
JJnde vocalem temere insecuta 

Orphea sylva. (1, 12, 6.) 



2. Epichoriambic Tetrameter Catalectic, or Greater 
Sapphic. 

I. This measure consists of a second epitrit, two chor- 
iambi, and a bacchius ; as follows : 

Horat. Te deds dr\d Sybarin\cur proper as | amando. 



188 



IONIC VERSES. 



II. It is, in fact, the ordinary Sapphic, with the addition 
of a choriambus in the third place. 

III. The first syllable of the first choriambus ought to be 
c«sural, and there ought to be a division of the verse after 
the first choriambus. 1 

SECTION XXXV. 
IONIC VERSES. 
Ionic verses are of two kinds, the Ionic a majore and 
Ionic a minore, which are so denominated from the feet or 
measures of which they are respectively composed. 

1. Ionic a Majore Verses. 
Of these the most celebrated is the 

Ionic a Majore Tetrameter Brachycatalectic. 

I. This measure is otherwise called the Sotadean, from 
Sotades, a Thracian, who lampooned Ptolemy Philadelphus. 

II. In its pure state it consists of three Ionic a majore 
feet, followed by a spondee, according to the following 
scheme : 

— l-- — I-- — 1-- 

Tuld maris | iras videt | e lit tore | nauta. 

III. Several of these Sotadean verses are to be found itt 
the remains of the Greek poets, and have been carefully 
analyzed by Hermann. In Latin, a short fragment of En- 
nius, and a few irregular lines in Martial and Petronius 
Arbiter, are the only specimens of the measure, except 
such as are met with in Plautus. (AuL, 2, 1, 30 ; 3, 2.) 

IV. The Ionics a majore of Martial, and these are but 
two lines, have the proper foot in the first two places, and 
a ditrochaeus in the third, followed by a spondee. 

Has cum gemin\d compede \ dedicat cat\ends 
Saturne tib\i Zoilus | annulos pri\dres. 2 



1. Hermann, D. M. E., 3, 16.— -Ramsay's Lat. Pros., p. 199. 

2. Ep., 3, 30. 



IONIC VERSES. 



189 



V. This change of the third measure to a ditrochaeus 
eems to have been a favourite with the writers in this 

species of verse, as tending to give greater softness and 
harmony to the otherwise stiff and monotonous line. 

VI. By a farther variation, either of the long syllables 
in each of the three Ionic measures might be resolved into 
two short, which resolution was regarded as an improve- 
ment ; l but it does not appear that both the long syllables 
were ever thus resolved at the same time. 

Petron. Pede tendite, | cursum addite, convolate planta. 

Caecilius er\it consimilis pedis figura. 2 

Solet integer | anapaestus et | in fine heart. 

Hunc effici\et Mmucms | ut quis vocitetur. 

Catalexis enim dicitur | ea clausula | versus. 
Petron. Ferrum timui, quod trepi\d,b male dabat [ usu?n. 



2. Ionic a Minore Verses. 

I. The Ionic a minore verse is entirely composed of that 
foot or measure called the Ionic a minore. 

II. We have one specimen of this kind of verse in Hor- 
ace (Od., 3, 12), which is differently arranged by different 
editors, but is usually considered as a system of Tetrame- 
ters Acatalectic. 

III. Ionic a minore verses, in fact, are not confined to 
any particular number of feet or measures, but may, like 
anapaestics, be extended to any length, provided only, that, 
with due attention to synapheia, the final syllable in each 
measure be either naturally long, or be made long by the 
concourse of consonants ; and also that each sentence or 
period terminate with a complete measure, having the 
spondee or two long syllables of the Ionic foot for its close. 

1. " Nam, quo fuerint crebrius hi pedes minuti, 

Vibrare sonum versiculos magis videmus." 

{Terent. Maur.,v. 2054, seq.) 

2. This line, together with the three that follow, are taken from Te- 
rentianus, 



190 



LOGACEDIC VERSES. 



IV. The specimen from Horace above alluded to is aa 
follows : 

Miserarum est \ neque dmori \ dare ludum, \ neque dulci 
Mala vino \ lavere ; out ex\animari \ metuentes 
Patruce verb\era lingua. | Tibi qualum | Cythereck 
Puer ales, | tibi telds, \ operds~a\que Minerva 
Studium aufert, \ Neobule, | Lipdrei \ nitor Hebri, &C* 

SECTION XXXVI. 

LOGAGEDIC VERSES. 

I. Loga&dic verses are those which are formed by add* 
ing any number of trochees to any dactylic verse. 

II. They receive their name from Xoyoc, M discourse" 
and doidrj, "song" because dactylic verse is the lofty 
language of poetry, whereas the trochaic approaches more 
nearly to ordinary discourse. 1 

III. Of logacedic verses the most important are the fol- 
lowing : 

1. Archilochian Heptameter. 

I. This measure is composed of a Dactylic Tetrameter a 
priore, followed by a pure Trochaic Dimeter Brachycata- 
lectic. 

II. The first three feet may be either dactyls or spon- 
dees ; the fourth is always a dactyl ; the last three are tro- 
chees. Thus, 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 



Horat. Solvitur \ dcris hy\ems gra\ta vice || verts | et Fav\dm. 

III. The first syllable of the third foot ought to be caesu 
ral, and the fourth foot ought to end with a word. 

1. The iambus is the true foot for discourse, and the trochee for dan- 
cing. Thus Aristotle remarks, yMXiora Tiektlkov tuv fiirpuv to ia t u- 
fclov kori. {A. P., 4.) 



LOGACEDIC VERSES. 



191 



IV. Horace uses this species of verse once in Od., 1, 4, 
where it is placed alternately with an Iambic Trimeter 
Catalectic. 

2. Alcaic Decasyllabic, or Minor Alcaic. 

I. This measure consists of a pure Dactylic Dimeter 
Acatalectic, followed by a pure Trochaic Monometer Acat 
alectic ; as, 

Flumina \ constiter\int ac\uto. 

II. This forms the fourth line of the celebrated Alcaic or 
Horatian stanza, which we are presently to consider. 

3. Phaljecian Hendecasyllabic. 

I. This measure, termed Phaleecian from the poet Pha- 
laecus, and Hendecasyllabic because consisting of eleven syU 
lables {evdena ovXXaftai), is composed of five feet, a spon- 
dee, a dactyl, and three trochees ; as, 

Mart. Non est | vivere \ sed val\e?*e \ vita. 
Catull. Quoi ddn\d lepid\um nov\um lib\ellum. 

II. In other words, it consists of a Dactylic Dimeter 
Acatalectic, followed by a Trochaic Dimeter Br achy catalectic. 

III. Catullus, with whom this is a favourite measure, 
uses a trochee not unfrequently in the first place, and some- 
times an iambus ; as, 

And|a modo pumice expolitum. (1, 2.) 
Tota | millia me decern poposcit. (41, 2.) 
Aminos 1 medicosque convocate. (41, 6.) 
Meas | esse aliquid putare nugas. (1, 4.) 

IV. This liberty, however, was rarely taken by the po- 
ets subsequent to Catullus. 1 

V. Catullus has in some instances marred the elegance 

1. In Statius, for instance, not a single example of the kind occurs in 
upward of 450 lines; in Pnidentius, not one in above 260; not one in 
Ausonius, who has more than 2000 verses in this measure ; while Sido- 
nius Apollinaris, in upward of 1200 Phalaecians, has not above two that 
can be proved, and these are proper names. {Carey's Lat. Pros., p. 282») 



192 



COMPOUND MEASURES. 



and harmony of this measure, by introducing a heavy spon- 
dee into the second place ; l as, 

Te camp\b qu&$\ivimus minore. (55, 3.) 

Et mult\\s \%x\v\uoribus peresus. (55, 31.) 

VI. The same poet, in one line of a very irregular piece, 
has a tribrach in the first place, a license, however, which 
appears authorized by the difficulty of otherwise employing 
a proper name. 

Cameri|wm mihi pessim.ee puclla. (55, 10.) 

VII. The name Hendecasyllabic does not exclusively be- 
long to Phalaecian verse, since there are other measures to 
which it is equally applicable. For instance, the Sapphic 
and a variety of the Alcaic not only contain the like num- 
ber of syllables, but also in like proportion of long to short, 
so that the same words sometimes may, in different posi- 
tions, become either a Phalaecian, a Sapphic, or an Alcaic. 
Thus, 

(Phal.) Summum \ nec metu\as di\em nec J dptes. 
(Sapph.) Nec di\em summ\um metu\ds nec | dptes. 
(Ale.) Summum j nec dpt\es || nec metu\as diem. 

SECTION XXXVII. 

COMPOUND MEASURES. 
1. Dactylico-Iambic. 

I. This measure occurs in the eleventh epode of Horace 
being used there alternately with the Iambic Senarius, and 
consists of a Dactylic Trimeter Catalectic, followed by an 
Iambic Dimeter Acatalectic ; as, 

Scrtbere \ versicu\lds || amdr\e per\\cussum \ gravi. \\ 

II. This measure properly falls under the head of Asy- 
nartete 2 verses, that is, the component parts are not subject 

1. This is made by some a separate measure, and called Pscudo-Pha- 
l<Bcian. 

2. From d, privative, and Gvvaprdc), " to join together j" hence aavv 
doTi]Tog y 44 not closely joined together." 



COMPOUND MEASURES. 



193 



to the ordinary laws of prosody and versification, since the 
last syllable of the first member of the verse may be either 
long or short, just as if it were the final syllable of a separ- 
ate line ; and, moreover, an hiatus may take place between 
the two members of the measure. Thus, 

Inachia furere, || silvis honorem decutit. 

Arguit et latere || petitus imo spiritus. 

Libera consilia || nec contumelies graves 

Fervidiore mero || arcana promorat loco. 

Vincere mollitia [] amor Lycisci me tenet. 
These lines all occur in the eleventh epode of Horace. In 
the first, second, and third, the short final syllables in fu- 
rere, latere, and consilia are considered long, by virtue of 
their position at the end of the dactylic trimeter catalectic ; 
while in the fourth and fifth there is an hiatus between the 
two members of the verse (mero arcana and mollitia amor). 

2. Iambico-Dactylic, or Elegiambic. 

I. This measure is directly the reverse of the preceding, 
that is, it consists of an Iambic Dimeter, followed by a 
Dactylic Trimeter Catalectic. Thus, 

Horat. Tu vi\na Torq\\udto \ move \\ consule | pressa me\d. 
Id, Redu\cet In || sedem | vice. j| Nunc et A\chameni\o. 
Id. Levar\e dir\\is pect\dra \\ solUci\tudim\bus. 
Id. Findunt | Scamand\\ri flum\ina \\ lubricus \ et Simo\is. 

II. This measure, like the preceding one, belongs prop- 
erly to the class of Asynartete verses ; and hence, in the 
second, third, and fourth lines just cited, the short final syl- 
lables in vice, pectora, and fiumina are considered long, by 
virtue of their position at the end of the iambic dimeter. 

III. There are in all nine lines belonging to this species 
of verse in Horace. It is not used in a system by itself, 
but is placed alternately with the heroic hexameter in 
Epode 13. 



194 



COMPOUND MEASURES. 



3. Alcaic Hendecasyllabic, or Greater Alcaic. 

I. This measure is compounded of an Iambic Monome~ 
ter Hyper cat alectic and a pure Dactylic Dimeter Acatalectic ; 
as, 

Horat. Vides | ut alt\a || stet nive | candidum. 
Claud. Venus \ revers\um \\ spernat A\donidem. 

II. But the first foot of the iambic portion is, of course, ■ 
alterable to a spondee ; as, 

Horat. ma\tre pul\chra \filia \ pulchrwr. 
Claud. Victum | fate\tur || Delos A\pdllinem. 

III. Horace much more frequently has a spondee than 
an iambus in the first place, and Prudentius always a spon- 
dee. 

IV. The Alcaic is sometimes scanned with a choriambus 
and an iambus in the latter colon or member ; as, 

Vides | ut alt\a |[ stet nive cand\idum. 
Venus | rcvers\um \\ spernat Add\nidem. 

V. Although Horace, who has made greater use of this 
measure in his lyric compositions than any other, never 
employed it except in conjunction with two other species 
of verse (see Alcaic Stanza, below), other writers have 
composed entire poems in it alone, as Prudentius, who ha« 
a long piece entirely consisting of unmixed Alcaics (Peri* 
teph., 14), and Claudian a shorter production (In Nupr 
Hon. Aug. et Mar.). 

VI. Claudian's piece begins as follows : 

Princeps corusco sidere pulchrior, 
Parthis sagittis tendere certior, 
Eques Gelonis imperiosior, 
Qua digna mentis laus erit arduce ? 
Qua digna forma laus erit ignea ? &c. 



The Alcaic Stanza. 
I. This consists of four lines : the first two are Alcaic 



COMPOUND MEASURES. 



195 



Hendecasyllabics, or Greater Alcaics ; the third is an Iam- 
bic Dimeter Hypermeter, or Alcaic Enneasyllabic ; and the 
fourth is an Alcaic Decasyllabic, or Minor Alcaic. 

II. The scheme of the Alcaic stanza is therefore as fol- 
lows : 



Lines 
and 2 



Line 3. 



Line 4. 



Vides ut alta stet nive candidum 
Soracte nec jam sustineant onus 
SylvcB laborantes geluque 
Flumina constiterint acuto ? 

III. According to the scheme which has just been gh en, 
it will be seen that the first foot in each of the first two 
lines may be either an iambus or a spondee. Horace, 
however, as we have already remarked, gives a decided 
preference to the spondaic commencement. Out of 634 
Alcaic Hendecasyllabics extant in his works, 18 only have 
an iambus in the first place ; that is, about one in thirty-five. 

IV. Once only do we find in the same poet two lines in 
succession beginning with an iambus ; as, 

Metu deorum continuit? quibus 

Pepercit arts? O utinam nova. (1, 35, 37.) 

V. The fifth syllable in the first and second lines ought 
always to be csesural ; as, 

Non si trecen\is ] quotquot eunt dies. 

VI. Horace, however, directly violates this rule twice. 1 

1. Special rules for the structure of the Alcaic stanza may be found 
in Ramsay, Lat. Pros., p. 220, seqq. 



196 



MISCELLANEOUS MEASURES. 



Mentemque lymphatam Mareotico. (1, 37, 14.) 
S&cclandus in certamuie Martio. (4, 14, 17.) 

SECTION XXXVIII. 

MEASURES NOT INCLUDED UNDER THE PREVIOUS 
CLASSIFICATION. 

1. Cretic Verse. 

I. Cretic numbers belong in strictness to the trochaic, 
and are nothing else but a Catalectic Trochaic Dipodia, 
which consists of arsis, thesis, and arsis again. 

IJ. Since this order is periodic, it is plain that the thesis 
cannot be doubtful, but consists always and necessarily of 
one short syllable only, but that each arsis may be resolv- 
ed ; whence it comes to pass that both the first and fourth 
paeon, and, moreover, even five short syllables, may be put 
for the cretic. Thus, 



III. It must also be remarked, that when several cretic 
feet are conjoined in one verse, no one coheres with an- 
other in a periodic order ; and the last syllable of the last 
foot, as every final syllable, cannot be resolved except in 
systems in which, since the numbers are continued in one 
unbroken tenour, the last foot of the verses, unless it is at 
the same time the last foot of the whole system, is subject 
to the same law as each intermediate foot. 

IV. Cretics are much used by the Roman tragedians and 
comedians, and with the same license as to prosody as the 
rest of the metres. "Whence, if tbey ever put a molossus 
for a cretic, they do it in such a manner as to conceal the 
fault iness of the measure under the ambiguity of a familiar 
pronunciation. 1 Thus, 

Plant. Aut solu\tds sinat, | quos argent\o cmerit. 2 

1. Bcntky ad Cic, Tusc. y 3, 19.— Id. ad Tcr. Adelph., 4, 4, 2.— 
Hermann, D. E. M. t 2, 19. 

2. Capliv., 2, 1, 11. 



MISCELLANEOUS MEASURES. 



197 



Plain. Qua ne eject\<£ e mdri amb\a> sumus, | te obsecro. 1 
Id. Ut tub | recipias | tecto, serv\esque nos. 2 

V. As they commonly use the tetrameter, they often 
made the verse, divided into two equal parts, asynartete. 3 
Thus, Ennius in the Andromacha : 

Quid pctdm \ prasidi out | exsequdr, \ quove nunc 
AJit auxiH\o exsili | — autfuga | freta siml 

VI. Plautus has not only dimeters sometimes, but still 
oftener catalectic tetrameters, and that, too, with the third 
foot having the last syllable doubtful, and the fourth admit- 
ting a resolution of the arsis. Thus, in the Trinuiflmus 
(2, 1, 17, seqq.): 

Da mihi hoc, \ mel meum, \ si me amas, \ si audis : 

Ibi pendent\em ferit : [jam dmpllus | drat. 

Non satis id \ est mdli, | ni dmplius't \ etiam, &c. 



2. Bacchiac Verse. 4 

I. The ancient metricians referred bacchiac numbers to 
the paeonic kind, as having arisen from the contraction of 
the second or fourth paeon. 

II. Modern scholars, 4 however, on account of the iambic 
anacrusis, have joined them with trochaic numbers, although 
they are in reality spondaic with an iambic anacrusis. 

III. The numbers of the amphibrach — if repeat- 
ed, were with reason displeasing to the ancients, on account 
of their too great weakness. Wherefore, to give them 
strength, they changed the trochee into a spondee, and 
thus produced the bacchius ). 

IV. The Roman tragedians and comedians made great 
use of bacchiac verses, joining also, for the most part, many 
of them together. 

1. Rud., 1, 5, 15. 2. Ibid., 1, 5, 19. 

3. Vid. page 192. 

4. Herm.y Elem. Doctr. Metr., 2, 22. 

R 2 



198 



MISCELLANEOUS MEASURES. 



V. The legitimate measure of a bacchius in the middle 
of verses is this, ^ ; but in the end of verses this, 



The freer prosody of the Latins, however, tolerates both a 
long anacrusis and a dissyllabic one. And a dissyllabic 
one was usually admitted by Plautus in the first and third 
foot of tetrameters, that is, in the beginning of each mem- 
ber, which is commonly composed of two feet ; sometimes 
in the second and fourth foot also. Thus, in the Aulula. 
ia (£, 1,4, seq.) : 

Quamquam haiid fals\a sum nos \ odiosas \ haberi. 
Nam multum | Id qu aces | merito dmries | hdbemur. 
In the Mencechm. (5, 6, 6) : 

Merito hoc no\bisfit qui \ quidem hue ven\erlmus, 
[n the Amphitryon (2, 1, 15) : 

Tun 1 me verb\ero dudes \ herum lu\dtficdri, 

VI. Tetrameters having a caesura at the end of the sec- 
ond foot are a kind very much in use. That caesura, how- 
ever, is often neglected. Plautus, who delighted very 
much in this measure, sometimes inserted a dimeter in the 
midst of tetrameters. Sometimes he even coupled two 
verses by means of an elision ; as in the Amphitryon (2, 2) : 

Satin parv\a res est | vdlupta\tum in vita a£|(que) 
In ceta\te Uganda, | pros quam quod | moles turn est. 

VII. These tetrameters sometimes appear to have clau- 
sulae of an iambic dimeter catalectic ; as in Terence, An- 
drian. (3, 2, 4) : 

Quod jus si ei\ddri biber\e et quantum im\peravi \\ date mox | 
ego hue | revert\or. 

VIII. Bacchiac verses sometimes appear to be continued 
in systems, so that a doubtful syllable has no place in the 
end of tli e verses, and words may be divided between two 



MISCELLANEOUS MEASURES. 



199 



verses. Thus, we have the following from Varro (jxepl 
'EgayGyyrjc, ap. Non., p. 336) : 

Quemnam te ess\e dicarn \ fera qui \ manic cdr-\ 
pons ferv\idos font\ium aperis | lacus san-\ 
guinis, te\que vita \ levas ferr\eo ense. | 
IX. Catalectic bacchiacs, having the last foot an iambus, 
are remarkable in Plautus. Thus, we have the following 
dimeters in the Persa (2, 28, 30) : 

Perge, ut cce\peras, 
Hoc, lend | iibi 
Delude, ut \ lubet, 
Herus dum hinc | abest. 
Vtdesne, ut \ tuis 
Dictis par\eo ? 



3. Saturnian Verse. 

I. The Saturnian verse, which some rank among the asyn- 
artete measures, appears to have been the only one used by 
the most ancient Roman poets. 

II. In it both inscriptions and poems were written. Liv- 
ius Andronicus translated the Odyssey into this measure, 
and in it Naevius wrote his poem on the First Punic War. 

III. The Saturnian has the following scheme : 



1 


. 2 


3 


4 


5 


6 


7 

















Dabunt j malum \ Metell\i \\ Ncevi\o po\eta. 

IV. But the rude poets of this early- age both disregard- 
ed the caesura often, and used every kind of resolution, re- 
solving even the doubtful syllable in the end of the first 
member. After the manner of ancient language, too, they 
allowed spondees in all the places. Nay, the most ancient 
of the poets seem to have thought it sufficient if their verses 
only bore some sort of resemblance to these numbers. The 



200 UNION OF DIFFERENT KINDS OF VERSE. 

verses of the inscription composed by Ngevius on himself, 
and preserved by Aulus Gellius (1, 24), are tolerable 
enough : 

Morta\Us im\mdrta\lis Wflere | si for\et fas, 
Flerent \ dives, \ Camce\nb3 || Nmvi\um pd\etam. 
Itaque | postquam est | Orci\no \\ tradi\tus thes\aurd, 
Obll\ti sunt | Roma \ loqui\\er Lat\ina \ lingua. 
V. The last of the Romans who used this measure ap- 
pears to have been Varro in his Satires. 1 

SECTION XXXIX. 
ON THE UNION OF DIFFERENT KINDS OF VERSE. 2 

I. A poem receives the name of Monocolon, Dicolon, Tri- 
colon, &c, according to the number of different species of 
verse which it contains. 

II. When a poem contains one species of verse only, it 
is called Monocolon (from [idvog, " alone" " single" and 
k&Xov, " a limb" or " member"). The Eclogues, Gcorgics, 
and iEneid of Virgil, the Satires and Epistles of Horace, 
the Metamorphoses of Ovid, are all examples of Carmina 
Monocola, since they consist of hexameters alone. So also 
the first ode of the first book of the Odes of Horace is a 
Carmen Monocolon, since it is a system of choriambic As- 
clepiadics, unbroken by any other species of verse ; and 
so on. 

III. When a poem contains two species of verse, it is 
called Dicolon. The Fasti and Epistles of Ovid, the Ele- 
gies of Tibullus and Propertius, which are composed of 
dactylic hexameters and dactylic pentameters, placed alter- 
nately, are Carmina Dicola. So also those odes which are 
writien in the Sapphic stanza : the third of the first book 
of Horace, which contains two different species of chor- 
iambic verse, and numerous others. 



1. Herm.j Doctr. Elem. Metr., 3, 9. 

2. Ramsay's Lat. Pros., p. 230, scq. 



UNION OF DIFFERENT KINDS OF VERSE. 201 



IV. When a poem contains three different species of 
?erse, it is called Tricolon. Of this we have an example 
in the Alcaic stanza of Horace, which is composed of three 
different kinds of verse. 

V. Another series of terms has been devised in order to 
point out the intervals after which the first species of verse 
used in any poem regularly recurs. 

VI. When the first species of verse regularly recurs 
after the second line, the poem receives the epithet of 
Distrophon. 

VII. Thus, poems composed in elegiac verse are called 
Carmina Dicola Distropha. But a poem in the Sapphic 
stanza, although Dicolo?i, is not Distrophon, because the 
first species does not recur regularly until after the fourth 
line. 

VIII. When the first species of verse recurs after the 
third line, the poem receives the epithet Tristrophon ; after 
the fourth line, Tetrastrophon ; and after the fifth line, Pen- 
tastrophon. 

IX. According to this system, a poem written in the 
Sapphic stanza is termed Carmen Dicolon Tetrastrophon; 
in the Alcaic stanza, Carmen Tricolon Tetrastrophon ; while 
the Epithalamium of Julia and Manlius, in Catullus, is Di- 
colon Pentastrophon. 

X. This species of nomenclature, however, is by no 
means perfect, as it does not point out the circumstances 
under which the first species of verse is repeated . Thus, in 
the Alcaic stanza, the first two lines are in the same species 
of verse, the third and fourth are different from this and 
from each other ; the grammarians, however, call a poem in 
this stanza Tricolon Tetrastrophon. But if a stanza of four 
lines is arranged in such a manner that the first line is one 
species of verse, the second and the third different from the 
first, but the same with each other, and the fourth different 
from any of the preceding ; or if the first and second are 
different from each other, the third and fourth different from 



202 



LATIN ACCENTUATION. 



the two preceding, but the same with each other, then, in 
either of these cases, the poem must be called Tri colon 
Tctrastrophon. So a poem in the Sapphic stanza is called 
Dicolon Tetrastrdphon ; but if a stanza were composed con- 
taining one Sapphic line followed by three Adonics. the 
poem would still bear the same appellation. 

SECTION XL. 

LATIN ACCENTUATION. 1 

In every word of more than one syllable, one is distin 
guished by a peculiar stress or elevation of the voice, which 
is called accent, of which those that precede or follow are 
destitute. The syllable so distinguished is said to have 
the acute accent, which is sometimes marked thus (') ; the 
grave ( v ), which is seldom marked, is supposed to be placed 
over those syllables which are pronounced without that 
stress of the voice before spoken of. The circumflex, (*) or 
(~), is supposed to be formed by a combination of the acute 
and the grave, and hence is usually placed over contracted 
syllables. 

In modern languages, the accent, when it falls upon a 
short syllable, has, in most cases, the same effect as if it 
were long ; but in Latin and Greek, accent and quantity 
were distinguished from each other ; and, by care and prac- 
tice, this may be done in reading those languages. 

Words of two syllables have in Latin the accent on the 
first : if this is naturally long, as in Roma, mater, there is 
no difficulty ; if short, as homo, pater, we must endeavour 
to give the first syllable that percussion of the voice which 
constitutes the accent, without lengthening the vowel, 01 
yet doubling the following consonant. 

The accent never falls on the last syllable of Latin words 
except when words of the same letters, but different senses 
are to be distinguished by it: e. g., pone, behind ; ergo, on 



I. Zumpfs Latin Grammar, Kenrick's edition, p. 469, seqq. 



LATIN ACCENTUATION. 



203 



account of ; to distinguish, them from pdne (imper. of pono), 
and trgo, therefore. 

Words of three syllables or more have the accent on the 
last syllable but one (penultima) when it is long, and on the 
last but two (antepenultima) when the penult is short ; as, 
amdsse, audisse, imper ator, homines, Constantinopolis. No 
accent is in Latin thrown farther back than the antepenult- 
ima. 

Some words, from their close connexion with those which 
precede them, are pronounced as if they were the last syl- 
lables of those words ; e. g., prepositions when they are 
placed after their cases, and ne, que, ve. They are called 
enclitics; and the last syllable of the word to which they 
are appended always has the acute accent ; as, pecioribus- 
que. 

As the system of accents in Latin is so simple, no ac- 
centual marks are used except the circumflex, which is 
placed over some contracted syllables, and over the abla- 
tives of the first declension (musd, poeta), to distinguish 
them from the nominative. The Latins themselves do not 
place the circumflex over the genitive ; and it is doubtful 
if this form arose from contraction. 



APPENDIX. 



RELATIVE VALUE OF THE LATIN POETS AS METRICAL 
AUTHORITIES. 1 

I. We will first give a list of the Latin poets, with the 
dates of their birth and death, where these particulars can 
be ascertained, and then a statement of their relative value 
as authorities in matters of a metrical nature. 



Livius Andronicus . B.C. 

N^vius 

Ennius 239 . 

Plautus 227 . 

Cecilius ...... 

Pacuvius 219 . 

Terentius 194 . 

Attius 170 . 

Lucilius 149 . 

Afranius 

Lucretius 96 . 

Catullus 87 . 

Virgilius 70 . 

Horatius 65 . 

Tibullus 59 (?) 

Propertius 54 (?) 

Ovidius 43 . 



Flourished. 

240 . 
235 . 



179 



Died. 

220 
204 
169 
184 
168 
. . 130 (!) 
. . 160 
139 (alive 103) 
121 . . 103 
100 . . 

. . 52 

. . 46 

. . 19 

. . 8 

. . 20 

. . 14 

A.D. 17 



'Cornelius Gallus. 
Pedo Albinovanus. 
Publius Syrus. 
< Marcus Manilius. 
Gratius Faliscus. 
Aulus Sabinus. 
Ccesar Germanicus, 



1. Ramsay's hat. Pros., p. vii., seqq. 
S 



206 



APPENDIX. 





Born. 


FlouJ ished. 


Died. 


PH2EDRUS .... 


A.D. 


. 48 . 




Silius Italicus . . 


. . 25 . 




. 100 








. 63 








. 65 








. 120 








. 101 


Petronius Arbiter . 




. 61 . 




Valerius Flaccus . 


:+ r *\\f;)t% {ton 


. 69 . 


. 88 








96 






. 88 . 








. 160 . 




Dionysius Cato . . 


• • 


. 160 




Serenus Sammonicus 


• • 




. 212 


Commodianus . . 


• • 


. 265 . 








. 280 . 








. 284 . 








. 326 . 








. 337 . 










. 394 






. 394 . 








. 392 . 








. 400 . 








. 416 . 










. 431 


Prosper Aquitanus . 


• • 




. 463 






. 450 . 










. 474 


Sidonius Apollinaris . 


. . 438 (1) 




. 484 






. 456 . 




Martianus Capella . 




. 474 . 








. 490 . 






. . 470 (?) 




. 524 


Verrantius Fortunatus 


. . 530 . 







CO 



II. In the above list, some who precede Lucretius must be 
thrown out of consideration altogether. We can attach no 
importance, in controverted points, to these early bards, of 
whom nothing has descended to us except short and mutila- 
ted fragments. It is well known that these scraps are all 



APPENDIX, 



207 



collected, at second hand, from the old grammarians and 
others, who cited them for the purpose of proving or illus- 
trating particular points, which seldom have any reference 
to quantity. The quotations, it would seem, were frequently 
made from memory, and therefore subject to every kind of 
change and corruption in the first instance, in addition to the 
subsequent mutilations which they suffered in transcription, 
arising from the strange and uncouth dialect in which many 
of them were expressed. 

III. The comic dramatists, Plautus and Terence, must also, 
in strictness, be excluded. We are still comparatively igno- 
rant of the laws by which their verse is regulated, notwith- 
standing the labours of such men as Erasmus, Scaliger, Fa- 
ber, Hare, Bentley, Hermann, and a host of others. 

IV. Lucretius and Catullus, although inferior in genius to 
none of their successors, scarcely occupy the first rank in 
the estimation of the prosodian, because they may be said to 
exhibit the language in its transition state, at a period when 
much of the ancient roughness was removed, but when it had 
not yet received the last brilliant polish. 

V. Virgil, Horace, Tibullus, Propertius, and Ovid are our 
great standards ; yet even among these slight differences may 
be perceived. The first two never admit the double i in 
the genitive of nouns of the second declension in ium and ius, 
which is common in Ovid ; and the shortening of final o in 
verbs, which was afterward extended to nouns and adverbs, 
first begins to appear in the immediate successors of Virgil. 

VI. Of the above, Propertius is the least valuable, on ac- 
count of #ie small number and imperfections of the MSS., 
which have, in many passages, baffled the acuteness of the 
most practised editors. 

VII. Next follows a group of seven, all of little moment. 
After these we come to Phaedrus, whose fables are now gen- 
erally received as authentic ; but the text is derived from one 
or two indifferent MSS., and is, consequently, in many places 
confused and unsatisfactory. 

VIII. With regard.to those who come after, up to the end 
of the first century, it may be laid down as a rule, that their 
authority is admissible in points where we can obtain no 
information from purer sources, but must never be placed 



208 



APPENDIX. 



in competition with that of the great masters who went 
before. 

IX. All the successors of Statius must be regarded as of 
little value for matters of prosody, except Calpurnius, Auso- 
nius, and Claudian, the latter of whom is not more remark- 
able for the purity of his diction than for the false glitter of 
his style. 



IN D 



E X. 



Page 

A final 66-68 

A " in numerals n. 3 on 68 
A ending 1st member of com- 
pound words ..... 43 
A in sing, increment of 1st 

declension 49 

A in sing, increment of 3d de- 
clension 50 

A in plural increment of nouns 59 
A in increment of verbs . . 61 
A the preposition in composi- 
tion 40 

A in Greek compounds n. on 43 
A vocative of Greek nouns in 

es and e ... n. 2 on 68 
Ab, the preposition in compo- 
sition .... 
Abicit, abici . . . 
Abiegni as ab-yegni 
Abiete as ab-yete . 
Abscidi and abscidi 
AcademTa . . . 
Acatalectic verses . 
Accent, Latin . . 
Acephalous verses . 
Achille .... 



41 
. 126 
. 120 
. 119 
. 33 
2 on 22 
. 144 
. 202 
. 145 
n. 1 on 69 
Ad, preposition in composition 41 
Adicit (adjicit), adici, fyc. . 126 
Adjectives ending in -acus, 
-icus, 4-c, quantity of pe- 
nult of 99 

Adonic verse 146 

Ador n. 1 on 57 

Aeta n. on 25 

^Egaeon . 5-7 

Molic dialect, pronunciation 

of n. 2 on 157 

Molic pentameter . . . .151 
Afranius, metrical authority of 206 

Agmtum 37, 40 

Agri-cultura 45 

Ai in genitive of 1st declension 
explained . . . . n. on 17 

Ai, quantity of 19 

32 



Paga 

Aio (trisyllabic and dissylla - 
bic) 19 

Aio explained . . n. 2 on 19 
Al, nouns ending in, incre- 
ment of 51 and n. 

194 
191 
167 
191 
194 
194-5 
149 
21 
18 

n. 1 on 18 



Alcaic verse (the greater) 

" " (minor) 

" enneasyllabic 

" decasyllabic . 

" hendecasyllabic 

" stanza 
Alcmanian tetrameter 
Alexandrea . . . 

Alms 

Altenus .... 

Ambe . . * 23 

Ambitus and ambitus 

25, 35, n. on 40 
An, Greek accus. from nom. 

a . . . . . n. 2 on 85, 87 
An, Greek accus. from nom. as 85 

Anapcest 162 

Anapaestic verses . . . 161-5 
" dimeter . . . .163 
" " catalectic . 164 

" monometer . . .163 

Anas 90 

Anceps, ancipes, #c. n. 1 on 49 
Antea, fyc, formation of n. 1 01166 

Antithesis 125 

Aperio, quantity of initial syl- 
lable 127 

Apharesis 122 

Apocope 124 

Appendix, increment of 

n. 1 on 56 
Ar, nouns in, increment of 

56 and n. 

Arabia, quantity oflsl syllable 128 

Archaisms 121 

Archilochian iambic dimeter 

hypermeter 167 

Archilochian heptameter . . 190 
Ariete as ar-yete » . . ,119 



210 



INDEX. 



Page 

Aristophanes, metre much used 

by 174 

As final 52, 89 

As, Greek nouns in, increment 

of 62 

90 
90 
182 
81 



As, Greek nominative . . 
As, " accusative plural 
Asclepiadic verse (minor) . 
At in contracted preterites 
Atreides, Atrldes . n. 2 on 98 
Attius, value as metrical au- 
thority 206 

Ausonius, value as metrical 

authority 208 

Authority in quantity ... 15 

B. 

3 filial 80 

Bacchiac verse 197 

Base in metre 141 

Bebryx, increment of ... 56 
Bibi, from bibo ..... 32 

Biduum, <SfC 46 and n. 

Bigae, SfC n. 3 on 45 

Bimus, <SfC. . , . n. 6 on 45 
Bobus and bubus . n. 1 on 48 
Brachycatalectic verse . . .144 
Britto, increment of ... 57 



C final 81 

Caecilius, value as metrical 

authority 206 

Ccesura 101 

" kinds of .... 102 
" rules for . . . .104 
" power of . . 106-107 
Cams, trisyllabic . . . . 18 
Callinus, inventor of elegy . 156 
Calpurnius, value as metrical 

authority 208 

Catalectic verses .... 144 
Catullus, value as metrical au- 
thority 207 

Causidicus 40 

Cave, quantity of . n. 2 on 70 
Cecidi and cecidi . . . . 31 

Celtiber 50, 88 

Censitum, censltor, cf-c. 

n. 2 on 36 

Choliambus 171 

Chorea and chorea .... 20 
Chor iambic verses . .17 188 



183 



183 



151 
180 
181 
[80 



Choriambic pentameter 
" tetrameter . 
" Asclepiadic te- 
trameter 182 

Choriambic tetrameter catalec- 
tic 

Choriambic trimeter acatalectic 
" " cataiettic 
" dimeter acatalectic 
Ciris, value as metrical au- 
thority n. on 7? 

Citum, cltum, and compounds 35 
Claudian, value as metrical 

authority 208 

Cognltum, SfC 37, 40 

Compendi-facio 45 

Compound words, quantity of 39 
" metres . . 192-196 

Concitus 34-35 

Conjicio 126 

Conjugations, ancient form of 

n. 4 on 23 

Connubium 40 

Conopeum and Conopium 

n. 1 on 22 

Consonants 13 



Contracted syllables 
Contraction of ea . 

" ei . 



23-24 
114 
115 
115 
116 
116 
116 
116 
117 
117 
126 
196 
74 

Cur n. 1 on 88 



eo 
ia 
ii 
io 
iu 
oo 
ee 



Corcodilus and crocodilus 

Cretic verse 

Cui (dissyllabic) 



D final 80 

Dactylic verses . . . 145-161 
" " ccesura in . 159 
" versification, origin 

of 157 

Dactylic hexameter . . . .157 
" " Meiurus . 161 

" Priapean . . . .160 
" pentameter . . .151 
" " rules for 152 

Molic . 151 



INDEX. 



211 



Page 

Dactylic Pht, acian pentameter 1 50 
. " tetrameter a priore . 149 
" " a posterior e 149 
" " Meiurus . 148 
" " catalectic . 148 
" trimeter .... 147 
" " i0z£& a . 147 
" " hyper -catalec- 
tic 147 

Dactylic trimeter catalectic . 146 
" dimeter . . . .145 
Dactylico-iambic metre . .192 
De, preposition in composition 40 
Dedi/>wi do ...... 32 

Dejero 40 

Deponent verbs . . n. 1 on 60 
Derivatives, quantity of . . 37 
" " " excep- 

tions to . . . n. 3 on 37, 39 
Desiderative verbs in -urio . 100 
Di, preposition in composition 40 

Dicer esis 121 

Diana n. on 19 

Diastole . '. 128 

Dicare, dicere 38 

Dicolon 200 

Dionaeus, remarks on quantity 

ofdd 25 

Diphthongs 13 

" " quantity of . . 25 
" erroneously rank- 
ed as 26 

Dipodia 141 

Dirimo n. on 40 

Dirutum n. on 35 

Disertus n. on 40 

Distrophon 201 

Diu ... . . . n. 1 on 79 

Do, increment of 

61-62, and n. 1 on 61 
Oonec ..... n. 1 on 81 

Double letters 13 

Duo n. 1 on 47 

E. 

E final 68-72 

E " of adverbs .... 70 
E " " monosyllables . . 71 
E in Greek neuter plural . . 70 
E in increment of 3d declen- 
sion 52-54 

E in contracted gen* a id dat. 
of 5th declension . n. 1 on 69 



E in plural increment of nouns 59 
E in verbal increment ... 62 
E before II {in verbs) "... 62 
E " ram, rim, ro . . . 63 
E terminating 1st member of 

compound words .... 44 
E, preposition in composition 40 
E long from Greek el . . . 21 
E in imperative of verbs of 2d 

conjugation . . n. 2 on 70 
Ea, Greek accusative from eus 22 

Ectasis 128 

Ecthlipsis 112 

Ego, quantity of final syllable 

n. 1 on 78 

Eheu n. 1 on 20 

Ei of 5th declension . n. on 17 
El in Hebrew names . . 53, 83 
Elegiambic measure . . .193 

Elegiac distich 155 

Elegy, origin of (eXsyoc) . .156 
Elision of final vowels . . .108 
" ofM. final and its vow- 
el sometimes neglected . .113 
Elision, effect of in poetry . 108 
" at the end of a verse 113 
" of the vowel of ne 109 

it a a tt 

sometimes neglected . . .110 
Elision of a short vowel neg- 
lected in Virgil . . . .112 
Elision in compound vjords . 24 
" of final s 

n. 2 on 108, 107, 108 
Elision, rules for . . . .113 
Endo for in . . . n. 3 On 23 
Ennehemimeris . . n. 1 on 102 
Ennius, value as metrical au- 
thority 206 

Eos, Greek genitive from eus 22 

Epenthesis 123 

Epichoriambic verse . . .183 
" trimeter catalec- 
tic 184 

Epichoriambic tetrameter . .187 
Er, nouns in, increment of 53—54 

Ergo n. 1 on 77 

-erunt of preterite, shortening 
of penult in . 63, n. 1 on 127 

Erutum n. on 35 

Es final . . . 90, n. 2 on 90 
Es of Greek nouns .... 92 
Es Greek masc. singular . 53-54 



212 



INDEX. 



Page 

Es from edo ... n. 1 on 91 
Es from sum, and compounds 

n. 1 on 91 

Eus, adjectives in .... 2\ 
Eus, Greek proper names in . 26 
u according to Latin de- 
clension 26 

Excitus 34-35 

F. 

Fac n. 3 on 81 

Facio, verbs compounded with 44 
Faliscan verse . . n. 1 on 148 
Fame, quantity of final syllable 

n. 1 on 69 

Far n. 1 on 88 

Feet, metrical 131 

table of. 138-139 
" simple .... 132-135 
" compound . . . 135-138 
" isochronous . . 142-143 

Fere 71 

Fidi from findo 32 

Figures of Prosody 101-131 

Final syllables 66 

" " of a verse . 97 

Fio, quantity of penult n. on 16 
" verbs compounded of . . 4A 
Fluviorum as fluv-yorum . 120 

Foris n. 1 on 94 

Fortuitus 120 

Fur n. 1 on 28 

Fuvi, an old perfect . . .123 

G. 

Galliambus 175 

Gerunds in do, quantity of 
final syllable . . n. 3 on 76 

Gly conic verse 180 

Gratis n. 1 on 94 

H. 

H a mere breathing . 14, 16, 27 
H dropped between tvjo vowels 24 
Hannibal . . . n. 1 on 51, 82 

Hemistich 144 

Hephthemimeris . . n. 1 on 102 
Heroic caisural pause . . .159 

" verse . ' 158 

Hexameters most ancient 

n. 2 on 157 
Hexameters introduced into the 

Latin by Enniws . . .156 
Hie and hoc ... 82 and n. 1 



Hipponactic tetrameter . .174 
" trimeter . . .172 

Hodie 127 

Horace, value as metrical au- 
thority 207 

Hymen 53 

Hyper catalectic verses . . .145 
Hypermeter verses .... 143 

I. 

1 as a consonant, and sounded 

as initial y 119 

I terminating 1st member of 

compound words .... 45 
I in singular increment of 3d 

declension 54 

I in plural increment of nouns 59 
I in verbal increment ... 63 

I final 72 

I long from Greek et . . . 21 
I Greek, vocative of 3d declen- 
sion 72 

I final lengthened by arsis 

n. 1 on 72 
I in 2d fut. ind. and perfi subj. 

65 and n. 1 

I in Greek dative 3d declension 72 
Iambic verses . . . 165-176 

" trimeter 169 

" " comic . . .172 

" " catalectic . .168 

" scazon 171 

" tetrameter . . . .173 
4 4 " catalectic . 174 

" dimeter 167 

" " acephalous . 166 

" " hypermeter . 167 

" " catalectic . .166 

Iambico-dactylic metre . .193 
Iambus, origin of name . .133 

Iber 50, 86 

Ibi n. 2 on 73 

Ibidem 46 

Idem n. 2 on 45 

Iesus 97 

I lis, adjectives in, quantity of 

penult 99 

In, preposition in composition 41 
Increment of nouns .... 48 
" " 1st and 2d 
declension . . . 50 end n. 2 
Increment of nouns, 3d declen- 
sion 50-59 



INDEX. 



213 



Inrj ement, plural of nouns 59-60 
" of verbs . . . 60-66 
Indu .... 79 and n. 2, 23 

Injicit (inicit) 126 

Innuba 40 

Inus, adjectives in . . . 99-100 
lo and io . . . .20 and n. 2 
Ionic verses .... 188-190 

" a major e 1S8 

" a minor e 189 

Is in verbs of A Jh conjugation 93 
Is in 2d fut. ind. and pcrf 
subj . ' . . . . n. 2 on 94 

Is final 92 

Isochronous feet 142 

It in contracted preterites . . 81 

Italia 128 

Iter and Itiner . n. 1 on 48-49 
Itum, supines in . 36 and n. 2 
Ius, genitive in . . . n. on 18 
Ius, proper names in . n. on 18 
Ivi in the preterite .... 64 
Tx, increment of nouns in . 55 



. 14 
. 27 
27-28 
. 126 



J not a double consonant 
J, vowel long before 
Jacio, compounds of 
Jecur, increments of 

n. 1 on 48-49 
Tuvencus, value as metrical 
authority . . . . n. on 47 



K. 



Kdfiavdpoc 



n. 2 on 28 



L final 82 

Labare, labi 38 

Lar, quantity of a in n. 1 on 89 

Legare, legere 38 

Leonine verses 168 

Letters 13 

Liquefacio 44 

Liquids . 13 

Livius Andronicus, value as 

metrical authority . . .206 
Logaazdic verses . . 190-192 
Lucerna from luceo . n. on 38 
liUcilius, value as metrical au- 
thority 206 



Page 

Lucretius, value as metrical 

authority 207 

Lucrifacio and lucrifio . . 45 
Ludi-magister . ... . . 45 

M. 

M final short 84 

M " elided 84 

M " " (the reason) 

n. 1 on 84 

M " not elided .... 84 
M " in the best writers eli- 
ded except in compounds of 
com (con) and circum . . 85 
Mseotis, quantity of 1st sylla- 
ble n. on 25 

Maledicus 40 

Mamercus, value as metrical 

authority . . . . n. on 47 
Maragdus (Mupaydog) n. 2 on 28 
Martianus Capelia, value as 
metrical authority n. 1 on 89 

Mas, maris 51 

Mastix, -igis, and mastix, 

-Ichis 55 

Meiurus tetrameter . . . .148 

Metathesis 125 

Metre, definition of . . . . 140 
" classification of 140—141 
Mini, sibi, tibi, . n. 2 on 73 
Modo, quantity of final syllable 

n. 1 on 78 

Mdlestus from mdles 

n. 3 on 37-38 

Monocolon 200 

Mutes 13 

" and liquids . . . 29-30 



N. 



85 



N final 

Naevius, value as metrical au- 
thority 206 

Nasidienus as Nasld-yenus . 120 

Ne, elision in 109 

Necesse, nefas, fyc. n. 3 on 44 

Nenii n. 2 on 79 

Nequeo .... n. 3 on 44 
Nequis, nequam, Sec . n. 3 on 44 
Nescis . . . . n. 4 on 93, 100 



O. 



O final . . . . 
O in composition 



74-79 
. 47 



INDEX. 



Page 

O in Greek cases .... 5(5 
O in " nominatives . . 75 
in singular increment of 3d 

declension 56 

O terminating 1st member of 

compound Greek words . . 47 
O terminating 1st member of 

compound Latin words . . 47 
O in plural increment of nouns 59 
O in the gerund . . n. 3 on 76 
O in increment of verbs . . 66 
of adverbs . . . n. 4 on 76 
Ob, preposition in composition 

41, 42 

Objicio (obicio) 126 

Octo 78-79 

Octonarius 173 

Odyssey translated in Satur- 

nian verse 199 

Ohe ..... 19 and n., 71 
Olus, diminutives in . . . 100 

Omitto 127 

On, Greek singular ... 87 
On (QN), Greek gen. plural . 85 
Ophites versus . . . n. on 157 
Or, Greek nouns in ... 57 
Orion .... 23 and n. 1, 57 

Os final 95 

Ovid, value as metrical au- 
thority 207 

P. 

Pacuvius, value as metrical 

authority 206 

Paednius and Paeonius 

n. 2 on 116 

Palus 96 and n. 2 

Par, paris, and compounds 

51, n. 1 on 89 

Paragoge 124 

Parietibus as par-yetibus . 119 

Parcemiac 162, 164 

Patefacio 44 

Patronymics, quantity of pe- 
nult of 98-99 

Pejero 40 

Peleldes and Pelides n. 2 on 98 

Penes 92 

Pentadius, de adventu veris 

ft. 1 on 157 

Pentastrophon 201 

Penthemimeris . . n. 1 on 102 
Penultima . . . . 15 



Paga 

Penultima of w< fds, quantity 

of 98-100 

Pepedi 31 

Per, preposition in composition 41 
Perfects, old, how formed . .123 
Phaedrus, value as metrical 

■ authority 207 

Phalcecian dactylic pentameter 

150, 191 

PhalcEcian hcndecasyllabic . 191 
Pherccratic verse . . . .181 
Plaeare, placere .... 38 

Platea 21 

Plautus, value as metrical au- 
thority 207 

Pluvi, old perfect . . . .123 
Poets, Latin, relative value as 
metrical authorities . . . 205 

Polypus 97 

Porsonian pause . . . .171 

Position 27 

Possls n. 4 on 93 

Postea n. 1 on 67 

Pree, preposition in composi- 
tion before a vowel . 25 and n. 
Prepositions in composition 40-43 ' 
Preterites, reduplicating . . 31 
" of two syllables 

32 and n. 
" in ui anciently had 

u long 124 

Priamides 128 

Priapean verse 160 

Pro, the preposition in compo- 
sition 42-43 

Pronuba 40 

Propago 43 

Propertius, value as metrical 

authority 207 

Propino 43 

Prosody !i3 

Prosodial rules, origin of . ^5 

Prosthesis 122 

Prudentius, value as metrical 
authority . . . n. 1 on 21 

Puta n. 2 on 67 

Putrefacio 44 

Q. 

Q, sound of 14 

Quadrigae 45 

Quando .... n. 1 on 47 
Quandoque 47 



INDEX. 



215 



Page 

QuandoqujJem 47 

Quantity, definition of . . . 14 

Quasi n. 1 on 72 

Quatuor, $c 129 

Quia, final syllable of n. 3 on 67 
Quivis, iSfC. . . . n. 1 on 46 
Quomodo .... n, 3 on 78 
Quotidianus . . . n. 4 on 46 
Quotidie . . . . n. 4 on 46 

R. 

R final 87 

Rare — facio, tmesis in . .125 
Re in composition .... 41 
Re, vocative from nominative 

in 126 

Re made long in religio, fyc. 128 
Recensitum ... n. 2 on 36 

Refert 41 and n. 

Regula from rego . . n. on 38 
Reperit, repulit, and retulit 

128-129 

Rutum and compounds . . 35 
S. 

S final 80 

S " elided 108 

Sal, satis . . . 51, n. 1 on 83 

Sandix, -icis 56 

Sanscrit analogies in Latin . 17, 
18, 33, 45, n. 1 on 46, n. 2 on 83 
Sapphic verses . . . 184-185 
" " connexion be- 
tween 3d and 4th line in . 185 
Sapphic verses, elision in . .186 

" greater 187 

Sappho, inventress of Molic 

pentameter 151 

Satin' n. 2 on 86 

Saturnian verse 199 

Sc, sp, sq, st, SfC, initial . 28 
Scamander and Camander 

n. 2 on 28 

Scanning 144 

Scazon 171 

Scidi from scindo .... 32 
Scio and nescio .... 75 
Se, preposition in composition 40 
Sedare, sedere, sidere, sedes 38 

Selibra 44 

Semisopitus 40 

Semivowels 13 

Senarius ....... 169 



Page 

Serpentini versus . . n. on 157 
Sidon, increment of ... 57 
Sis from sies . . . n. 3 on 93 

Sm initial. 28 

Smaragdus and Man gdus 

n. 2 on 28 

Sol n. 2 on 83 

Solvo, soluo . . . n. 3 on 35 

Sotadic verse 188 

Spondaic tetrameter . . .149 

Statim 100 

Statlm n. 1 on 100 

Statum, quantity of penult of 34 

Steti and stiti 32 

Sub, preposition in composition 41 
Subjicio (subicio) . . . .126 
Supellex, increment of 

n. 1 on 48-49 
Supines of tioo syllables 33 and n. 
" " " short, 

as citum, SfC 34 

Supines, polysyllabic . . 35-37 
" contracted n. 1 on 37 
Syllable, definition of . . . 13 
" length of ..... 14 

Synceresis . . . . . .114 

" in compounds of 

semi 119 

Synalcepha 108 

" absorbs 2 syllables 108 
" confounded by 
Quintilian with synaresis 
and ecthlipsis . . n. 1 on 107 

Synapheia 130 

" with elision . .131 

Syncope 122-123 

Syphax, -acis ... 52 and n. 
Systole 126 

Sy z ygy i4i 

T. 

T final 80 

Tantidem . . . n. 2 on 46 
Tenuia as ten-via . . . .120 

Tepefacio 44 

Terence, value as metrical au- 
thority 207 

Tetrastrophon 201 

Tibicen .... n. 1 on 45- 
Tim, adverbs m . , * . .100 
Tibullus, valx-e, as metrical au- 
thority 207 

Tmesis . . 224, n. 1 on 125 



216 



INDEX. 



Trans in composi ion ... 42 
Tricolon ...... 201 

Triemime.'is . . . n. 1 on 102 

Tristrophon 201 

Trochaic verses . . . 176-179 
" tetramUer catalectic 177 
" dimeter . . . .177 
" " catalectic . 177 
Tubicen .... n. 1 on 45 
Tuli . 32 

U. 

U sounded as W, and not form- 
ing a diphthong with follow- 
ing vowel 26 

U sounded as V, and used as 

a consonant 120 

U in 1st member of -compound 

words 45 

U in singular increment of 

nouns 58-59 

U in plural increment of nouns 59 
U in increment of verbs . . 66 

U final 79 

U, contracted dative of^th de- 
clension . . . n. 1 on 79 
Ubi and compounds n. 2 on 73, 74 
Ubicunque . . . n. 5 on 46 
Ubique and ubivis . n. 5 on 46 
Ulus, diminutives in . . .100 
Ulysse {vocative) . n. 1 on 69 
Urio, quantity of verbs end- 
ing in 39, 100 

Urus, future participle in . 66 

Us final 95 

Us, genitive of 4=th declension, 

how formed . . n. 3 on 96 
Ut and compounds . . . 73-74 
Ut um, supines in 

J 36 and n. 2, n. 3 on 35 



V, use of . . . ... 14 

Value of I,atin poets as met- 
rical authorities . . 205-208 
Vemens, tf-c. . . . n. 2 on 118 

Verse, union of different kinds 

of 200 

Verse, Latin, how denominated 144 
Viden' . . 127, n. 2 on 86, 109 

Vin'/orvisne 109 

Virgil, value as metrical au- 
thority 207 

Volvo, voluo . . . n. 3 on 35 

Vowels 13 

Vowel before another vowel . 16 
" " « " in 

Greek words 20 

Vowel before h 16 

Vulteius . . . . n. 2 on 18 

X. 

X, double letter, equivalent to 

what 13 

X initial 28 



Y. 



72, 80 

of 

45 
54 
26 
92 
55 



Y final .... 

Y terminating 1st member 
compound words . 

Y in increment of nouns 
Yi as diphthong . . . 

Ys final 

Yx, increment of nouns in 

Z. 

Z, double letter, equivalent to 

what 

Z initial 28 

Z, reason for preceding vowel 
remaining short before 

n. 3 on 28 



13 



THE END. 



it 



